[go: up one dir, main page]

CN101523909B - Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium - Google Patents

Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN101523909B
CN101523909B CN2007800373823A CN200780037382A CN101523909B CN 101523909 B CN101523909 B CN 101523909B CN 2007800373823 A CN2007800373823 A CN 2007800373823A CN 200780037382 A CN200780037382 A CN 200780037382A CN 101523909 B CN101523909 B CN 101523909B
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
function
display
unit
display data
script
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related
Application number
CN2007800373823A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN101523909A (en
Inventor
古川裕史
平田真章
仁田壮一
首藤达生
梅本梓
江夏彩
高桥雅史
木下拓也
樫东清贵
土居克良
江口悟史
音川英之
坂仓健太郎
桥浦正树
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sharp Corp
Original Assignee
Sharp Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2007168255A external-priority patent/JP4926853B2/en
Application filed by Sharp Corp filed Critical Sharp Corp
Publication of CN101523909A publication Critical patent/CN101523909A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN101523909B publication Critical patent/CN101523909B/en
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/81Monomedia components thereof
    • H04N21/8166Monomedia components thereof involving executable data, e.g. software
    • H04N21/8193Monomedia components thereof involving executable data, e.g. software dedicated tools, e.g. video decoder software or IPMP tool
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/443OS processes, e.g. booting an STB, implementing a Java virtual machine in an STB or power management in an STB

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Controls And Circuits For Display Device (AREA)

Abstract

A television (1) of the present invention comprises: a basic function executing section (42) for executing a basic function program called from a control script, the basic function program being stored in a basic function program storage section (29); and a control script executing section (41) for controlling the basic function executing section (42) according to the control script so as to perform first and second functions, the control script defining as the second function, at least a visual effect outputting function for adding a visual effect to an image displayed by the first function, so that the image is displayed with movement; and the control script executing section (41) displaying the image and executing the visual effect outputting function to the image according to the control script. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the functions of the apparatus.

Description

显示装置、数据提供装置、显示系统、显示系统的控制方法、控制程序以及记录介质Display device, data providing device, display system, control method of display system, control program, and recording medium

技术领域 technical field

本发明涉及组合型设备的控制方法,特别是涉及对显示图像的图像显示装置进行控制的、图像显示装置、图像数据提供装置、图像显示系统、图像显示系统的控制方法、控制程序以及记录介质。  The present invention relates to a control method of combined equipment, in particular to an image display device, an image data providing device, an image display system, a control method of the image display system, a control program and a recording medium for controlling an image display device displaying images. the

背景技术 Background technique

近年来,数字家用电器的利用正在扩大。而且,以数字电视机和HDD(HardDisk Drive:硬盘驱动器)记录装置为代表的具有通信功能的这些数字家用电器与网络连接,通过网络可以利用多种服务,执行多种功能。  In recent years, the use of digital home appliances is expanding. Furthermore, these digital home appliances having a communication function represented by digital televisions and HDD (Hard Disk Drive: Hard Disk Drive) recording devices are connected to a network, and various services can be utilized and various functions can be performed through the network. the

然而,其另一面则要求对这些数字家用电器装入多种功能。因此,为应对数字家用电器的多样性而在开发现场出现的问题正变得越来越严重。作为具体的问题,可以列举有抑制开发工时和测试工时的增大、减少因返工导致的损失为了应对变化剧烈的市场而快速应对设备的功能变更等。  However, the other side requires loading multiple functions into these digital home appliances. Therefore, problems arising at the development site in response to the diversity of digital home appliances are becoming more and more serious. Specific issues include suppressing increases in development man-hours and test man-hours, reducing losses due to rework, and quickly responding to changes in equipment functions in response to rapidly changing markets. the

从上述现状可知,需要能有效地开发数字家用电器的结构。又,对于一旦上市的数字家用电器,希望能够提供购入了该设备的用户可以容易地更新设备程序的结构。  As can be seen from the present situation described above, there is a need for a structure capable of efficiently developing digital home appliances. In addition, it is desirable to provide a structure in which a user who has purchased the digital home appliance can easily update the program of the device once it is released to the market. the

作为变更数字家用电器的功能的方法,可以列举有例如像便携式电话中的Java(注册商标)等那样,或下载程序,或数字家用电器(例如HDD记录装置)自动更新等(例如,参照下述非专利文献1和非专利文献2)。  As a method of changing the function of a digital home appliance, for example, as Java (registered trademark) in a mobile phone, etc., or downloading a program, or automatically updating a digital home appliance (such as an HDD recording device) etc. (for example, refer to the following Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2). the

然而,问题是变更数字家用电器的程序从而进行设备的功能变更并不容易。  However, there is a problem that it is not easy to change the program of the digital home appliance to change the function of the device. the

具体而言,在非专利文献1和非专利文献2所记载的方法中,数字家用电器所具有的互联网浏览器是用于浏览从外部装置获取的数据的软件。数字家用电器利用互联网浏览器的功能,可以获取通过互联网分配的数据并进行显示。这时,若变更分配的数据,就可以改变该数字家用电器的显示内容。  Specifically, in the methods described in Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2, the Internet browser included in the digital home appliance is software for browsing data acquired from an external device. Digital home appliances can acquire and display data distributed via the Internet using the function of an Internet browser. At this time, if the assigned data is changed, the display content of the digital home appliance can be changed. the

然而,对显示内容变更该数字家用电器执行的功能并不容易。这是由于, 互联网浏览器的功能是由该数字家用电器存放在存储装置中的程序确定的。为了变更上述数字家用电器所具有的互联网浏览器的功能,数据的分配方需要进行程序更新,并把更新了的程序分配到上述数字家用电器。  However, it is not easy to change the function performed by the digital home appliance for the displayed content. This is because the function of the Internet browser is determined by the program stored in the storage device by the digital home appliance. In order to change the function of the Internet browser included in the digital home appliance, the data distributor needs to update the program and distribute the updated program to the digital home appliance. the

对于分配方,为了变更功能,必须不断地更新程序,因此存在开发的负担变大的问题。又,对于数字家用电器的用户存在的问题是,每一次更新功能,都要强制进行从分配方获取新的程序的操作,导致不方便。  Since the distributor must constantly update the program in order to change the function, there is a problem that the burden of development increases. Also, there is a problem for users of digital home appliances that they are forced to acquire a new program from a distributor every time a function is updated, which is inconvenient. the

除此之外,上述那样变更数字家用电器的功能的结构与变更个人计算机(PC)的功能的结构相比,并不完备。这是由于,电视机和便携式电话等数字家用电器大多是组合型设备,该组合型设备执行的功能是由制造时在ROM(只读存储器)等非易失性存储装置中烧入的而不能重写的程序实现的。  In addition, the configuration for changing the functions of digital home appliances as described above is not as complete as the configuration for changing the functions of a personal computer (PC). This is because digital home appliances such as televisions and cellular phones are mostly combined equipment, and the functions performed by the combined equipment are burned in non-volatile storage devices such as ROM (read-only memory) during manufacture and cannot be stored. Implemented by rewriting the program. the

因而,即使要变更一旦上市的数字家用电器的功能,也只能更换ROM本身。然而,不能说这种方法是任何人都能实现的简单操作,由于要耗费巨大的成本,因此并不现实。  Therefore, even if the function of a digital home appliance once launched is to be changed, only the ROM itself can be replaced. However, this method cannot be said to be a simple operation that anyone can implement, and it is not realistic because it requires a huge cost. the

此外,上述问题并不仅仅只在数字家用电器中产生,只要是像该数字家用电器那样是由制造时烧在ROM中的程序执行功能的组合型设备,都会产生同样的问题。  In addition, the above-mentioned problems are not limited to digital home appliances, as long as they are composite devices whose functions are executed by programs burned in ROM at the time of manufacture, the same problems will occur. the

专利文献1:日本公开专利公报特开2005-51563号公报(公开日:2005年2月24日)  Patent Document 1: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2005-51563 (publication date: February 24, 2005)

专利文献2:日本公开专利公报特开平6-149533号公报(公开日:1994年5月27日)  Patent Document 2: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-149533 (publication date: May 27, 1994)

专利文献3:日本公开专利公报特开平11-65813号公报(公开日:1999年3月9日)  Patent Document 3: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-65813 (publication date: March 9, 1999)

专利文献4:日本公开专利公报特开2004-343683号公报(公开日:2004年12月2日)  Patent Document 4: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2004-343683 (publication date: December 2, 2004)

专利文献5:日本公开专利公报特开2005-158015号公报(公开日:2005年6月16日)  Patent Document 5: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2005-158015 (publication date: June 16, 2005)

非专利文献1:  Non-Patent Document 1:

i-appli(注册商标)内容概要  i-appli (registered trademark) Outline of Contents

[平成18年7月31日检索],因特网址<URL:  [Retrieved on July 31, 2018], Internet address <URL: 

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/imode/make/content/iappli/about/index.html>  http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/imode/make/content/iappli/about/index.html>

非专利文献2:  Non-Patent Document 2:

Vappli  Vappli

[平成18年7月31日检索],因特网址  [Retrieved on July 31, 2018], Internet URL

<URL:http://developers.vodafone.jp/dp/tech_svc/java/>  <URL: http://developers.vodafone.jp/dp/tech_svc/java/>

发明内容 Contents of the invention

本发明的目的在于实现一种能够容易地进行设备的功能变更的图像显示装置、图像数据提供装置、图像显示系统、图像显示系统的控制方法、控制程序以及记录介质。  An object of the present invention is to realize an image display device, an image data providing device, an image display system, a control method of the image display system, a control program, and a recording medium capable of easily changing functions of devices. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示装置对从外部获取的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像,该图像显示装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的本装置的动作即第二功能,该图像显示装置包括:执行存放于基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42;以及按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42执行上述控制脚本中定义的上述第一功能和上述第二功能的控制脚本执行部41,上述控制脚本中,至少定义有伴随动作地显示利用上述第一功能显示的图像的视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本显示上述图像,并且对该图像执行视觉效果输出功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display device of the present invention processes display data acquired from the outside to display an image, and the image display device is characterized in that the display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines the The first function of the image and the operation of the device when the image is displayed using the first function, that is, the second function, the image display device includes: executing the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit called from the above control script and a control script execution unit 41 that controls the above-mentioned basic function execution unit 42 to execute the above-mentioned first function and the above-mentioned second function defined in the above-mentioned control script according to the above-mentioned control script. In the above-mentioned control script, at least As the second function, a visual effect output function of displaying an image displayed by the first function accompanying the operation, the control script execution unit 41 displays the image according to the control script and executes a visual effect output function on the image. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置获取包括图像和至少定义显示该图像的第一功能的控制脚本的显示用数据,对该显示用数据进行处理,从而显示上述图像。具体而言,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本,控制执行从包含在显示用数据中的控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42,执行控制脚本中定义的功能(第一功能),从而显示图像。即,根据控制脚本对一个以上的上述基本功能进行组合,从而实现图像显示装置的一个功能(上述第一功能等)。  According to the above configuration, the image display device acquires display data including an image and a control script defining at least a first function for displaying the image, processes the display data, and displays the image. Specifically, the control script execution unit 41 controls and executes the basic function execution unit 42 that executes the basic function program called from the control script included in the display data according to the control script, and executes the function (first function) defined in the control script. , displaying the image. That is, one or more basic functions described above are combined based on the control script to realize one function (the first function described above, etc.) of the image display device. the

而且,在上述控制脚本中,除了定义显示图像的第一功能外,还定义有利用该第一功能显示上述目标物时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对上述基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  Furthermore, in the control script, in addition to defining the first function of displaying an image, an operation of the image display device when the object is displayed by the first function is defined as a second function. The above-mentioned second function is also a function of the image display device realized by combining the above-mentioned basic functions. the

上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行上述第二功能。  The control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 to execute the second function according to the control script. the

从而,利用控制脚本,在图像显示装置中不仅能够实现显示图像的功能,还能 够实现多种第二功能。  Therefore, using the control script, not only the function of displaying an image but also various second functions can be realized in the image display device. the

具体而言,是在控制脚本中定义伴随动作地显示利用上述第一功能显示的图像的视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能。  Specifically, a visual effect output function for displaying an image displayed by the first function accompanying an action is defined in the control script as the second function. the

因而,上述控制脚本执行部41利用第一功能显示上述图像,并且对该图像执行视觉效果输出功能。即,使上述图像带有动作地显示该图像。  Therefore, the control script execution unit 41 displays the image using the first function, and executes the visual effect output function on the image. That is, the above-mentioned image is displayed with motion. the

这样,若利用控制脚本,则可以根据要显示的内容,将上述视觉效果输出功能每次都包含在显示用数据内而提供给图像显示装置。从而,根据显示何种图像,可以使图像显示装置执行视觉效果输出功能。利用第二功能即视觉效果输出功能,可以结合显示内容向用户提供十分有趣的内容。  Thus, by using the control script, the above-mentioned visual effect output function can be included in the display data every time according to the content to be displayed, and can be provided to the image display device. Thus, depending on what kind of image is displayed, the image display device can be made to perform a visual effect output function. Utilizing the second function, that is, the visual effect output function, very interesting content can be provided to the user in combination with the displayed content. the

由以上可知,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  As can be seen from the above, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit can be easily implemented without updating the basic function program. Functional change of the image display device. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像数据提供装置生成图像显示装置显示图像用的显示用数据,该图像数据提供装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的该图像显示装置的动作即第二功能,该图像数据提供装置包括:根据从上述图像显示装置发送来的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息获取所请求的请求图像的识别信息的显示对象ID获取部71;生成控制脚本的控制脚本生成部80,该控制脚本定义显示由上述显示对象ID获取部71获取的识别信息所确定的请求图像的第一功能,并且至少定义伴随动作地显示该请求图像的视觉效果输出功能作为第二功能;以及生成显示用数据的显示用数据生成部62,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本。  In order to achieve the above object, the image data providing device of the present invention generates display data for displaying an image by the image display device, and the image data providing device is characterized in that the above-mentioned display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines how to display the image. The first function of the image and the second function of the operation of the image display device when the image is displayed by the first function, the image data providing device includes: displaying the display data according to a request sent from the image display device The display object ID acquisition part 71 that acquires the identification information of the requested image with the data request message; the control script generation part 80 that generates the control script, and the control script defines the display determined by the identification information acquired by the above-mentioned display object ID acquisition part 71. The first function of the request image, and at least define the visual effect output function of displaying the request image accompanying the action as the second function; The control script generated by the control script generating unit 80 . the

根据上述结构,图像数据提供装置根据上述图像显示装置所生成的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息,生成显示所请求的图像即请求图像用的显示用数据。显示用数据包括请求图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义显示该请求图像的第一功能以及与该请求图像有关的上述第二功能。这里,至少定义视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,该视觉效果输出功能使得显示上述请求图像时,向该请求图像添加动作而显示。  According to the above configuration, the image data providing device generates display data for displaying a requested image, that is, a requested image, based on a display data request message generated by the image display device for requesting the display data. The display data includes a request image and a control script defining a first function for displaying the request image and the aforementioned second function related to the request image. Here, at least a visual effect output function for displaying the requested image by adding an action to the requested image is defined as the second function. the

具体而言,上述显示对象ID获取部71从上述显示用数据请求消息,获取请求图像的识别信息。根据该识别信息,对显示用数据中应包含的请求图像进行确定。  Specifically, the display object ID acquisition unit 71 acquires identification information of a requested image from the display data request message. Based on this identification information, the requested image to be included in the display data is specified. the

然后,上述控制脚本生成部80生成定义了显示上述请求图像的第一功能的控 制脚本。而且,在该控制脚本中还添加以下定义。即,是利用上述第一功能显示上述请求图像时的上述图像显示装置的作为第二功能的动作的定义。上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述显示用数据请求消息的内容,生成定义了该第二功能(至少是上述视觉效果输出功能)的控制脚本。  Then, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the first function of displaying the requested image. Also, add the following definitions to this control script. That is, it is a definition of an operation as the second function of the image display device when the requested image is displayed by the first function. The control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function (at least the visual effect output function) based on the content of the display data request message. the

最后,上述显示用数据生成部62生成包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本的显示用数据。  Finally, the display data generation unit 62 generates display data including the request image and the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 . the

由此,根据图像显示装置所请求的显示用数据(图像),可以生成定义了第一和第二功能的控制脚本,可以提供包含这样的控制脚本的显示用数据,作为对图像显示装置请求的响应。  Thus, based on the display data (image) requested by the image display device, a control script defining the first and second functions can be generated, and the display data including such a control script can be provided as a request to the image display device. response. the

上述控制脚本生成部80生成上述控制脚本,除了定义图像显示装置显示请求图像的第一功能外,还定义利用该第一功能显示上述请求图像时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对图像显示装置的基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  The control script generating unit 80 generates the control script to define, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when displaying the requested image by the first function in addition to the first function of the image display device to display the requested image. The second function described above is also a function of the image display device realized by combining basic functions of the image display device. the

从而,通过根据显示用数据的内容生成控制脚本并提供给图像显示装置,不仅能够提供显示请求图像的功能,还能够提供多种第二功能给图像显示装置。而且,作为第二功能,由于至少定义了上述视觉效果输出功能,因此,上述图像显示装置能够对利用第一功能显示的图像添加动作而显示,利用该视觉效果输出功能,可以结合显示内容向用户提供更加有趣的内容。  Therefore, by generating a control script based on the content of the display data and providing it to the image display device, not only the function of displaying the requested image but also various second functions can be provided to the image display device. Moreover, as the second function, since at least the above-mentioned visual effect output function is defined, the above-mentioned image display device can add actions to the image displayed by the first function and display it. Using this visual effect output function, it is possible to combine the displayed content to the user. Provide more interesting content. the

如上所述,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对图像显示装置的基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  As described above, even after the image display device is launched, the second function executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed without updating the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit of the image display device. Functional changes of the image display device can be easily performed. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置;以及上述图像数据提供装置,上述图像显示装置的上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述图像数据提供装置提供的显示用数据中包含的上述控制脚本,执行与上述请求图像有关的视觉效果输出功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display system of the present invention is characterized in that it includes: the above-mentioned image display device; The above-mentioned control script included in the data executes the visual effect output function related to the above-mentioned requested image. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的控制方法是包括图像数据提供装置和对该图像数据提供装置生成的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像的图像显示装置的图像显示系统的控制方法,它的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置向上述图像数据提供装置请求显示用数据的请求步骤,该显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,所述控制脚本定义显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的本装置的动作即第二功能;上述图像数据提供装置生成控制脚本的生成步骤,该 控制脚本定义显示由上述图像显示装置所请求的请求图像的第一功能,并且定义使该请求图像伴随动作显示的视觉效果输出功能作为第二功能;将显示用数据发送到上述图像显示装置的发送步骤,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和在上述生成步骤中生成的控制脚本;第一功能执行步骤,该第一功能执行步骤是上述图像显示装置按照从上述图像数据提供装置接收的上述控制脚本,执行存放在基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序,从而执行上述第一功能并显示上述请求图像;以及第二功能执行步骤,该第二功能执行步骤是按照上述控制脚本执行上述基本功能程序,从而执行与上述图像有关的视觉效果输出功能作为第二功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the method for controlling an image display system of the present invention is a method for controlling an image display system including an image data providing device and an image display device that processes display data generated by the image data providing device to display an image. The present invention is characterized by comprising: a request step in which the image display device requests display data from the image data providing device, the display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines a first function for displaying the image and uses the second function to display the image. The second function is the operation of the device when the first function displays the above-mentioned image; the step of generating a control script by the above-mentioned image data providing device, the control script defines the first function of displaying the requested image requested by the above-mentioned image display device, and defines A visual effect output function for displaying the requested image along with the action as a second function; a sending step of sending display data to the above-mentioned image display device, the display data including the above-mentioned request image and the control script generated in the above-mentioned generating step; A first function executing step, wherein the image display device executes a basic function program stored in a basic function program storage unit called from the control script according to the control script received from the image data providing device, Thereby executing the above-mentioned first function and displaying the above-mentioned request image; and a second function execution step, the second function execution step is to execute the above-mentioned basic function program according to the above-mentioned control script, thereby executing the visual effect output function related to the above-mentioned image as the second Function. the

根据上述方法,上述图像显示装置向上述图像数据提供装置请求显示用数据,该显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,所述控制脚本定义显示该图像的第一功能以及显示该图像时的图像显示装置的动作即第二功能,上述图像数据提供装置根据该请求,生成包含所请求图像的显示用数据。然后,上述图像数据提供装置按如下所述那样生成包含在上述显示用数据中的控制脚本。  According to the above method, the image display device requests display data from the image data providing device, the display data includes an image and a control script, the control script defines a first function for displaying the image and the image display device when displaying the image The operation of the second function is that the image data providing device generates display data including the requested image in response to the request. Then, the image data providing device generates a control script included in the display data as follows. the

即,首先生成控制脚本,该控制脚本定义显示所请求图像的第一功能,并且定义利用该第一功能显示上述目标物时的上述图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。这里,至少定义视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,该视觉效果输出功能使得上述图像伴随动作显示。  That is, first, a control script is generated which defines a first function for displaying a requested image, and defines, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when the object is displayed using the first function. Here, at least a visual effect output function that causes the above-mentioned image to be displayed with an action is defined as the above-mentioned second function. the

上述图像显示装置从上述图像数据提供装置接收包含上述那样生成的控制脚本的显示用数据,控制脚本执行部41根据上述控制脚本进行动作。具体而言,按照控制脚本,执行第一功能和第二功能(至少是视觉效果输出功能)。从而,可以对利用第一功能显示的图像添加有关的视觉效果,并进行显示。  The image display device receives display data including the control script generated as described above from the image data provider, and the control script execution unit 41 operates according to the control script. Specifically, the first function and the second function (at least the visual effect output function) are executed according to the control script. Therefore, relevant visual effects can be added to the image displayed by the first function and displayed. the

由此,利用控制脚本,可以实现这样的图像显示系统,该图像显示系统不仅能够使图像显示装置执行显示图像的第一功能,还能够使其执行多种第二功能,并且在第二功能是视觉效果输出功能的情况下,在该图像显示装置中,能够对上述图像添加动作并进行显示。  Thus, by using the control script, it is possible to realize an image display system that not only causes the image display device to perform the first function of displaying images, but also enables it to perform various second functions, and when the second function is In the case of the visual effect output function, the image display device can add motion to the image and display it. the

由以上可知,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。而且,由于可以对显示图像添加相应的视觉效果而显示图像,因此能够提供更加有趣的内容给用户。  As can be seen from the above, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit can be easily implemented without updating the basic function program. Functional change of the image display device. Moreover, since the image can be displayed by adding corresponding visual effects to the displayed image, more interesting content can be provided to the user. the

本发明的其他目的、特征以及优点根据以下所示的叙述应该可以充分了解。又,本发明的优点从参照附图的以下说明中应该可以明白。  Other objects, features, and advantages of the present invention should be fully understood from the description below. In addition, advantages of the present invention should be apparent from the following description with reference to the accompanying drawings. the

附图说明 Description of drawings

图1是表示本发明实施方式的电视机的简要结构的框图。  FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a television set according to an embodiment of the present invention. the

图2是表示本发明实施方式的网络相册系统的简要结构的框图。  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a network album system according to an embodiment of the present invention. the

图3是表示本发明实施方式的显示用数据的数据结构的示意图。  FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure of display data according to an embodiment of the present invention. the

图4是表示本发明实施方式的显示用数据生成装置的简要结构的框图。  4 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display data generation device according to an embodiment of the present invention. the

图5是表示本发明实施方式的网络相册系统中各装置的处理流程的顺序图。  5 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of each device in the network album system according to the embodiment of the present invention. the

图6是表示本实施方式的电视机的主要部分结构的框图,是更加详细地表示图1所示电视机的显示用数据请求处理部的图。  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of the TV set according to the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing the display data request processing unit of the TV set shown in FIG. 1 in more detail. the

图7是表示电视机的显示用数据请求处理部生成的显示用数据请求消息的数据结构的示意图。  7 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure of a display data request message generated by a display data request processing unit of the television. the

图8是表示电视机的相关信息存储部中存储的相关信息表的一个示例图。  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a related information table stored in a related information storage unit of the television. the

图9是表示本实施方式的电视机的主要部分结构的框图,是更加详细地表示图1所示电视机的显示用数据执行处理部的图。  FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of the TV set according to the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing the display data execution processing unit of the TV set shown in FIG. 1 in more detail. the

图10是表示本发明的电视机中显示用数据执行处理流程的流程图。  Fig. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of display data execution processing in the television of the present invention. the

图11是表示电视机根据控制脚本而在显示部进行显示的显示画面的显示示例图。  11 is a diagram showing a display example of a display screen displayed on a display unit of the television based on a control script. the

图12是表示电视机的控制脚本执行部在执行显示用数据执行处理时所参照的控制脚本的具体示例图。  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script that the control script execution unit of the television refers to when executing display data execution processing. the

图13是表示电视机的控制脚本执行部在执行显示用数据执行处理时所参照的控制脚本的具体示例图。  13 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script that the control script execution unit of the television refers to when executing display data execution processing. the

图14是表示电视机的控制脚本执行部在执行显示用数据执行处理时所参照的控制脚本的具体示例图。  14 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script that the control script execution unit of the television refers to when executing display data execution processing. the

图15是表示电视机的控制脚本执行部在执行显示用数据执行处理时所参照的控制脚本的具体示例图。  15 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script that the control script execution unit of the television refers to when executing display data execution processing. the

图16是表示电视机根据控制脚本而在显示部进行显示的操作菜单的示例图。  16 is a diagram showing an example of an operation menu displayed on the display unit of the television based on a control script. the

图17(a)是表示操作菜单确定脚本的具体示例图。  Fig. 17(a) is a diagram showing a specific example of an operation menu determination script. the

图17(b)是表示电视机根据图17(a)所示的操作菜单确定脚本而显示的操作菜单的显示示例图。  FIG. 17( b ) is a diagram showing a display example of an operation menu displayed by the television based on the operation menu determination script shown in FIG. 17( a ). the

图18是表示本实施方式的显示用数据生成装置的主要部分结构的框图。  FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the main configuration of the display data generation device according to the present embodiment. the

图19是表示显示用数据生成装置的模式数据存储部中存储的模式数据表的示例图。  19 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern data table stored in a pattern data storage unit of the display data generating device. the

图20是表示网络相册系统的网络相册DB中存储的相册信息表的示例图。  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an album information table stored in a network album DB of the network album system. the

图21是表示网络相册DB中存储的照片信息表的示例图。  Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a photo information table stored in a network album DB. the

图22是表示显示用数据生成装置的选项选择规则存储部中存储的操作选项选择部选择操作选项用的规则表的示例图。  22 is a diagram showing an example of a rule table for selecting an operation option by the operation option selection unit stored in the option selection rule storage unit of the display data generation device. the

图23是表示显示用数据生成装置的操作功能存储部中存储的功能表的示例图。  23 is a diagram showing an example of a function table stored in an operation function storage unit of the display data generating device. the

图24是表示模式数据的具体示例图。  Fig. 24 is a diagram showing a specific example of pattern data. the

图25是表示显示用数据生成装置的操作功能定义生成部生成的操作功能定义脚本的具体示例图。  25 is a diagram showing a specific example of an operation function definition script generated by an operation function definition generation unit of the display data generation device. the

图26是表示显示用数据生成装置的操作功能定义生成部生成的操作功能定义脚本的具体示例图。  26 is a diagram showing a specific example of an operation function definition script generated by the operation function definition generation unit of the display data generation device. the

图27是详细表示显示用数据生成装置中生成显示用数据的处理流程的流程图。  Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of processing for generating display data in the display data generating device. the

图28是表示变更了操作选项名称的操作菜单显示示例图。  Fig. 28 is a diagram showing an example of display of an operation menu in which the names of operation options have been changed. the

图29是表示操作选项的显示顺序变更前后的操作菜单显示示例图。  Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of operation menu display before and after changing the display order of operation options. the

图30是表示电视机执行聚焦显示处理用的控制脚本的具体示例图。  Fig. 30 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script for the television to execute focus display processing. the

图31是表示电视机根据控制脚本而聚焦显示的子操作菜单的显示示例图。  Fig. 31 is a diagram showing a display example of a sub-operation menu that is focused and displayed on the TV according to a control script. the

图32是表示本发明实施方式的显示用数据中包含的控制脚本的具体示例图。  Fig. 32 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script included in the display data according to the embodiment of the present invention. the

图33是表示电视机根据控制脚本而在显示部进行显示的包含目标物的显示画面的具体示例图,图33(a)是表示电视机根据控制脚本而在显示部进行显示的包含变更前的目标物的显示画面的具体示例图,图33(b)是表示包含变更后的目标物的显示画面的具体示例图,图33(c)是表示伴随显示画面从图33(a)变更到图33(b)而控制脚本指定的再描绘区域的图。  33 is a diagram showing a specific example of a display screen including an object displayed on the display unit by the TV according to the control script. FIG. Fig. 33(b) is a diagram showing a specific example of a display screen containing a changed target object, and Fig. 33(c) shows that the display screen changes from Fig. 33(a) to Fig. 33(b) to control the map of the redrawing area specified by the script. the

图34是表示本发明的另一实施方式的电视机的主要部分结构的框图。  Fig. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of a television set according to another embodiment of the present invention. the

图35是表示DOM树的具体示例图。  Fig. 35 is a diagram showing a specific example of a DOM tree. the

图36是表示电视机的再描绘区域信息存储部中存储的信息的示例图,图36(a)是表示电视机的再描绘区域信息存储部中存储的再描绘区域列表的示例图,图36(b)是表示电视机的再描绘区域信息存储部中存储的确定再描绘区域信息的示例图。  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of information stored in the redrawing area information storage unit of the TV, and FIG. (b) is a diagram showing an example of determined re-rendering area information stored in the re-rendering area information storage unit of the television. the

图37是表示本发明的另一实施方式的电视机中的再描绘处理流程的流程图。  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the flow of re-rendering processing in a television according to another embodiment of the present invention. the

图38是表示电视机的显示画面的具体示例图,图38(a)~(d)是表示在电视机的显示部显示的包含复杂形状目标物的显示画面的具体示例图,图38(e)~(i)是表示 在上述显示画面变更时确定的再描绘区域的示例图。  Fig. 38 is a diagram showing a specific example of a display screen of a television. Fig. 38(a) to (d) are diagrams showing a specific example of a display screen containing a complex-shaped object displayed on a display unit of a television. Fig. 38(e ) to (i) are diagrams showing examples of redrawing areas determined when the above-mentioned display screen is changed. the

图39是表示执行照片旋转处理的电视机暂存部的主要部分结构的框图。  Fig. 39 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of a temporary storage unit of the television that executes photo rotation processing. the

图40是表示电视机的照片旋转控制部在旋转照片时的暂存部中的ARGB区域和预备区域的状态图。  40 is a diagram showing the state of the ARGB area and spare area in the temporary storage unit when the picture rotation control unit of the television rotates a picture. the

图41是表示根据圆形目标物和照片旋转处理过程中使用的区域指定再描绘区域的控制脚本的具体示例图。  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script for specifying a redrawing area based on a circular object and an area used in the photo rotation process. the

图42是表示电视机的照片旋转控制部执行的照片旋转处理流程的流程图。  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the flow of photo rotation processing executed by the photo rotation control unit of the television. the

图43是表示操作功能定义脚本的示例图。  Fig. 43 is a diagram showing an example of an operation function definition script. the

图44是表示按下确定按钮时的显示画面转移的示例图。  Fig. 44 is a diagram showing an example of transition of a display screen when an OK button is pressed. the

图45是表示描述条件时的状态转移定义脚本的具体示例图。  Fig. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example of a state transition definition script when describing a condition. the

图46是表示生成添加了视觉和听觉效果的显示用数据的显示用数据生成装置的主要部分结构的框图。  Fig. 46 is a block diagram showing the main configuration of a display data generation device for generating display data with added visual and auditory effects. the

图47是表示效果信息存储部中存储的效果定义脚本的示例图。  Fig. 47 is a diagram showing an example of an effect definition script stored in an effect information storage unit. the

图48是表示本发明另一实施方式的显示用数据生成装置生成显示用数据的处理流程的流程图。  48 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for generating display data by a display data generating device according to another embodiment of the present invention. the

图48是示意本发明另一实施方式的模式数据和控制脚本中分别包含的布局定义脚本的示例图。  Fig. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of layout definition scripts included in pattern data and control scripts according to another embodiment of the present invention. the

图50是表示图49所示的效果模式274a和效果定义脚本284a的具体示例图。  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect schema 274a and the effect definition script 284a shown in FIG. 49 . the

图51是表示为了根据用户的按键操作来切换有无效果来定义电视机动作的操作功能定义脚本的具体示例图。  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific example of an operation function definition script for defining the operation of the television to switch whether or not an effect is activated according to the user's key operation. the

图52是表示在电视机的显示部显示的幻灯片放映显示画面的示例图。  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a slide show display screen displayed on a display unit of a television. the

图53是表示定义电视机动作的控制脚本以使效果处理结束后再开始字符显示处理的具体示例图。  Fig. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of defining a control script for the operation of the television so that character display processing starts after the effect processing is completed. the

图54是表示包括参考脚本的控制脚本的具体示例图。  Fig. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script including a reference script. the

图55是表示电视机将从显示用数据生成装置接收的控制脚本的一部分变更后的控制脚本的具体示例图。  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script obtained by changing a part of the control script received from the display data generation device by the television. the

图56是表示电视机根据变更后的控制脚本、由显示用数据执行处理部显示的相册历史画面的一个示例图。  Fig. 56 is a diagram showing an example of an album history screen displayed by the display data execution processing unit on the TV according to the changed control script. the

图57是表示包括参考脚本的控制脚本的另一具体示例图。  Fig. 57 is a diagram showing another specific example of a control script including a reference script. the

图58是表示电视机替换前的控制脚本和替换后的控制脚本的具体示例图。  Fig. 58 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script before TV replacement and a control script after replacement. the

标号说明  Label description

1电视机(图像显示装置/显示装置)  1 TV (image display device/display device)

2显示用数据生成装置(图像数据提供装置/数据提供装置)  2 Display data generating device (image data providing device/data providing device)

3相册管理服务器  3 album management server

4计算机  4 computers

5相册  5 albums

5′相册  5′ photo album

6显示用数据请求消息  6 Display data request message

7显示用数据  7 display data

8网络相册数据库(图像信息存储部)  8Network album database (image information storage department)

10控制部  10 control department

11事件处理部  11 Incident Handling Department

12广播数据控制部  12 Broadcast Data Control Department

13操作部  13 Operation Department

14通信部  14 Ministry of Communications

14a发送部  14a Sending Department

14b接收部  14b Receiving Department

15显示部  15 display unit

16广播数据接收部  16 Broadcast Data Receiving Department

17声音输出部  17 Sound output unit

18暂存部  18 temporary storage department

19帧缓冲器  19 frame buffer

20输入输出控制部  20 Input and output control unit

21操作受理部  21 Operation Acceptance Department

22消息发送控制部  22 message sending control department

23显示用数据接收控制部  23 display data reception control unit

24显示控制部  24 display control unit

25声音输出控制部  25 sound output control unit

29基本功能程序存储部(基本功能程序存放部)  29 Basic function program storage unit (Basic function program storage unit)

30显示用数据请求处理部  30 Display data request processing unit

31显示对象ID确定部  31 display object ID determination unit

32请求显示画面确定部  32 Request Display Screen Confirmation Department

33相关信息提取部  33 Relevant Information Extraction Department

34消息生成部  34 Message Generation Department

40显示用数据执行处理部  40 display data execution processing unit

41控制脚本执行部(控制脚本执行单元/控制信息执行单元)  41 Control script execution unit (control script execution unit/control information execution unit)

42基本功能执行部(基本功能执行单元)  42 Basic function execution unit (basic function execution unit)

50存储部  50 storage department

51显示用数据存储部  51 display data storage unit

52相关信息存储部  52 Related Information Storage Department

53相册ID存储部  53 album ID storage department

54请求规则存储部  54 request rule storage department

55再描绘区域信息存储部  55 redrawing area information storage department

60控制部  60 Control Department

61模式数据选择部  61 mode data selection department

62显示用数据生成部(显示用数据生成单元)  62 display data generation unit (display data generation unit)

63通信部  63 Ministry of Communications

63a接收部  63a Receiving Department

63b发送部  63b sending department

70请求消息解析部  70 request message analysis department

71显示对象ID获取部(识别信息获取单元)  71 display object ID acquisition unit (identification information acquisition unit)

72显示画面ID获取部  72 display screen ID acquisition unit

73相关信息获取部(相关信息获取单元)  73 Relevant information acquisition department (relevant information acquisition unit)

80控制脚本生成部(控制脚本生成单元/控制信息执行单元)  80 control script generation unit (control script generation unit/control information execution unit)

81显示对象属性判定部(属性信息获取单元)  81 display object attribute determination unit (attribute information acquisition unit)

82图像分析部(属性信息获取单元)  82 Image Analysis Department (attribute information acquisition unit)

83操作选项选择部(功能确定单元)  83 Operation option selection unit (function determination unit)

84操作功能定义生成部(控制脚本生成单元/控制信息执行单元)  84 operation function definition generation unit (control script generation unit/control information execution unit)

85操作菜单生成部(控制脚本生成单元/控制信息执行单元)  85 operation menu generation unit (control script generation unit/control information execution unit)

86脚本合成部  86 script synthesis department

87声音确定脚本生成部(控制脚本生成单元/控制信息执行单元)  87 sound determination script generation unit (control script generation unit/control information execution unit)

88效果定义脚本生成部(控制脚本生成单元/控制信息执行单元)  88 effect definition script generation unit (control script generation unit/control information execution unit) 

90存储部  90 storage department

91模式数据存储部  91 mode data storage department

92显示对象物存储部  92 display object storage unit

93选项选择规则存储部  93 option selection rule storage department

94操作功能存储部(功能存储部)  94 operation function storage unit (function storage unit)

95声音文件存储部(效果信息存储部)  95 sound file storage unit (effect information storage unit)

96效果信息存储部(效果信息存储部)  96 effect information storage unit (effect information storage unit)

100网络相册系统(显示系统)  100 network photo album system (display system)

110控制脚本(控制信息)  110 control script (control information)

140控制脚本解析部  140 control script analysis department

141幻灯片放映执行控制部  141 slide show executive control department

142操作菜单控制部  142 Operation menu control unit

143照片旋转控制部  143 photo rotation control department

144变更检测部(变更检测单元)  144 Change detection unit (change detection unit)

145再描绘区域确定部(再描绘区域确定单元)  145 re-drawing area determination unit (re-drawing area determination unit)

146剪辑部  146 Editing Department

147描绘部(再描绘单元)  147 Depiction Department (re-depiction unit)

具体实施方式 Detailed ways

根据附图说明本发明的一个实施方式,如下所述。本实施方式中,作为一个例子,说明将本发明的图像数据提供装置(显示用数据生成装置2)和图像显示装置(电视机1)应用于图2所示的网络相册系统的情况。  One embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a case where the image data providing device (display data generating device 2 ) and image display device (television 1 ) of the present invention are applied to the network album system shown in FIG. 2 will be described as an example. the

网络相册系统是这样一种显示照片用的系统,即,PC或便携式电话等通信终端装置(计算机(PC)4)通过互联网等通信网,将相册(由照片或照片组组成)上传到相册管理服务器(相册管理服务器3),具有通信功能的图像显示装置获取上述相册管理服务器中存储的相册的照片(图像)并显示于本装置。更具体地说,通过图像数据提供装置生成使图像显示装置显示上述照片用的显示用数据并供给图像显示装置,从而,图像显示装置就能够按照图像数据提供装置的意图来显示照片。  A network album system is a system for displaying photos, that is, a communication terminal device (computer (PC) 4) such as a PC or a mobile phone uploads an album (consisting of photos or photo groups) to the album management system through a communication network such as the Internet. A server (album management server 3), an image display device having a communication function acquires photos (images) of albums stored in the above-mentioned album management server and displays them on the device. More specifically, the image display device can display the photo as intended by the image data provider by generating display data for the image display device to display the photograph by the image data provider device and supplying it to the image display device. the

本实施方式中,将本发明的图像显示装置作为具有连接互联网的通信功能的电视机1进行说明。又,将本发明的图像数据提供装置作为生成上述电视机在自身画面中显示照片等各种信息所需的显示用数据的显示用数据生成装置2进行说明。  In this embodiment, the image display device of the present invention will be described as a television 1 having a communication function for connecting to the Internet. Furthermore, the image data providing device of the present invention will be described as a display data generating device 2 for generating display data necessary for displaying various information such as photographs on the TV's own screen. the

关于显示用数据  About display data

显示用数据是生成电视机1的显示画面所需的信息。图3是表示显示用数据的数据结构的示意图。如图3所示,本实施方式的显示用数据7包含:描述对电视机1的控制指令的控制脚本110,以使电视机1显示确定的显示画面或执行网络相册的各应用功能(以下称为照片应用功能);以及应在电视机1上显示的照片等静态图像菜单画面和操作按钮的图像等显示对象物111。再者,在图3所示的例子中,作为显示用数据7包含的显示对象物111,假设为JPEG(Joint Photographic ExpertsGroup:联合摄影专家组)格式的照片(静态图像),但不限于此。对于显示用数据7,只要是电视机1能够处理从而显示于本装置的数据,就可以是包含任何数据格式的数据作为显示对象物111。例如,也可以将动态图像数据、文本数据等当作显示对象物111。再者,也可将文本数据作为与控制脚本110不同的目标物(**.txt)而包含在显示用数据7中,还可以是在实现控制脚本110的SVG数据(**.svg)中定义的文本数据。  The display data is information necessary for creating a display screen of the television 1 . FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a data structure of display data. As shown in FIG. 3 , the display data 7 of this embodiment includes: a control script 110 describing a control command to the TV set 1, so that the TV set 1 displays a certain display screen or executes various application functions of the web album (hereinafter referred to as and a display object 111 such as a still image menu screen such as a photo to be displayed on the television 1 and an image of an operation button. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 3 , as the display object 111 included in the display data 7, it is assumed to be a photograph (still image) in JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group: Joint Photographic Experts Group) format, but it is not limited thereto. As the display object 111 , the display data 7 may include data in any data format as long as it is data that can be processed by the television 1 and displayed on the device. For example, video data, text data, and the like may be used as the display object 111 . Furthermore, text data may be included in the display data 7 as an object (**.txt) different from the control script 110, or may be included in the SVG data (**.svg) that realizes the control script 110. Defined text data. the

又,显示用数据7不限于图像、动态图像、文本等成为显示处理对象的目标物(显示对象物111),可包含声音数据等那样电视机1可进行再现处理并提示用户的一切形式的目标物(再现对象物)。控制脚本110并不限于定义显示对象物111,它能够定义对显示用数据7包含的一切形式的目标物进行确定的描述以及电视机1对该目标物的各动作,以使电视机1能对该目标物进行再现处理并提示给用户。  In addition, the display data 7 is not limited to objects (display object 111) to be displayed, such as images, moving images, and texts, and may include audio data, etc., such that the television 1 can perform playback processing and present objects in any form to the user. object (reproduced object). The control script 110 is not limited to the definition of the display object 111, it can define the description of all forms of objects included in the display data 7 and the actions of the TV 1 on the objects, so that the TV 1 can The object is reproduced and presented to the user. the

本实施方式中,控制脚本110大体上可分为两种。第一种是规定了如何将显示对象物111(即照片等图像目标物或作为仅在实现控制脚本110的SVG上定义的显示对象物的GUI画面、文本数据等)进行显示的布局定义脚本112。根据此布局定义脚本112,电视机1能够判断应如何显示包含在显示用数据7中的哪一个数据。  In this embodiment, the control script 110 can be roughly divided into two types. The first type is a layout definition script 112 that specifies how to display the display object 111 (that is, an image object such as a photo, or a GUI screen, text data, etc. as a display object defined only on the SVG that realizes the control script 110 ). . Based on this layout definition script 112 , the television 1 can determine how to display which data is included in the display data 7 . the

作为布局定义脚本112的例子,可考虑有:表示唯一识别显示对象物111的显示对象物识别信息与其显示位置和显示尺寸的信息的对应关系的显示对象物确定脚本121;规定在显示该显示用数据7时表示电视机1能够实施的操作选项的操作菜单画面的操作菜单确定脚本122;以及规定了与每一个显示用数据对应的各种信息(相册标题、照片标题、赋予它们的备注等)的显示方法的属性信息确定脚本123。  As an example of the layout definition script 112, it is conceivable to have: a display object determination script 121 that expresses the correspondence between the display object identification information that uniquely identifies the display object 111 and the information on its display position and display size; Data 7 represents the operation menu determination script 122 of the operation menu screen of the operation options that can be implemented by the television 1; and defines various information corresponding to each display data (album title, photo title, remarks given to them, etc.) The property information determination script 123 of the display method. the

第二种是根据电视机中发生的事件(例如经过预定时间、开始/结束预定动作时、接收显示用数据或用户的按键输入等)规定了电视机要执行的预定动作的内容的操作内容定义脚本113。根据此操作内容定义脚本113,电视机1能够判断应何时、对何物、如何执行何种操作。  The second type is the operation content definition that specifies the content of the scheduled action to be executed by the TV based on events that occur in the TV (such as when the scheduled time elapses, when the scheduled action starts/ends, when the display data is received or the user's key input, etc.) Script 113. Based on the operation content definition script 113 , the television 1 can determine when, on what, and how to perform which operation. the

作为操作内容定义脚本113的例子,可考虑有:定义了在发生哪种事件时接着显示(请求并获取)哪一个显示用数据的状态转移定义脚本131;以及定义了电视机1对正在显示的显示用数据要执行的预定处理(图像旋转、改色、文本数据的变更、印刷等)作为照片应用功能的操作功能定义脚本132等。  As an example of the operation content definition script 113, it can be considered to have: a state transition definition script 131 which defines which display data to display (request and obtain) when an event occurs; Predetermined processing (image rotation, color change, text data change, printing, etc.) to be executed on the display data is defined as the operation function script 132 and the like of the photo application function. the

更详细地说,上述控制脚本是确定如何使用成为实现照片应用功能用的基本的电视机1中预先内置的各种基本的功能(以下称为基本功能)中的某一种的脚本。电视机1按照该控制脚本,可以适当地选择本装置预先内置的各基本功能,并进行组合,执行汇总的一个功能(照片应用功能(第一功能/第二功能))。  More specifically, the above-mentioned control script is a script for determining how to use any one of various basic functions (hereinafter referred to as basic functions) built in advance in the television 1 that is fundamental for realizing the photo application function. According to the control script, the TV 1 can appropriately select and combine the basic functions built into the device in advance to execute a combined function (photo application function (first function/second function)). the

所谓基本功能,是指用于实现照片应用功能的控制脚本调出的低级函数,来实现确定的一个单纯的功能。控制脚本中描述了何时调出何种基本功能,电视机1按照控制脚本,适当调出并执行多种基本功能,从而能够实现照片应用功能。  The so-called basic function refers to the low-level function called out by the control script used to realize the photo application function to realize a certain simple function. The control script describes when to call out which basic functions, and the television 1 appropriately calls out and executes various basic functions according to the control script, so as to realize the photo application function. the

本实施方式中,上述控制脚本只有用于调出基本功能的描述,实际的执行代码即基本功能程序在制造电视机1时预先烧入在ROM等中(图1的基本功能程序存储部29)。因而,电视机1的基本功能程序在上市后不容易进行改写。  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned control script is only used to call out the description of the basic function, and the actual execution code, that is, the basic function program, is burned in advance in the ROM or the like when the television 1 is manufactured (the basic function program storage part 29 of FIG. 1 ). . Therefore, it is not easy to rewrite the basic function program of the television 1 after it is launched. the

然而,如上所述,基本功能是由上述控制脚本调出的低级函数。通过对这些各种基本功能进行组合,可以实现多种照片应用功能。因而,即使不变更基本功能本身,而只变更调出基本功能的顺序即基本功能的组合,也可以变更电视机1执行的照片应用功能。而且,利用控制脚本能够容易地变更上述基本功能的组合。  However, as mentioned above, the basic functions are low-level functions called out by the above-mentioned control script. By combining these various basic functions, various photo application functions can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to change the photo application function executed by the television 1 without changing the basic functions themselves, but only changing the order in which the basic functions are called, that is, the combination of the basic functions. Furthermore, the combination of the basic functions described above can be easily changed by using the control script. the

控制脚本能够作为用例如XML(可扩展标记语言)所描述的文本数据来构成,可以简单地变更其内容,再提供给电视机1。布局定义脚本112可以作为用例如SVG(可缩放矢量图形)来描述。  The control script can be configured as text data described in, for example, XML (Extensible Markup Language), and its content can be easily changed before being provided to the television 1 . The layout definition script 112 can be described as, for example, SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics). the

如上所述,通过变更显示用数据中包含的控制脚本的描述,即使不变更电视机1内置的基本功能,也能够容易地变更电视机1所执行的照片应用功能。控制脚本和基本功能的具体例子将在后文中阐述。  As described above, by changing the description of the control script included in the display data, it is possible to easily change the photo application function executed by the TV 1 without changing the basic functions built in the TV 1 . Concrete examples of control scripts and basic functions will be described later. the

又,本实施方式的网络相册系统中,作为图像数据提供装置生成的显示用数据,例如设想有:显示一张照片用的单张显示画面显示用数据;对多张照片进行幻灯片放映显示用的幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据;对相册的各张照片进行缩略图一览显示用的缩略图显示画面显示用数据;显示用户曾经浏览过的相册的历史用的相册历史画面显示用数据;以及作为用户输入相册ID以获取所希望的相册用的GUI(图形用户界面)画面的相册ID输入画面显示用数据等。这些都仅仅是一个例子,并不限定本发明的图像数据提供装置的功能。  In addition, in the network photo album system according to this embodiment, as the display data generated by the image data providing device, for example, data for displaying a single display screen for displaying one photo; Data for displaying a slide show display screen; data for displaying a thumbnail display screen for displaying a list of thumbnails of each photo in an album; data for displaying an album history screen for displaying the history of albums that a user has browsed; and Data for displaying an album ID input screen as a GUI (Graphical User Interface) screen for a user to input an album ID to acquire a desired album, and the like. These are just examples and do not limit the functions of the image data providing device of the present invention. the

网络相册系统概要  Overview of Web Album System

图2是表示本发明实施方式的网络相册系统100的简要结构的框图。如图2所示,网络相册系统100包含:显示用数据生成装置2;至少一台电视机1;以及相册管理服务器3。各装置通过互联网连接,使其可以相互通信。  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the network album system 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2 , the network album system 100 includes: a display data generating device 2 ; at least one television 1 ; and an album management server 3 . The devices are connected via the Internet so that they can communicate with each other. the

相册管理服务器3管理包含一张以上照片的相册,具有存储相册的网络相册数据库(DB)8。例如由相册作者(照片持有者)U使用计算机(PC)4等通信终端装置,将相册5(或相册中包含的照片)发送到相册管理服务器3,存放在网络相册DB(图像信息存储部)8。  The album management server 3 manages albums including one or more photographs, and has a network album database (DB) 8 for storing the albums. For example, the album author (photo holder) U uses communication terminal devices such as computer (PC) 4 to send the album 5 (or the photos contained in the album) to the album management server 3 and store them in the network album DB (image information storage unit). )8. the

再者,在将照片通过PC4等通信终端装置上传到相册管理服务器3时(或者从便携式电话或具有通信功能的数码照相机直接上传时),为了判明该照片是从哪个摄像设备传送的照片,也可以将表示照片出处的摄像设备信息(拍摄该照片的数码照相机(或便携式电话)的产品名称、型号等)与上述照片相关联,一起发送到相册管理服务器3。由此,即便是由同一通信终端装置上传的照片,也能够对每一个摄像设备进行管理,可以容易地按照摄像设备的规格处理照片。  Furthermore, when a photo is uploaded to the album management server 3 through a communication terminal device such as a PC 4 (or when uploading directly from a mobile phone or a digital camera with a communication function), in order to find out from which imaging device the photo was transmitted, The imaging device information (the product name, model, etc. of the digital camera (or mobile phone) that took the photo) that indicates the source of the photo can be associated with the photo and sent to the album management server 3 together. Accordingly, even photos uploaded by the same communication terminal device can be managed for each imaging device, and photos can be easily processed according to the specifications of the imaging device. the

例如,所拍摄的照片的分辨率、图像尺寸、纵横比(及其偏差)因摄像设备的规格而不同。因而,若对每一个摄像设备的规格预先记录分辨率、图像尺寸、纵横比等作为照片信息,就可以容易地从摄像设备信息确定各照片信息。从而,例如显示用数据生成装置2可以有效地进行显示用数据生成处理(或显示对象物编辑处理),来生成以显示用数据生成装置2想要的尺寸或分辨率显示照片用的显示用数据等。  For example, the resolution, image size, and aspect ratio (and deviations thereof) of captured photographs differ depending on the specifications of the imaging device. Therefore, if the resolution, image size, aspect ratio, etc. are recorded in advance as photo information for each image pickup device specification, each piece of photo information can be easily specified from the image pickup device information. Therefore, for example, the display data generation device 2 can efficiently perform display data generation processing (or display object editing processing) to generate display data for displaying photographs at a size or resolution desired by the display data generation device 2 wait. the

又,作为上述通信终端装置,不限于图2所示的PC4,只要具有将相册作者U的相册或照片发送到相册管理服务器3的功能,则可以是任何装置,除PC外,可设想有带通信功能的电视机、便携式电话机、PDA(personal digital assistant:个人数字助理)等。  Again, as the above-mentioned communication terminal device, it is not limited to the PC 4 shown in FIG. Televisions, mobile phones, PDAs (personal digital assistants) with communication functions, etc. the

在网络相册DB8中,将相册与唯一识别相册用的相册ID相对应地存储相册,通过指定此相册ID,能选择该相册包含的全部照片(组)。而且,对于相册中包含的每一张照片,也将照片与唯一识别照片用的照片ID相对应地存储。因而,通过指定相册ID和照片ID,可以选择一张照片。  In the network album DB 8, an album is stored in association with an album ID for uniquely identifying the album, and by specifying the album ID, all photos (groups) included in the album can be selected. Furthermore, for each photo included in the album, the photo is also stored in association with a photo ID for uniquely identifying the photo. Thus, by specifying an album ID and a photo ID, one photo can be selected. the

本实施方式中,通过指定相册ID,能够对相册中包含的全部照片进行确定。通过指定相册ID和照片ID,能够确定一张照片。  In this embodiment, by designating the album ID, all photos included in the album can be identified. By specifying an album ID and a photo ID, one photo can be specified. the

显示用数据生成装置2生成电视机1显示相册照片等的显示各显示画面所需的显示用数据。所谓显示用数据,如上所述,表示在电视机1的画面中显示的显示画 面的信息。本实施方式中,显示用数据至少包含对电视机的控制脚本和显示对象物(照片等图像、构成GUI画面的操作按钮的图像等)。控制脚本包含对电视机1规定在哪个位置、以哪种大小、显示哪张照片等照片显示方法的布局定义脚本。布局定义脚本的种类如上文所述。这里,包含将该脚本定义的显示位置和显示尺寸的信息以及与显示对象物(照片)相对应的显示对象物确定脚本。此外,上述显示对象物确定脚本除对照片等显示对象物进行确定以外,也可以是对声音数据等再现对象物进行确定的脚本。而且,控制脚本中也可以包含属性信息确定脚本,该脚本包括表示相册或照片的属性信息等的文本数据。  The display data generation device 2 generates display data necessary for the television 1 to display each display screen such as an album photo. The display data is information indicating a display screen displayed on the screen of the television 1 as described above. In this embodiment, the display data includes at least a control script for the television and display objects (images such as photographs, images of operation buttons constituting a GUI screen, etc.). The control script includes a layout definition script that prescribes a method of displaying a picture at which position, at what size, and which picture is displayed on the television 1 . The types of layout definition scripts are as described above. Here, information on the display position and display size defined by the script, and a display object specifying script corresponding to the display object (photograph) are included. In addition, the above-mentioned display object specifying script may be a script for specifying playback objects such as audio data, in addition to specifying display objects such as photographs. Furthermore, the control script may include an attribute information specifying script including text data indicating attribute information of an album or a photo, and the like. the

这样,电视机1通过接收上述显示用数据,就能够按照控制脚本显示包含在显示用数据中的一个或多个显示对象物(照片)。对每一个显示画面分别生成显示用数据的控制脚本。作为上述控制脚本的例子,可设想有:使多张照片缩略显示用的缩略图显示画面显示用数据的控制脚本;以及使相册的照片逐张幻灯片放映显示用的幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据的控制脚本等。  Thus, by receiving the display data, the television 1 can display one or a plurality of display objects (photographs) included in the display data according to the control script. A control script of display data is generated for each display screen. As examples of the above-mentioned control script, conceivable are: a control script for displaying data on a thumbnail display screen for displaying thumbnails of a plurality of photos; Use data control scripts, etc. the

而且,上述控制脚本包含按照对照片进行的操作(选择照片等)、对网络相册的操作(选择相册等)规定对电视机执行什么样的处理的操作内容定义脚本。作为操作内容定义脚本,例如可以列举有规定何时转移到哪一个显示画面(请求哪一个显示用数据,并从服务器获取)的状态转移定义脚本或者定义了对正在显示的显示用数据要执行的预定处理(图像旋转、改色、文本数据的变更等)的显示操作定义脚本等。  In addition, the above-mentioned control script includes an operation content definition script for specifying what kind of processing is to be performed on the TV in accordance with operations on photos (selection of photos, etc.) and operations on Internet albums (selection of albums, etc.). As the operation content definition script, for example, a state transition definition script defining when to transition to which display screen (which display data is requested and obtained from the server) or a definition script to be executed on the display data being displayed can be cited. Display operation definition scripts for predetermined processing (image rotation, color change, text data change, etc.). the

操作内容定义脚本113可以是例如遵照XML的描述,通过嵌入同样是XML数据的上述控制脚本,或者作为与上述各显示画面显示用数据独立的脚本,从显示用数据生成装置2发送到电视机1。  The operation content definition script 113 can be, for example, following the description of XML, by embedding the above-mentioned control script that is also XML data, or as a script independent of the above-mentioned data for displaying each display screen, and sending it from the display data generation device 2 to the television 1 . the

显示用数据生成装置2从电视机1接收请求要显示的显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息6(a~c)。接收到的显示用数据请求消息6包含:对请求的显示用数据(显示画面或显示对象物)进行确定的信息;以及与电视机1的规格、功能、或电视机1的用户(A~C)相关联的各种信息的相关信息。显示用数据生成装置2根据上述相关信息,生成从电视机1请求的显示用数据,作为适用于电视机1的显示用数据7(a~c),并提供给电视机1。  The display data generating device 2 receives a display data request message 6 (a to c) requesting display data to be displayed from the television 1 . The received display data request message 6 includes: information specifying the requested display data (display screen or display object); ) related information of various information associated. The display data generation device 2 generates display data requested from the television 1 based on the above-mentioned related information, and supplies it to the television 1 as display data 7 (a to c) suitable for the television 1 . the

例如,显示用数据生成装置2从用户A的电视机1接收相关信息A(包含于显示用数据请求消息6a中)时,生成并提供包含依据用户A的电视机1生成的控制脚本A的显示用数据7a。该显示用数据7a中例如至少包含控制脚本A,该控制脚本A包括:依据用户A的电视机1而调整了图像尺寸的相册5’;以及依据电视机1 生成的该相册的照片的布局定义脚本等。  For example, when the display data generation device 2 receives related information A (included in the display data request message 6a) from the television 1 of the user A, it generates and provides a display including the control script A generated based on the television 1 of the user A. Use Data 7a. The display data 7a includes, for example, at least a control script A, and the control script A includes: an album 5' whose image size has been adjusted according to the television 1 of user A; and a layout definition of photos in the album generated according to the television 1 script etc. the

又,显示用数据生成装置2从用户B的电视机1接收包含相关信息B的显示用数据请求消息6b时,根据相关信息B提供与用户B的电视机1对应的显示用数据7b(未图示,但包含控制脚本B),同样地,对于用户C的电视机1,根据相关信息C提供显示用数据7c(包含控制脚本C)。  Also, when the display data generation device 2 receives the display data request message 6b including the relevant information B from the television 1 of the user B, it provides the display data 7b corresponding to the television 1 of the user B according to the relevant information B (not shown in the figure). shown, but includes the control script B), similarly, for the television 1 of the user C, the display data 7c (including the control script C) is provided based on the related information C. the

电视机1按照显示用数据7中包含的控制脚本,显示各种信息(显示对象物等)。更具体地说,是显示网络相册DB8中存储的相册的照片。又,电视机1生成请求想要显示的显示用数据的消息即显示用数据请求消息6,并发送到显示用数据生成装置2,从显示用数据生成装置2获取上述显示用数据。然后,按照所取得的显示用数据中包含的控制脚本,生成显示画面,依据显示用数据生成装置2(服务商)的意图而显示各种信息。  The television 1 displays various information (display objects, etc.) according to the control script included in the display data 7 . More specifically, photos of albums stored in the web album DB8 are displayed. Also, the television 1 generates a display data request message 6 which is a message requesting display data to be displayed, and transmits it to the display data generating device 2, and acquires the display data from the display data generating device 2. Then, a display screen is generated according to the control script included in the acquired display data, and various information is displayed according to the intention of the display data generating device 2 (service provider). the

从而,电视机1按照显示用数据的控制脚本,能够启用显示照片等功能,执行网络相册的各种应用功能。  Therefore, according to the control script of the display data, the television 1 can activate functions such as displaying photos and execute various application functions of the web album. the

显示用数据请求消息6包括:对显示对象物(例如,想要显示的相册或照片)进行确定的信息;指定所请求的显示画面的显示画面指定信息;以及与电视机1或电视机1的用户有关的相关信息等。作为相关信息的具体例子,例如可以列举有:表示电视机1的像素数和画面尺寸的规格信息;以及表示用户的年龄、住址等用户信息等。但是,相关信息并不限于此,它包括显示用数据生成装置2生成显示用数据所需的一切信息。  The display data request message 6 includes: information for specifying a display object (for example, an album or photo to be displayed); display screen designation information for designating a requested display screen; User-related information, etc. Specific examples of related information include, for example, specification information indicating the number of pixels and screen size of the television 1 , and user information indicating the age and address of the user. However, the relevant information is not limited to this, and includes all information necessary for the display data generating device 2 to generate display data. the

显示用数据请求消息6和显示用数据7的详细情况会在后文中阐述。  The details of the display data request message 6 and the display data 7 will be described later. the

再者,本发明的网络相册系统100不限于图2所示的结构。在图2所示的例子中,网络相册DB8的结构包括相册管理服务器3,但也可以具有显示用数据生成装置2,在这种情况下,PC4向显示用数据生成装置2发送相册。  Furthermore, the network photo album system 100 of the present invention is not limited to the structure shown in FIG. 2 . In the example shown in FIG. 2 , the configuration of the network album DB 8 includes the album management server 3 , but it may also include the display data generating device 2 . In this case, the PC 4 sends the album to the display data generating device 2 . the

又,在图2所示的例子中,各个用户的电视机1与显示用数据生成装置2直接进行显示用数据请求消息6和显示用数据7的交换。然而,不限于这种结构,例如也可在电视机1与显示用数据生成装置2之间,设置对提供网络相册服务的服务商使用的站点进行管理的服务器装置。该服务器装置对发生在电视机1与显示用数据生成装置2之间的通信具有中介功能。  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 2 , the television 1 of each user and the display data generating device 2 directly exchange the display data request message 6 and the display data 7 . However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a server device that manages a site used by a service provider that provides an Internet album service may be provided between the television 1 and the display data generating device 2 . This server device has an intermediary function for communication between the television 1 and the display data generating device 2 . the

根据上述结构,通过电视机1利用网络相册系统时,首先,电视机1访问服务商的服务器装置,用普通的网络浏览器显示门户站点。然后,从上述网络浏览器切换并启动请求相册的显示用数据并显示用的网络相册系统应用程序。由此,能防止 电视机1连接到由门户站点预先指定的显示用数据生成装置2或相册管理服务器3以外的装置。  According to the above configuration, when using the Internet album system through the television 1, first, the television 1 accesses the server device of the service provider, and displays the portal site with a common web browser. Then, the web album system application for requesting and displaying album display data is switched from the web browser to start. Thus, it is possible to prevent the television 1 from being connected to devices other than the display data generating device 2 or the album management server 3 designated in advance by the portal site. the

电视机的结构-概况  Structure of TV - Overview

图1是表示本发明实施方式的电视机1的简要结构的框图。如图1所示,电视机1包括操作部13、通信部14、显示部15、广播数据接收部16、声音输出部17、统一控制电视机1的控制部10、存储部50、以及基本功能程序存储部(基本功能程序存放部)29。  FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a television 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1 , the television 1 includes an operation unit 13 , a communication unit 14 , a display unit 15 , a broadcast data receiving unit 16 , a sound output unit 17 , a control unit 10 for collectively controlling the television 1 , a storage unit 50 , and basic functions. Program storage unit (basic function program storage unit) 29 . the

控制部10控制电视机1包含的各部分的各种动作,包括:输入输出控制部20;生成显示用数据请求消息6的显示用数据请求处理部30;解析显示用数据7并执行预定操作的显示用数据执行处理部40;检测电视机1所发生的预定事件的事件处理部11;以及控制广播数据接收部16并从接收到的广播数据中提取声音数据和视频数据的广播数据控制部12。控制部10读出存储部50中记录的各种程序,控制本发明的电视机1的各部分,按照显示用数据进行照片应用功能的各种处理。  The control unit 10 controls various operations of various parts included in the television 1, including: an input and output control unit 20; a display data request processing unit 30 that generates a display data request message 6; a program that analyzes the display data 7 and executes predetermined operations; Display data execution processing section 40; event processing section 11 that detects a predetermined event that occurs in television 1; and broadcast data control section 12 that controls broadcast data receiving section 16 and extracts audio data and video data from received broadcast data . The control unit 10 reads various programs recorded in the storage unit 50, controls each part of the television 1 of the present invention, and performs various processes of the photo application function according to the display data. the

存储部50记录控制部10执行的控制程序、OS程序、以及控制部10按照显示用数据执行照片应用功能的各种处理时读出的各种数据,由闪存等非易失性存储装置构成。上述各种数据分别存储于存储部50内部的各种存储部,例如显示用数据存储部51、相关信息存储部52等。将接收的广播数据存储到存储部50内的未图示的广播数据存储部。但是,存储部50中存储的各种数据并不限于上文所述。  The storage unit 50 records the control program executed by the control unit 10, the OS program, and various data read when the control unit 10 executes various processes of the photo application function according to the display data, and is composed of a nonvolatile storage device such as a flash memory. The above-mentioned various data are respectively stored in various storage units inside the storage unit 50 , for example, the display data storage unit 51 , the related information storage unit 52 , and the like. The received broadcast data is stored in a broadcast data storage unit (not shown) in the storage unit 50 . However, various data stored in the storage unit 50 are not limited to the above. the

基本功能程序存储部29存储用于实现电视机1具有的照片应用功能的基本功能的基本功能程序。基本功能程序存储部29由ROM(read only memory:只读存储器)实现。基本功能程序存储部29中存储的各基本功能的程序,由显示用数据执行处理部40的基本功能执行部42根据需要读出。  The basic function program storage unit 29 stores a basic function program for realizing the basic functions of the photo application function included in the television 1 . The basic function program storage unit 29 is realized by ROM (read only memory). The programs of the respective basic functions stored in the basic function program storage unit 29 are read by the basic function execution unit 42 of the display data execution processing unit 40 as necessary. the

操作部13输入用户操作电视机1用的指示信号,例如由远距离操作电视机1的遥控器、电视机1本身设置的操作按钮、或者用有线或无线连接到电视机1的鼠标或键盘等构成。用户用操作部13输入的指示信号通过输入输出控制部20,而发送到控制部10的各部分。这样,用户就可以操作电视机1。  The operation unit 13 inputs an instruction signal for the user to operate the television 1, such as a remote controller for remotely operating the television 1, operation buttons provided on the television 1 itself, or a mouse or keyboard connected to the television 1 by wire or wirelessly. constitute. An instruction signal input by the user through the operation unit 13 is transmitted to each part of the control unit 10 through the input-output control unit 20 . Thus, the user can operate the television 1 . the

通信部14通过通信网与网络相册系统100中的电视机1外部的各装置进行通信,具有发送部14a和接收部14b。  The communication unit 14 communicates with each device outside the television 1 in the Internet album system 100 through a communication network, and has a transmission unit 14a and a reception unit 14b. the

具体而言,发送部14a将显示用数据请求处理部30生成的显示用数据请求消息6发送到显示用数据生成装置2。接收部14b接收显示用数据生成装置2提供的显示用数据7(图3),通过接收部14b受理的显示用数据7存储于显示用数据存储 部51,显示用数据执行处理部40根据需要由显示控制部24读出。  Specifically, the transmitting unit 14 a transmits the display data request message 6 generated by the display data request processing unit 30 to the display data generating device 2 . The receiving unit 14b receives the display data 7 ( FIG. 3 ) provided by the display data generating device 2, and the display data 7 accepted by the receiving unit 14b is stored in the display data storage unit 51, and the display data execution processing unit 40 is executed as needed. The display control unit 24 reads out. the

显示部15显示存储部50中记录的显示用数据等各种数据,由例如LCD(液晶显示器)、PDP(等离子体显示面板)或CRT(阴极射线管)显示器等显示装置构成。  The display unit 15 displays various data such as display data recorded in the storage unit 50 and is constituted by a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), a PDP (Plasma Display Panel), or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. the

广播数据接收部16从广播电台接收利用广播电波传送的广播数据(电视节目的声音数据和视频数据或电子节目表等信息)。广播数据接收部16由调谐器、解调部和TS(传输流)解码器等构成。将广播数据接收部16接收的广播数据解码后,通过输入输出控制部20存储到存储部50。  The broadcast data receiving unit 16 receives broadcast data (audio data and video data of a television program or information such as an electronic program table) transmitted by broadcast waves from a broadcast station. The broadcast data receiving section 16 is composed of a tuner, a demodulation section, a TS (Transport Stream) decoder, and the like. The broadcast data received by the broadcast data receiving unit 16 is decoded and stored in the storage unit 50 through the input/output control unit 20 . the

声音输出部17是作为输出上述广播数据中包含的声音数据的扬声器而实现的。  The audio output unit 17 is realized as a speaker that outputs audio data included in the broadcast data. the

输入输出控制部20控制电视机1的各部分(操作部13、通信部14、显示部15、广播数据接收部16、声音输出部17)与控制部10内部的各部分(事件处理部11、显示用数据请求处理部30、显示用数据执行处理部40或广播数据控制部12)之间进行的信息输入输出。输入输出控制部20包含操作受理部21、消息发送控制部22、显示用数据接收控制部23、显示控制部24和声音输出控制部25。  The input and output control unit 20 controls each part of the television 1 (operation unit 13, communication unit 14, display unit 15, broadcast data receiving unit 16, sound output unit 17) and each unit inside the control unit 10 (event processing unit 11, Information input and output between the display data request processing unit 30, the display data execution processing unit 40, or the broadcast data control unit 12). The input/output control unit 20 includes an operation accepting unit 21 , a message transmission control unit 22 , a display data reception control unit 23 , a display control unit 24 , and an audio output control unit 25 . the

操作受理部21受理通过操作部13输入的用户的指示信号,将其传输到事件处理部11。例如,用户利用操作部13向电视机1输入显示所希望相册的指示信号(相册显示指示信号)时,将指示信号传输到事件处理部11。然后,通过事件处理部11,将想要生成显示指定相册用的显示画面的显示用数据请求消息6的指示信号,传输到显示用数据请求处理部30。  The operation accepting unit 21 accepts a user's instruction signal input through the operating unit 13 and transmits it to the event processing unit 11 . For example, when the user inputs an instruction signal (album display instruction signal) to display a desired album to the television 1 through the operation unit 13 , the instruction signal is transmitted to the event processing unit 11 . Then, an instruction signal to generate a display data request message 6 for displaying a display screen for displaying a specified album is transmitted to the display data request processing unit 30 through the event processing unit 11 . the

消息发送控制部22控制通信部14的发送部14a,使其发送显示用数据请求处理部30生成的显示用数据请求消息6。显示用数据接收控制部23受理通信部14的接收部14b从显示用数据生成装置2接收的显示用数据7,将其存储到显示用数据存储部51。  The message transmission control unit 22 controls the transmission unit 14 a of the communication unit 14 to transmit the display data request message 6 generated by the display data request processing unit 30 . The display data receiving control unit 23 receives the display data 7 received from the display data generating device 2 by the receiving unit 14 b of the communication unit 14 , and stores it in the display data storage unit 51 . the

显示控制部24控制显示部15,以显示存储部50中存储的各种数据。显示控制部24读出存储于显示用数据存储部51的显示用数据中包含的显示对象物,按照该显示用数据中包含的控制脚本(布局定义脚本)显示所读出的显示对象物。更详细地说,显示用数据执行处理部40对上述控制脚本进行解析,显示控制部24按照其解析结果(配置显示对象物(照片)的起点坐标信息、对与之对应的照片进行确定的信息等),对显示部15的显示画面进行描绘。将所描绘的显示画面的数据输出到显示部15,从而可以向用户提示显示用数据中包含的信息(在显示部15显示)。  The display control unit 24 controls the display unit 15 to display various data stored in the storage unit 50 . The display control unit 24 reads the display object included in the display data stored in the display data storage unit 51, and displays the read display object according to the control script (layout definition script) included in the display data. More specifically, the display data execution processing unit 40 analyzes the above-mentioned control script, and the display control unit 24 according to the analysis result (arranging the starting point coordinate information of the display object (photo) and the information specifying the corresponding photo) etc.), the display screen of the display unit 15 is drawn. By outputting the data of the drawn display screen to the display unit 15, information included in the display data can be presented to the user (displayed on the display unit 15). the

或者,显示控制部24从广播数据控制部12接收广播数据中包含的视频数据, 并输出到显示部15。由此,能将电视机1接收的广播数据中的视频数据供给用户。  Alternatively, the display control unit 24 receives video data included in the broadcast data from the broadcast data control unit 12, and outputs it to the display unit 15. Thereby, the video data among the broadcast data received by the television 1 can be provided to the user. the

此外,显示控制部24输出到显示部15的显示画面数据,通过显示用数据执行处理部40而暂时写入到由RAM等易失性存储装置构成的暂存部18,对于每一个画面存储到帧缓冲器19中。显示控制部24将帧缓冲器19中存储的显示画面数据输出到显示部15。从而,按照控制脚本,在显示部15将显示用数据的显示对象物进行显示。此外,关于暂存部18和帧缓冲器19的结构,将在实施方式2中阐述。  In addition, the display screen data output by the display control unit 24 to the display unit 15 is temporarily written into the temporary storage unit 18 constituted by a volatile storage device such as RAM through the display data execution processing unit 40, and is stored for each screen in frame buffer 19. The display control unit 24 outputs the display screen data stored in the frame buffer 19 to the display unit 15 . Accordingly, the display object of the display data is displayed on the display unit 15 according to the control script. In addition, the configurations of the temporary storage unit 18 and the frame buffer 19 will be described in the second embodiment. the

声音输出控制部25控制声音输出部17,输出存储部50中存储的广播数据中的声音数据。声音输出控制部25从广播数据控制部12受理声音数据,并输出到声音输出部17。由此,能将电视机1接收的广播数据中的声音数据供给用户。  The audio output control unit 25 controls the audio output unit 17 to output audio data among the broadcast data stored in the storage unit 50 . The audio output control unit 25 receives audio data from the broadcast data control unit 12 and outputs it to the audio output unit 17 . Thus, the audio data among the broadcast data received by the television 1 can be provided to the user. the

再者,上述广播数据接收部16、声音输出部17、声音输出控制部25和广播数据控制部12是将本发明的图像显示装置应用于电视机1时的结构。因而,上述各部并不限定本发明的图像显示装置的结构,在不是将图像显示装置作为电视机1而实现的情况下,图像显示装置也可以不具备上述各部。  The broadcast data receiving unit 16, the audio output unit 17, the audio output control unit 25, and the broadcast data control unit 12 described above are configured when the image display device of the present invention is applied to the television 1. Therefore, the above-mentioned components do not limit the configuration of the image display device of the present invention, and when the image display device is not realized as the television 1, the image display device may not include the above-mentioned components. the

上述显示控制部24还可具有将显示部15的显示区域分成多个、分别控制该多个显示区域(分开描绘)以显示不同显示画面的功能。例如,显示控制部24能够进行以下控制:即,将显示部15的显示区域分成两个,在第一显示区域中显示上述广播数据中包含的视频数据;在第二显示区域中显示相册的照片(双画面显示)。还可将显示区域分成三个,在第三显示区域中显示电子节目表或互联网上公开的网页(三画面显示)。  The above-mentioned display control unit 24 may also have a function of dividing the display area of the display unit 15 into a plurality and controlling the plurality of display areas (separate drawing) to display different display screens. For example, the display control unit 24 can perform the following control: that is, the display area of the display unit 15 is divided into two, and the video data included in the above-mentioned broadcast data is displayed in the first display area; (dual screen display). The display area can also be divided into three, and an electronic program table or a web page published on the Internet is displayed in the third display area (three-screen display). the

但是,如上所述,即使是在电视机1中执行双画面/三画面显示的情况下,显示用数据生成装置2也假定通常全屏显示时的可显示区域,将显示各种显示画面用的显示用数据提供给电视机1。在这种情况下,电视机1需要将受理的显示用数据全屏显示。  However, as described above, even in the case of performing double-screen/triple-screen display on the television 1, the display data generation device 2 assumes the displayable area during normal full-screen display, and displays the display for various display screens. The data is provided to the television 1. In this case, the television 1 needs to display the received display data on a full screen. the

因此,显示控制部24从显示用数据生成装置2接收显示用数据时,即使是进行双画面/三画面显示控制的情况下,也根据是接收显示用数据的情况,将显示部15的控制切换到全屏显示的控制。然后,显示控制部24控制显示部15,按照显示用数据执行处理部40的解析结果,将显示用数据全屏显示。从而,即使到目前为止显示控制部24都在进行多个区域的显示控制,也能够始终以全屏显示由显示用数据生成装置2提供的显示用数据。其结果,能够始终以显示用数据生成装置2想要的预定显示尺寸来显示照片。  Therefore, when the display control unit 24 receives the display data from the display data generation device 2, even in the case of performing two-screen/three-screen display control, it switches the control of the display unit 15 according to the case of receiving the display data. to display the controls in full screen. Then, the display control unit 24 controls the display unit 15 to display the display data on a full screen according to the analysis result of the display data execution processing unit 40 . Therefore, even if the display control unit 24 has been performing display control of a plurality of areas so far, the display data provided by the display data generation device 2 can always be displayed on a full screen. As a result, photographs can always be displayed in a predetermined display size desired by the display data generating device 2 . the

事件处理部11检测电视机1中发生的各种事件,将预定的指示信号传输到显 示用数据请求处理部30或显示用数据执行处理部40。事件处理部11根据输入输出控制部20(例如,操作受理部21或显示用数据接收控制部23)和未图示的定时器部通知的信号,检测上述各种事件。然后,控制显示用数据请求处理部30或显示用数据执行处理部40的处理执行定时。  The event processing unit 11 detects various events occurring in the television 1, and transmits a predetermined instruction signal to the display data request processing unit 30 or the display data execution processing unit 40. The event processing unit 11 detects the above-mentioned various events based on signals notified from the input/output control unit 20 (for example, the operation accepting unit 21 or the display data receiving control unit 23 ) and a timer unit not shown. Then, the processing execution timing of the display data request processing unit 30 or the display data execution processing unit 40 is controlled. the

更具体地说,事件处理部11基于预先确定的规则,根据所通知的信号的内容和电视机1当前的状态,确定显示用数据请求处理部30或显示用数据执行处理部40要执行的处理。然后,将指示发送到显示用数据请求处理部30或显示用数据执行处理部40,以执行所确定的处理。  More specifically, the event processing unit 11 determines the processing to be executed by the display data request processing unit 30 or the display data execution processing unit 40 according to the content of the notified signal and the current state of the television 1 based on a predetermined rule. . Then, an instruction is sent to the display data request processing unit 30 or the display data execution processing unit 40 to execute the determined processing. the

上述未图示的定时器部例如从启动开始若经过预先设定的一定时间,就将定时器通知传送到事件处理部11。操作受理部21一旦受理用户通过操作部13输入的指示信号,就将该指示信号通知事件处理部11。或者,显示用数据接收控制部23一旦通过接收部14b从显示用数据生成装置2接收显示用数据时,就将接收到显示用数据的事件通知给事件处理部11。  The timer unit not shown above transmits a timer notification to the event processing unit 11 when, for example, a preset predetermined time elapses from activation. When the operation accepting unit 21 accepts an instruction signal input by the user through the operation unit 13 , it notifies the event processing unit 11 of the instruction signal. Alternatively, the display data receiving control unit 23 notifies the event processing unit 11 of an event of receiving the display data when receiving the display data from the display data generating device 2 via the receiving unit 14 b. the

这样,作为事件处理部11检测的各种事件的例子,可以列举有:从某一预定动作开始起经过一定时间的情况;在某一显示画面显示过程中按下操作部13的预定按钮的情况;以及接收到显示用数据生成装置2发送的显示用数据的情况等。  In this way, examples of various events detected by the event processing unit 11 include: the case where a certain time elapses from the start of a certain predetermined action; ; and when the display data transmitted from the display data generation device 2 is received, etc. the

显示用数据请求处理部30生成显示用数据请求消息6。更具体地说,根据事件处理部11的指示(例如,用户输入相册显示指示信号时等),生成请求显示指定相册的显示画面的显示用数据请求消息6。显示用数据请求处理部30和显示用数据请求消息6的详细情况会在后文中阐述。  The display data request processing unit 30 generates a display data request message 6 . More specifically, in response to an instruction from the event processing unit 11 (for example, when the user inputs an album display instruction signal, etc.), a display data request message 6 requesting display of a display screen of a specified album is generated. Details of the display data request processing unit 30 and the display data request message 6 will be described later. the

显示用数据执行处理部40对显示用数据进行解析,根据解析结果处理显示用数据。显示用数据执行处理部40包括:按照控制脚本执行照片应用功能的控制脚本执行部41;以及执行基本功能程序存储部29中存储的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42。控制脚本执行部41根据事件处理部11的指示(例如接收显示用数据时),对显示用数据中包含的控制脚本进行解析,按照解析后的控制脚本内容,控制基本功能执行部42,执行一个或多个基本功能,执行汇总的一个照片应用功能。  The display data execution processing unit 40 analyzes the display data, and processes the display data according to the analysis result. The display data execution processing unit 40 includes: a control script execution unit 41 for executing the photo application function according to the control script; and a basic function execution unit 42 for executing the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit 29 . The control script execution unit 41 analyzes the control script contained in the display data according to the instruction of the event processing unit 11 (for example, when receiving the display data), and controls the basic function execution unit 42 according to the content of the analyzed control script to execute a Or multiple basic functions, performing aggregated functions of a photo application. the

具体而言,控制脚本执行部41依据事件处理部11的通知,开始控制脚本执行处理。即,读入控制脚本,从第一行开始处理控制脚本。例如,也管理控制脚本中包含的if语句等控制结构。又,控制脚本执行部41管理运算用的变量或按键输入值(由事件处理部11通知)。  Specifically, the control script execution unit 41 starts the control script execution process according to the notification from the event processing unit 11 . That is, the control script is read, and the control script is processed from the first line. For example, control structures such as if statements contained in control scripts are also managed. Moreover, the control script execution part 41 manages the variable for calculation, or a key input value (notified by the event processing part 11). the

这里,当控制脚本中包含调出基本功能的描述时,控制脚本执行部41根据到 目前为止的处理,将自变量传递到基本功能执行部42。基本功能执行部42实行控制脚本执行部41指定的基本功能,并将结果返回到控制脚本执行部41。  Here, when the control script includes a description of calling a basic function, the control script execution unit 41 passes the argument to the basic function execution unit 42 based on the processing so far. The basic function execution unit 42 executes the basic function specified by the control script execution unit 41 and returns the result to the control script execution unit 41 . the

控制脚本执行部41接受来自基本功能执行部42的结果,继续上述控制脚本的执行处理。控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本,对基于基本功能所获得的图像进行显示等,从而结束控制脚本执行处理。  The control script execution part 41 receives the result from the basic function execution part 42, and continues the execution process of the said control script. The control script execution unit 41 displays the image obtained based on the basic functions according to the control script, and ends the control script execution process. the

作为控制脚本执行部41控制基本功能执行部42并执行的照片应用功能,可设想有:例如按照控制脚本的布局定义脚本对相册的多张照片进行缩略图一览显示;将显示的照片旋转90度再显示;或者对正在显示的照片显示表示可操作的操作选项一览的操作菜单(GUI画面)等。  As the photo application function that the control script execution unit 41 controls and executes the basic function execution unit 42, for example, according to the layout definition script of the control script, display thumbnails of multiple photos in the album; rotate the displayed photos by 90 degrees. redisplay; or display an operation menu (GUI screen) showing a list of operable operation options for the photo being displayed. the

根据附图,基本功能执行部42执行的基本功能以及控制脚本执行部41执行的照片应用功能的具体例子将如下所示。  A specific example of the basic functions executed by the basic function execution section 42 and the photo application functions executed by the control script execution section 41 will be as follows according to the drawings. the

例如,图25的虚线框251内的脚本“rotate(90,960,540)”是用于根据控制脚本执行部41传递的自变量调出执行预定度数的图像旋转的基本功能的脚本,基本功能执行部42执行上述旋转的基本功能。  For example, the script "rotate (90, 960, 540)" in the dashed box 251 in FIG. 25 is a script for calling out the basic function of performing image rotation of a predetermined degree according to the argument passed by the control script execution unit 41. The basic function The executing unit 42 executes the above-mentioned basic function of rotation. the

图26的虚线框252内的脚本“rgb(0,0,0)”是用于根据控制脚本执行部41传递的自变量调出设定文本目标物的背景色的基本功能的脚本,基本功能执行部42执行上述背景色设定的基本功能。  The script "rgb(0,0,0)" in the dotted frame 252 of Fig. 26 is a script for calling out the basic function of setting the background color of the text object according to the argument passed by the control script execution unit 41, the basic function The executing unit 42 executes the above-mentioned basic function of background color setting. the

图13的虚线框253内的脚本揻ont-size=28是用于调出设定文本目标物的字体大小的基本功能的脚本,虚线框_254内的脚本揻ill=#000000是用于调出设定文本目标物的颜色的基本功能的脚本。”上述各基本功能由基本功能执行部42执行。  The script 揻ont-size=28 in the dotted line frame 253 of Fig. 13 is to be used for calling out the script of the basic function of the font size of setting text object, and the script 揻ill=#000000 in the dotted line frame_254 is to be used for calling Script for the basic functionality of setting the color of text objects. "Above-mentioned each basic function is carried out by basic function executing part 42.

或者,图12的虚线框261内的脚本“setTrait(″visibility″,’hidden’)”是将结构体的特性值″visibility″设定为’hidden’的功能,由控制脚本执行部41执行。  Alternatively, the script "setTrait("visibility", 'hidden')" inside the dotted line frame 261 in FIG. the

图12的脚本132b由控制脚本执行部41执行,定义了子操作菜单(图11(c)的子操作菜单1106)的打开关闭以及调出与子操作菜单所选择的选项对应的功能(基本功能/照片应用功能)的照片应用功能。若根据脚本132b,则控制脚本执行部41在子操作菜单关闭的情况下检测到预定按钮被按下时,则执行显示与主操作菜单所选择的选项对应的子操作菜单(这里是“submenu2”)的功能。另一方面,当在子操作菜单打开的情况下检测到预定按钮被按下时,控制脚本执行部41就调出并执行与打开的子操作菜单所选择的选项对应的menuFunction函数(照片应用功能)。此外,图12的脚本132d示出上述menuFunction函数的具体例子。脚本132d定义上述“submenu2”显示过程中可选择的候补功能。  Script 132b of Fig. 12 is carried out by control script execution unit 41, has defined the opening and closing of sub-operation menu (sub-operation menu 1106 of Fig. /Photos application function). According to the script 132b, when the control script execution unit 41 detects that the predetermined button is pressed when the sub-operation menu is closed, it executes and displays the sub-operation menu corresponding to the option selected by the main operation menu (here, "submenu2" ) function. On the other hand, when it is detected that a predetermined button is pressed while the sub-operation menu is open, the control script execution unit 41 calls out and executes the menuFunction function (photo application function) corresponding to the option selected by the opened sub-operation menu. ). In addition, the script 132d of FIG. 12 shows a specific example of the above-mentioned menuFunction function. The script 132d defines alternate functions that can be selected during the display of the above-mentioned "submenu2". the

图32的虚线框262内的脚本“setFloatTrait(″r″,’100’)”是将数值数据100设定为结构体的r值(脚本112a的圆形目标物所具有的值)的功能,是由控制脚本执行部41执行的功能。  The script "setFloatTrait("r", '100')" inside the dotted frame 262 in FIG. 32 is a function to set the numerical data 100 as the r value of the structure (the value that the circular object of the script 112a has), is a function executed by the control script execution unit 41 . the

但是,照片应用功能并不限于上述例子。显示用数据执行处理部40的结构的详细情况以及显示用数据执行处理部40用基本功能执行的照片应用功能的详细情况将在后文中阐述。  However, photo application functions are not limited to the above examples. The details of the configuration of the display data execution processing unit 40 and the details of the photo application functions executed by the display data execution processing unit 40 with basic functions will be described later. the

根据上述结构,显示用数据执行处理部40的控制脚本执行部41依据事件处理部11的指示,对显示用数据存储部51中存储的显示用数据的控制脚本进行解析,根据其解析结果,调出基本功能,即,对基本功能执行部42执行的基本功能进行适当组合,从而执行一个照片应用功能。  According to the above structure, the control script execution unit 41 of the display data execution processing unit 40 analyzes the control script of the display data stored in the display data storage unit 51 according to the instruction of the event processing unit 11, and calls The basic functions are generated, that is, the basic functions executed by the basic function execution unit 42 are appropriately combined to execute a photo application function. the

从而,利用控制脚本,即使不变更基本功能程序,也能够在电视机1中实现照片应用功能。如上所述,控制脚本是在外部生成,再提供给电视机1。因而,即使电视机1上市后,也能够灵活地改变使电视机1执行的照片应用功能,即便不对基本功能程序存储部29中存储的程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行电视机1的功能变更。  Therefore, by using the control script, the photo application function can be realized in the television 1 without changing the basic function program. As described above, the control script is generated externally and provided to the television 1 . Therefore, even after the TV 1 is launched, the photo application function executed by the TV 1 can be flexibly changed, and the function of the TV 1 can be easily changed without updating the program stored in the basic function program storage unit 29. . the

又,由于能够这样容易地进行功能变更,因此对于预先装入的功能,能够省去了在出售之前考虑所有需求并为了网罗这些需求而事先安装大量功能的麻烦。其结果,能够减轻电视机1的开发的负担。  Also, since functions can be changed easily in this way, it is possible to save the trouble of considering all requirements before selling and installing a large number of functions in advance to cover these requirements for pre-installed functions. As a result, the burden of development of the television 1 can be reduced. the

而且,上述控制脚本是包含在显示用数据中而提供给电视机1的。因此,与该显示用数据(显示画面)相对应地提供控制脚本,不管是在生成并发送显示用数据的一侧(显示用数据生成装置2),还是在接收并处理显示用数据的一侧(电视机1),都容易进行管理。而且,通过对每一个显示用数据提供控制脚本,能够根据显示用数据,高效率地仅提供显示该显示用数据时电视机1需要执行的功能。  Furthermore, the control script described above is included in the display data and provided to the television 1 . Therefore, a control script is provided corresponding to the display data (display screen), regardless of whether it is on the side that generates and transmits the display data (display data generating device 2) or on the side that receives and processes the display data. (Television 1), are easy to manage. Furthermore, by providing the control script for each display data, only the functions that the television 1 needs to execute when displaying the display data can be efficiently provided based on the display data. the

从以上可知,能够进行高效率的开发,并且即使不进行程序更新,也能够对上市的设备进行功能变更。  From the above, it can be seen that efficient development can be performed, and function changes can be made to marketed devices without updating programs. the

显示用数据生成装置的结构-概况  Structure of Display Data Generating Device - Overview

图4是表示本发明实施方式的显示用数据生成装置2的简要结构的框图。如图4所示,显示用数据生成装置2包括:通信部63;统一控制显示用数据生成装置2的控制部60;以及存储部90。  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the display data generation device 2 according to the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4 , the display data generation device 2 includes: a communication unit 63 ; a control unit 60 that collectively controls the display data generation device 2 ; and a storage unit 90 . the

控制部60控制显示用数据生成装置2包括的各部分的各种动作,具有请求消息解析部70、控制脚本生成部80、模式数据选择部61、以及显示用数据生成部62。 控制部60读出存储部90中记录的各种程序,控制本发明的显示用数据生成装置2的各部分,进行生成显示用数据(以及其中包含的控制脚本)用的各种处理。  The control unit 60 controls various operations of each part included in the display data generation device 2 , and includes a request message analysis unit 70 , a control script generation unit 80 , a pattern data selection unit 61 , and a display data generation unit 62 . The control unit 60 reads various programs recorded in the storage unit 90, controls each part of the display data generating device 2 of the present invention, and performs various processes for generating display data (and control scripts contained therein). the

存储部90记录控制部60执行的控制程序、OS程序、和控制部60执行用于生成显示用数据的各种处理时读出的各种数据,由硬盘等非易失性存储装置构成。上述各种数据分别存储于存储部90内部的各种存储部即模式数据存储部91和显示对象物存储部92等。但是,存储部90中存储的各种数据并不限于上文所述。  The storage unit 90 records the control program executed by the control unit 60 , the OS program, and various data read when the control unit 60 executes various processes for generating display data, and is composed of a nonvolatile storage device such as a hard disk. The various data described above are stored in the pattern data storage unit 91 and the display object storage unit 92 , which are various storage units inside the storage unit 90 . However, various data stored in the storage unit 90 are not limited to the above. the

通信部63通过通信网与网络相册系统100中的显示用数据生成装置2外部的各种装置进行通信,具有接收部63a和发送部63b。  The communication unit 63 communicates with various devices outside the display data generating device 2 in the Internet album system 100 through a communication network, and has a receiving unit 63a and a transmitting unit 63b. the

具体而言,接收部63a接收电视机1发送的显示用数据请求消息6,将通过接收部63a受理的显示用数据请求消息6传送给控制部60的请求消息解析部70。发送部63b将接收来自电视机1的请求而生成的显示用数据7进行发送。发送部63b对发出请求的电视机1发送从显示用数据生成部62传送来的显示用数据7。  Specifically, the receiving unit 63 a receives the display data request message 6 transmitted from the television 1 , and transmits the display data request message 6 accepted by the receiving unit 63 a to the request message analyzing unit 70 of the control unit 60 . The transmitting unit 63b transmits the display data 7 generated upon receiving a request from the television 1 . The transmitting unit 63 b transmits the display data 7 transmitted from the display data generating unit 62 to the requesting television 1 . the

又,在生成显示用数据7时,若是用于显示相册照片的显示画面用的显示用数据7,则通信部63进行与相册管理服务器3(图2)的通信,向相册管理服务器3请求成为显示对象的相册5(或照片),并从相册管理服务器3获取相册5(照片)。  Also, when generating the display data 7, if the display data 7 is used to display the display screen of the album photo, the communication unit 63 communicates with the album management server 3 (FIG. 2) and requests the album management server 3 to become The album 5 (or photo) of the object is displayed, and the album 5 (photo) is acquired from the album management server 3 . the

再者,当显示用数据生成装置2具有网络相册DB8时,不必用通信部63获取相册5(照片)。在这种情况下,将接收部63a从PC4等通信终端装置受理的相册5(照片)存储于网络相册DB8。  Furthermore, when the display data generating device 2 has the network album DB 8 , it is not necessary to acquire the album 5 (photo) by the communication unit 63 . In this case, the album 5 (photo) received by the receiving unit 63a from a communication terminal device such as PC4 is stored in the network album DB8. the

请求消息解析部70对电视机1发送的显示用数据请求消息6进行解析。例如,当显示用数据请求消息6为请求某一相册的幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据的消息时,请求消息解析部70提取该显示用数据请求消息6中包含的相册ID、显示画面ID(可以判断是请求幻灯片放映显示画面的信息)、终端ID(可以识别请求方的电视机1的信息)、以及其它各种相关信息。  The request message analysis unit 70 analyzes the display data request message 6 transmitted from the television 1 . For example, when the display data request message 6 is a message requesting data for displaying a slide show display screen of a certain album, the request message analysis unit 70 extracts the album ID and the display screen ID contained in the display data request message 6 ( It can be determined that the request is information on a slide show display screen), terminal ID (information that can identify the requester's television 1 ), and other various related information. the

模式数据选择部61按照请求消息解析部70的解析结果,选择用于生成所请求的显示用数据的最佳模式数据。模式数据选择部61从模式数据存储部91选择由上述解析结果确定的最佳模式数据。将模式数据选择部61选择的模式数据传输到根据该模式数据生成控制脚本的控制脚本生成部80。  The pattern data selection unit 61 selects optimum pattern data for generating the requested display data according to the analysis result of the request message analysis unit 70 . The pattern data selection unit 61 selects the optimum pattern data specified by the analysis result from the pattern data storage unit 91 . The pattern data selected by the pattern data selection unit 61 is transmitted to the control script generation unit 80 which generates a control script based on the pattern data. the

上述模式数据是指具有上述各种脚本的格式的控制脚本模式信息(或者是与格式脚本的组合)。即控制脚本的雏形。若将表示显示对象物的识别信息与其显示位置和显示尺寸信息的对应关系的信息、具体地规定操作菜单画面的信息、相册标题和备注等称为控制脚本的内容,则模式数据就可以说是嵌入内容之前的容器。  The above-mentioned schema data refers to control script schema information (or a combination with format scripts) having the formats of the above-mentioned various scripts. That is, the prototype of the control script. If the information indicating the correspondence relationship between the identification information of the display object and its display position and display size information, the information specifying the operation menu screen, album title and remarks, etc. are called control scripts, then the mode data can be said to be The container before the embedded content. the

例如,当根据请求消息解析部70的解析,确定是从电视机1请求幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据时,模式数据选择部61从模式数据存储部91,选择幻灯片放映显示画面构成用控制脚本的模式信息。然后,控制脚本生成部80依据上述选择的模式数据,生成控制脚本。  For example, when it is determined from the analysis of the request message analysis unit 70 that the data for displaying the slide show display screen is requested from the television 1, the mode data selection unit 61 selects the control unit for configuring the slide show display screen from the mode data storage unit 91. Schema information for the script. Then, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script based on the pattern data selected above. the

控制脚本生成部80利用模式数据选择部61所选择的模式数据,生成应包含于所请求的显示用数据中的控制脚本。  The control script generation unit 80 uses the pattern data selected by the pattern data selection unit 61 to generate a control script to be included in the requested display data. the

控制脚本生成部80按照请求消息解析部70的解析结果,从存储于存储部90的各种信息中提取出显示用数据中包含的所有信息(控制脚本内容的确定)。然后,将所确定的内容(例如,相册标题、照片ID、画面转移目标的信息等)嵌入上述模式数据,完成控制脚本。  The control script generating unit 80 extracts all information included in the display data from various information stored in the storage unit 90 according to the analysis result of the request message analyzing unit 70 (identification of the content of the control script). Then, embed the determined content (for example, album title, photo ID, screen transfer destination information, etc.) into the above pattern data to complete the control script. the

按照上述例子所述,所完成的控制脚本成为幻灯片放映显示画面构成用的控制脚本。  According to the above example, the completed control script becomes a control script for configuring a slide show display screen. the

显示用数据生成部62生成显示用数据请求消息6所指定的显示用数据,并发送给电视机1。更详细地说,是将控制脚本生成部80生成的控制脚本,与该控制脚本中包含的由显示对象物确定脚本所确定的显示对象物合成,生成显示电视机1所请求的显示画面用的显示用数据。  The display data generating unit 62 generates the display data specified by the display data request message 6 and sends it to the television 1 . More specifically, the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 is combined with the display object specified by the display object specification script included in the control script to generate a screen for displaying the display screen requested by the television 1. Display data. the

由此生成的显示用数据中,包含作为电视机1的请求即按照显示用数据请求消息6的内容而得的最佳信息的控制脚本。  The display data thus generated includes a control script of optimum information obtained in accordance with the content of the display data request message 6 as a request from the television 1 . the

根据上述结构,根据请求消息解析部70的解析结果,由模式数据选择部61选择最佳的模式数据,由控制脚本生成部80确定最佳的内容。从而,显示用数据生成装置2能够根据电视机1所请求的显示用数据,完成适当的控制脚本,并提供给电视机1。电视机1按照该适当的控制脚本,能够实现照片应用功能。  According to the above configuration, based on the analysis result of the request message analysis unit 70 , the optimal pattern data is selected by the pattern data selection unit 61 , and the optimal content is determined by the control script generation unit 80 . Therefore, the display data generation device 2 can create an appropriate control script based on the display data requested by the television 1 and provide it to the television 1 . The television 1 can realize the photo application function according to the appropriate control script. the

由上述可知,可以利用控制脚本控制电视机1,以便根据电视机1请求的要显示的显示画面(显示用数据)的内容,进行适合该显示用数据的动作。  As can be seen from the above, the TV 1 can be controlled by the control script so that according to the content of the display screen (display data) requested by the TV 1 to be displayed, an operation suitable for the display data is performed. the

这样,通过生成控制脚本并提供给电视机1,即使不进行程序更新,也能够容易地执行电视机1的功能变更。而且,因为对应于显示用数据而生成控制脚本,因此,可以将根据显示用数据的内容而具有个性化的控制脚本提供给电视机1。  In this way, by generating a control script and providing it to the television 1, it is possible to easily change the function of the television 1 without performing a program update. Furthermore, since the control script is generated corresponding to the display data, it is possible to provide the television 1 with a control script personalized according to the content of the display data. the

网络相册系统的处理  Handling of the network photo album system

图5是表示本发明实施方式的网络相册系统100中各种装置的处理流程的顺序图。  FIG. 5 is a sequence diagram showing the processing flow of various devices in the network album system 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. the

当电视机1的事件处理部11检测到预定的事件(经过预定的时间或者受理用户 的来自操作部13的指示信号等)时(S1中的“是”),显示用数据请求处理部30执行向显示用数据生成装置2请求显示用数据的显示用数据请求处理(S2)。具体而言,生成显示用数据请求消息6,并发送到显示用数据生成装置2。显示用数据请求处理部30也可以从相关信息存储部52(图1)提取显示用数据生成装置2生成显示用数据所需的相关信息,并使其包含在显示用数据请求消息6中。  When the event processing unit 11 of the TV set 1 detects a predetermined event (elapse of a predetermined time or accepting an instruction signal from the user’s operation unit 13, etc.) (“Yes” in S1), the display data request processing unit 30 executes Display data request processing for requesting display data to the display data generating device 2 (S2). Specifically, a display data request message 6 is generated and sent to the display data generating device 2 . The display data request processing unit 30 may extract relevant information necessary for the display data generation device 2 to generate display data from the relevant information storage unit 52 ( FIG. 1 ), and include it in the display data request message 6 . the

当显示用数据生成装置2从电视机1接收到显示用数据请求消息6时(S3中的“是”),请求消息解析部70执行用于对所接收的显示用数据请求消息6进行解析的请求消息解析处理(S4)。  When the display data generating device 2 receives the display data request message 6 from the television 1 ("Yes" in S3), the request message analyzing unit 70 executes a process for analyzing the received display data request message 6. Request message analysis processing (S4). the

然后,模式数据选择部61根据S4的解析结果,选择用于生成提供给电视机1用的显示用数据的最佳模式数据(S5)。模式数据存储于模式数据存储部91(图4),模式数据选择部61从存储部91选择最佳的模式数据。  Then, the pattern data selection unit 61 selects optimum pattern data for generating display data to be provided to the television 1 based on the analysis result in S4 (S5). The pattern data is stored in the pattern data storage unit 91 ( FIG. 4 ), and the pattern data selection unit 61 selects optimum pattern data from the storage unit 91 . the

然后,控制脚本生成部80依据所选择的模式数据,执行生成控制脚本的处理(控制脚本生成处理)(S6),该控制脚本用于在电视机1中显示要显示的显示对象物,或者用于使电视机1进行确定的动作。接着,生成显示用数据(S7),该显示用数据包括:控制脚本生成部80生成的控制脚本;以及存储于显示对象物存储部92(图3)的要显示的显示对象物。  Then, the control script generation unit 80 executes a process of generating a control script (control script generation process) based on the selected mode data (S6). In order to make the television 1 perform a certain action. Next, display data including the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 and the display object to be displayed stored in the display object storage unit 92 ( FIG. 3 ) is generated ( S7 ). the

最后,显示用数据生成装置2将S7中生成的显示用数据发送到请求方的电视机1(S8)。  Finally, the display data generating device 2 transmits the display data generated in S7 to the requesting television 1 (S8). the

电视机1从显示用数据生成装置2接收显示用数据7(S9)。当电视机1的事件处理部11检测到预定的事件(接收所请求的显示用数据或者受理用户的来自操作部13的指示信号等)时(S10中的“是”),显示用数据执行处理部40执行所接收的显示用数据的处理(显示用数据执行处理)(S11)。  The television 1 receives the display data 7 from the display data generating device 2 (S9). When the event processing unit 11 of the television 1 detects a predetermined event (receipt of requested display data or acceptance of an instruction signal from the user from the operation unit 13, etc.) ("Yes" in S10), the display data executes processing. The unit 40 executes processing of the received display data (display data execution processing) (S11). the

显示用数据执行处理部40执行的处理内容在接收到的显示用数据包含的控制脚本中进行描述,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本控制基本功能执行部42,利用基本功能,可以执行作为网络相册的应用功能的各种处理(照片应用功能)。  The processing content performed by the display data execution processing unit 40 is described in the control script contained in the received display data. The control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 according to the control script. Using the basic functions, it can execute as a web album. Various processing of application functions (photo application functions). the

例如,当显示用数据中含有作为显示对象物的照片以及包含规定显示该照片时的布局的布局定义脚本的控制脚本时,显示用数据执行处理部40根据控制脚本的布局定义脚本显示上述照片。  For example, when display data includes a photo as an object to be displayed and a control script including a layout definition script specifying a layout for displaying the photo, the display data execution processing unit 40 displays the photo according to the layout definition script of the control script. the

这样,电视机1通过按照显示用数据中包含的控制脚本,可以执行照片应用功能。  In this way, the television 1 can execute the photo application function by following the control script included in the display data. the

从而,通过改变上述控制脚本的描述,能够容易地执行电视机1的功能变更。  Therefore, by changing the description of the control script described above, it is possible to easily change the function of the television 1 . the

又,显示用数据生成装置2可以依照电视机1的请求而生成最佳的显示用数据(控制脚本),控制电视机1的动作。  Furthermore, the display data generation device 2 can generate optimal display data (control script) according to the request of the television 1 and control the operation of the television 1 . the

以下说明中,作为电视机1执行的照片应用功能的例子,举出下面三例。以下各实施方式中,详细说明利用显示用数据的控制脚本和电视机1的基本功能改变电视机1的各种照片应用功能的顺序。  In the following description, the following three examples are given as examples of photo application functions executed by the television 1 . In each of the following embodiments, the procedure for changing various photo application functions of the television 1 using the control script of the display data and the basic functions of the television 1 will be described in detail. the

功能一:显示操作菜单/执行操作......实施方式1  Function 1: Display operation menu/execute operation...implementation mode 1

电视机1在本装置的显示部15中显示涉及网络相册应用的显示用数据时,将电视机1可执行的操作选项一览作为操作菜单提示给用户。又,电视机1从所显示的操作菜单中,通过操作部13、操作受理部21受理用户所选择的操作选项,并执行该操作。  When the television 1 displays the display data related to the web album application on the display unit 15 of the device, the user is presented with a list of operation options executable by the television 1 as an operation menu. In addition, the television 1 accepts an operation option selected by the user through the operation unit 13 and the operation accepting unit 21 from the displayed operation menu, and executes the operation. the

若使用包含于显示用数据中的控制脚本,就可以对每一个显示用数据变更要显示的操作菜单的选项,并且可以灵活地变更电视机1执行的操作选项和内容。  By using the control script included in the display data, the items of the operation menu to be displayed can be changed for each display data, and the operation options and contents executed by the television 1 can be flexibly changed. the

而且,若使用控制脚本,则可以进行电视机1的上述操作菜单的显示控制。例如,可以灵活地变更操作菜单的显示位置、显示时间、图样等。  Furthermore, if a control script is used, display control of the above-mentioned operation menu of the television 1 can be performed. For example, the display position, display time, pattern, etc. of the operation menu can be flexibly changed. the

功能二:指定再描绘区域......实施方式2  Function 2: Designate the redrawing area...Implementation 2

电视机1根据显示用数据生成显示画面的数据,并将其描绘于显示部15,进行显示画面的显示。在切换要显示的显示画面时,电视机1根据不同的显示用数据,对新显示画面的数据进行再描绘。这时,当变更显示内容所需的区域并不是显示部15的全部区域,而是其一部分时,电视机1将再描绘区域限定于该部分,可以高效率地进行显示画面的切换。  The television 1 generates data for a display screen based on the display data, and draws the data on the display unit 15 to display the display screen. When the display screen to be displayed is switched, the television 1 redraws the data of the new display screen based on different display data. At this time, if the area required to change the display content is not the entire area of the display unit 15 but a part thereof, the television 1 limits the redrawing area to this part, and can switch the display screen efficiently. the

若使用包含于显示用数据中的控制脚本,则对每一个显示用数据都能指定再描绘区域,对于电视机1,可以根据显示用数据的显示内容而灵活地指定再描绘区域。而且,通常对于复杂图形的再描绘,会发生按照复杂图形计算应再描绘区域的高负荷处理(剪辑处理)。关于这一点,电视机1通过指定包含复杂图形的整个区域的简易形状(例如矩形)的再描绘区域,不用进行高负荷的剪辑处理,就能够对再描绘区域进行确定,高效率地进行适当的再描绘处理。  By using the control script included in the display data, the redrawing area can be designated for each display data, and the television 1 can flexibly designate the redrawing area according to the display content of the display data. Furthermore, in general, redrawing of complex graphics requires heavy-duty processing (clip processing) to calculate areas to be redrawn in accordance with complex graphics. In this regard, by designating a redrawing region of a simple shape (for example, a rectangle) including the entire area of a complex figure, the television 1 can determine the redrawing region without performing heavy clipping processing, and perform appropriate and efficient processing. Redraw processing. the

此外,这里所用的(尤其是实施方式2中使用的)“描绘”(以及其它语法上的变化形式)用语,广义上来说,是指在显示装置(显示部15等)中显示数据用的计算机(电视机1等)的动作。因而,“描绘”也可以包含(将显示于显示装置的数据写入帧缓冲器等存储器的)写入(=writing)、将数据转换成可显示于显示装置的形式(=converting)、呈现(rendering)、光栅化(rasterizing)等动作。  In addition, the term "drawing" (and other grammatical variations) used here (especially in Embodiment 2) refers to a computer for displaying data on a display device (display unit 15, etc.) in a broad sense. (TV 1, etc.) Therefore, "drawing" may also include writing (=writing) (writing data displayed on a display device into a memory such as a frame buffer), converting data into a format that can be displayed on a display device (=converting), presenting ( rendering), rasterizing and other actions. the

功能三:分配遥控器按钮的功能......实施方式3  Function 3: assign the function of the remote control button...implementation mode 3

电视机1根据用户按下设置于操作部13的各个按钮而输入到操作受理部21的指示信号,执行各种动作。  The television 1 executes various operations in response to an instruction signal input to the operation accepting unit 21 by pressing each button provided on the operation unit 13 by the user. the

上述各个按钮具有预先分配好的功能,通过按下预定的按钮,电视机1就执行对应的预定动作。  Each of the above buttons has a pre-assigned function, and by pressing a predetermined button, the television 1 will execute a corresponding predetermined action. the

若使用包含于显示用数据中的控制脚本,则对每一个显示用数据,都可以变更操作部13中分配的按钮的功能。  If the control script included in the display data is used, the functions of the buttons assigned to the operation unit 13 can be changed for each display data. the

具体而言,在某一显示用数据进行显示的状态下,按下某一按钮时,可以将电视机1所执行的功能变更为其它功能,或者在执行某一动作时,可以将应按下的按钮变更为其它按钮。  Specifically, in the state where a certain display data is displayed, when a certain button is pressed, the function performed by the television 1 can be changed to another function, or when a certain action is performed, the function that should be pressed can be changed to another function. button to change to another button. the

此外,在以下各实施方式的说明中,对于同一构件采用同一标号。因而,对于已述的各装置的结构,采用同一标号,并适当地省略重复说明。  In addition, in description of each embodiment below, the same code|symbol is used for the same member. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations of the respective devices already described, and repeated descriptions are appropriately omitted. the

实施方式1  Implementation mode 1

背景技术和课题  Background Technology and Issues

以往,对于电视机或便携式电话等内置组合型计算机的设备,在改变所安装的应用的外貌或改变规格时,需要变更已组合的应用程序。  Conventionally, in devices such as televisions and mobile phones that incorporate built-in computers, when changing the appearance or specifications of installed applications, it is necessary to change the combined applications. the

例如,在利用网络浏览器实现GUI画面等时,通过重写作为原始数据的内容(显示用数据),能够实现显示位置的变更等。  For example, when realizing a GUI screen or the like with a web browser, changing the display position and the like can be realized by rewriting the content (display data) that is original data. the

专利文献1(日本公开专利公报:特开2005-51563(2005年2月24日公开))中揭示了一边在传送侧掌握接收侧的画面中所显示的图像的布局、一边利用简单的操作改变其布局的内容传送方法以及内容传送系统。  Patent Document 1 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-51563 (published on February 24, 2005)) discloses that while the layout of the image displayed on the screen on the receiving side is grasped by the transmitting side, it can be changed by simple operations. The content delivery method of its layout and the content delivery system. the

然而,变更浏览器自身所具有的功能,仍然需要变更已组合到设备中的程序。而且,无法根据传送的内容(显示用数据)的内容而灵活地变更内容接收侧(组合设备(电视机1))的功能。  However, changing the functions that the browser itself has still requires changing the programs that are incorporated into the device. Furthermore, it is not possible to flexibly change the function of the content receiving side (combined device (television 1)) according to the content of the transmitted content (display data). the

上述专利文献1的方法中,若分配方在事先编制程序,使得随后能够分配并变更设定文件和插件,就不需要为了变更分配目标的设备功能而重写整个软件。然而,即使是在这种情况下,为了根据传送的内容而灵活地变更设备的功能,也需要在内容中附带上述与内容对应的操作菜单的设定文件而进行传送。因此,不管是分配方,还是分配目标的设备,都存在难以管理内容和设定文件的问题。  In the above-mentioned method of Patent Document 1, if the distributor prepares the program in advance so that the setting file and the plug-in can be distributed and changed later, it is not necessary to rewrite the entire software in order to change the function of the distribution target device. However, even in this case, in order to flexibly change the function of the device according to the content to be delivered, it is necessary to deliver the above-mentioned setting file of the operation menu corresponding to the content with the content. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to manage content and set files regardless of the distribution side or the device of the distribution destination. the

因此,本实施方式中说明电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2(网络相册系统100),该电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2能够利用因包含于显示用数据中而易于 管理的控制脚本,根据电视机1所显示的显示用数据(显示画面/内容)的内容,选定要显示的操作菜单的操作选项,使得电视机1可执行的功能具有个性化。  Therefore, in this embodiment, the TV 1 and the display data generating device 2 (network album system 100) that can use control scripts that are included in the display data and are easy to manage will be described. According to the content of the display data (display screen/content) displayed by the television 1, the operation options of the operation menu to be displayed are selected, so that the executable functions of the television 1 are personalized. the

电视机的结构1-详细情况  TV structure 1-details

图6和图9是表示本实施方式的电视机1的主要部分结构的框图。图6是更详细地表示图1所示的电视机1的显示用数据请求处理部30的图。  6 and 9 are block diagrams showing the configuration of main parts of the television 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing in more detail the display data request processing unit 30 of the television 1 shown in FIG. 1 . the

如图6所示,电视机1的显示用数据请求处理部30还包括:显示对象ID确定部31;请求显示画面确定部32;相关信息提取部33;以及消息生成部34。存储部50在图1结构的基础上,还包括相册ID存储部53和请求规则存储部54。  As shown in FIG. 6 , the display data request processing unit 30 of the television 1 further includes: a display object ID specifying unit 31 ; a requested display screen specifying unit 32 ; a related information extracting unit 33 ; and a message generating unit 34 . The storage unit 50 further includes an album ID storage unit 53 and a request rule storage unit 54 in addition to the structure shown in FIG. 1 . the

这些显示用数据请求处理部30的各部分根据事件处理部11检测预定的事件并将预定信号通知显示用数据请求处理部30,执行图5所示的显示用数据请求处理(S2),生成显示用数据请求消息6。  Each part of these display data request processing parts 30 detects a predetermined event according to the event processing part 11 and notifies the display data request processing part 30 of a predetermined signal, executes the display data request processing (S2) shown in FIG. Request message 6 with data. the

图7是表示显示用数据请求处理部30生成的显示用数据请求消息6的数据结构的示意图。图7中,作为一个例子,表示请求幻灯片放映显示画面(的显示用数据)时的显示用数据请求消息6。  FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the data structure of the display data request message 6 generated by the display data request processing unit 30 . FIG. 7 shows, as an example, a display data request message 6 when requesting a slide show display screen (display data). the

在图7所示的例子中,显示用数据请求消息6是由五个记录整合成一个结构体而构成的。在图7所示的显示用数据请求消息6中,第一列C101表示数据名称,第二列C102表示带有该数据名称的数据内容。此外,各数据的数据类型可根据各数据所表示的内容、容量、用途而进行适当选择。  In the example shown in FIG. 7, the display data request message 6 is formed by integrating five records into one structure. In the display data request message 6 shown in FIG. 7, the first column C101 indicates the data name, and the second column C102 indicates the data content with the data name. In addition, the data type of each data can be appropriately selected according to the content, capacity, and use indicated by each data. the

记录R1表示显示用数据请求消息6请求幻灯片放映显示画面时应在该显示画面中显示的照片(请求图像)所属相册的相册ID(识别信息)。记录R2表示应在显示画面中显示的照片的照片ID(识别信息)。本实施方式中,所谓照片ID,是指在相册内唯一确定的显示顺序,图7的“NO.1”表示记录R1所确定的相册中显示顺序为1的照片。  The record R1 indicates the album ID (identification information) of the album to which the photograph (request image) to be displayed on the display screen when the display data request message 6 requests the slide show display screen belongs. The record R2 indicates the photo ID (identification information) of the photo to be displayed on the display screen. In this embodiment, the so-called photo ID refers to the uniquely determined display order in the album, and "NO.1" in FIG. 7 indicates the photo whose display order is 1 in the album identified by record R1. the

记录R3表示对该显示用数据请求消息6请求的显示画面类型进行识别用的显示画面ID。在图7所示的例子中,显示画面ID揝cr_C意味着幻灯片放映显示画面。”从而,该显示用数据请求消息6成为请求对记录R1所示的相册的显示顺序为1的照片进行幻灯片显示用的幻灯片放映显示画面的消息。  The record R3 indicates a display screen ID for identifying the type of display screen requested by the display data request message 6 . In the example shown in FIG. 7, the display screen ID "cr_C" means a slide show display screen. "Therefore, this display data request message 6 is a message requesting a slideshow display screen for slideshow display of the photos whose display sequence is 1 in the album indicated by the record R1.

记录R4表示对作为生成显示用数据请求消息6的请求方的电视机1进行识别用的终端ID。在图7所示的例子中,存放了电视机1的IP地址。由此,显示用数据生成装置2可以对该显示用数据请求消息6是从何处发送来的进行确定,因而,可以确定返回所生成的显示用数据7的返回目的地。此外,终端ID只要是显示用 数据生成装置2可以唯一地识别接收网络相册系统100中的显示用数据7的各个终端(电视机1),就可以是任何信息。显示用数据生成装置2可以利用电视机1每一次登录分别带有的终端ID,也可以将MAC地址或产品序列号等用作为终端ID。  The record R4 indicates a terminal ID for identifying the television 1 as the requester for generating the display data request message 6 . In the example shown in FIG. 7, the IP address of the television 1 is stored. Thereby, the display data generating device 2 can specify from where the display data request message 6 was sent, and thus can specify a return destination of the generated display data 7 . In addition, the terminal ID may be any information as long as the display data generating device 2 can uniquely identify each terminal (television 1) receiving the display data 7 in the network album system 100. The display data generating device 2 may use a terminal ID provided every time the TV 1 registers, or may use a MAC address, a product serial number, or the like as the terminal ID. the

而且,显示用数据请求消息6也可以如记录R5~R7所示,包含电视机1的规格信息。例如,将电视机1的规格信息(画面尺寸、分辨率等特别涉及显示功能的规格信息;或机型名称、软件版本信息等涉及网络相册功能的规格信息)包含于显示用数据请求消息6中。由此,显示用数据生成装置2可以根据请求方的电视机1的规格而生成显示用数据7。  Furthermore, the display data request message 6 may include specification information of the television 1 as shown in records R5 to R7. For example, the specification information of the television 1 (specification information related to the display function such as screen size and resolution; or specification information related to the web album function such as model name and software version information) is included in the display data request message 6 . Thereby, the display data generating device 2 can generate the display data 7 according to the specification of the requesting television 1 . the

图6的显示对象ID确定部31确定应向显示用数据生成装置2请求的显示对象,并对该显示对象ID进行确定。具体而言,对于应在图7所示的显示用数据请求消息6的记录R1和R2中存放的相册ID、照片ID进行确定。  The display object ID specifying unit 31 in FIG. 6 specifies a display object to be requested from the display data generating device 2 and specifies the display object ID. Specifically, album IDs and photo IDs to be stored in the records R1 and R2 of the display data request message 6 shown in FIG. 7 are specified. the

显示对象ID确定部31确定相册ID、照片ID的方法,例如如下所述。  The method for specifying the album ID and the photo ID by the display object ID specifying unit 31 is as follows, for example. the

相册ID存储部53中存放有用户过去浏览过的相册的相册ID,根据相册ID存储部53中存储的历史信息,将过去浏览过的相册历史通过显示控制部24而显示于显示部15。  The album ID storage unit 53 stores the album IDs of the albums that the user has browsed in the past. According to the history information stored in the album ID storage unit 53 , the history of the albums browsed in the past is displayed on the display unit 15 through the display control unit 24 . the

用户通过利用操作部13按下按钮,选择显示于显示部15的相册中的某一个,进行指示幻灯片放映开始的指示信号输入。该信号通过事件处理部11通知到显示对象ID确定部31,显示对象ID确定部31从相册ID存储部53确定用户选择的相册ID。或者,也可以在相册ID输入画面显示于显示部15的状态下,用户手动输入相册ID,同时将按下的按钮的信号传输到显示对象ID确定部31,并将其确定作为相册ID。  The user selects one of the albums displayed on the display unit 15 by pressing a button on the operation unit 13, and inputs an instruction signal for instructing the start of the slide show. This signal is notified by the event processing unit 11 to the display target ID specifying unit 31 , and the display target ID specifying unit 31 specifies the album ID selected by the user from the album ID storage unit 53 . Alternatively, the user may manually input the album ID while the album ID input screen is displayed on the display unit 15, and at the same time transmit a signal of the pressed button to the display target ID determination unit 31, and determine it as the album ID. the

作为照片ID的确定方法,考虑例如事先将幻灯片放映定为必须按照显示顺序进行显示的情况。当事件处理部11检测到进行了指示幻灯片放映开始的指示输入时,显示对象ID确定部31将表示显示顺序为第一号的NO.1确定作为照片ID。或者,在显示顺序为第n号的幻灯片放映显示画面进行显示的状态下,事件处理部11检测到选择下一页的按钮被按下时,只要将显示顺序NO.n+1确定作为照片ID即可。  As a method of specifying photo IDs, for example, it is considered that slide shows must be displayed in the display order in advance. When the event processing unit 11 detects that an instruction input for instructing the start of the slide show is made, the display object ID specifying unit 31 specifies NO. 1 indicating that the display order is the first as the photo ID. Or, in the state where the slide show display screen whose display order is No. ID is enough. the

请求显示画面确定部32确定上述各种显示画面中的显示用数据请求消息6应请求的显示画面的类型。请求显示画面确定部32根据事件处理部11检测到的事件以及此时电视机1的工作状态,确定请求哪一个显示画面。  The request display screen specifying unit 32 specifies the type of display screen to be requested by the display data request message 6 among the various display screens described above. The requested display screen determining unit 32 determines which display screen is requested according to the event detected by the event processing unit 11 and the operating state of the television 1 at the time. the

请求规则存储部54中,对于(1)事件处理部11检测到的事件和(2)电视机1的 工作状态的组合,与(3)应请求的显示画面的显示画面ID相对应进行存储,请求显示画面确定部32根据来自事件处理部11的通知和请求规则存储部54,能够确定请求哪一种显示画面为好。例如,事件处理部11检测到电视机1的显示用数据执行处理部40启动了照片应用功能时,请求显示画面确定部32确定该应用的初始画面作为应请求的显示画面。  In the request rule storage unit 54, for (1) the combination of the event detected by the event processing unit 11 and (2) the operating state of the TV set 1, it is stored in correspondence with the display screen ID of the display screen of (3) the request, The request display screen determination unit 32 can determine which display screen is to be requested based on the notification from the event processing unit 11 and the request rule storage unit 54 . For example, when the event processing unit 11 detects that the photo application function has been activated by the display data execution processing unit 40 of the television 1, the request display screen determination unit 32 determines the initial screen of the application as the requested display screen. the

请求显示画面确定部32确定的显示画面的显示画面ID,例如包含在图7所示的显示用数据请求消息6的记录R3中。  The display screen ID of the display screen specified by the requested display screen specifying unit 32 is, for example, included in the record R3 of the display data request message 6 shown in FIG. 7 . the

相关信息提取部33从相关信息存储部52,获取与电视机1有关而预先登录的各种相关信息中的包含在显示用数据请求消息6中的所需相关信息。  The related information extracting unit 33 acquires necessary related information included in the display data request message 6 from the related information storage unit 52 among various related information related to the television 1 registered in advance. the

图8是表示相关信息存储部52中存储的相关信息表的一个示例图。本实施方式中,相关信息存储部52中存储的相关信息可分为三种。  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a related information table stored in the related information storage unit 52 . In this embodiment, the relevant information stored in the relevant information storage unit 52 can be classified into three types. the

第一列组C11中存储有电视机1的“机型名称”、“终端ID”、“画面尺寸”、以及“像素数”等与电视机1的规格相关的规格信息。而且,也可以存储表示网络相册系统的应用软件版本的“软件版本信息”作为规格信息。第二列组C12中存储有“(幻灯片的)进片间隔”、“循环再现”、“备注显示”、“操作方法显示”等与相册或照片的显示相关的设定信息。而且,也可以存储设定由相册历史画面显示的相册信息的件数的“历史显示件数”作为设定信息。如图8所示的例子,若“历史显示件数”设定为2件,则显示相册历史画面时,始终显示两件相册历史信息。第三列组C13中存储有“观众年龄”、“观众居住地”、“邮政编码”等与电视机1的用户相关的用户信息。  Specification information related to the specifications of the television 1 such as "model name", "terminal ID", "screen size", and "number of pixels" of the television 1 is stored in the first column group C11. Furthermore, "software version information" indicating the version of the application software of the network album system may be stored as specification information. The second column group C12 stores setting information related to the display of albums or photos, such as "advance interval (of slide show), loop playback", "remark display", and "operation method display". Furthermore, as setting information, a "history display number" for setting the number of album information displayed on the album history screen may be stored. As shown in the example in FIG. 8, if the "Number of Historical Displayed Items" is set to 2, when the album history screen is displayed, two pieces of album history information will always be displayed. The third column group C13 stores user information related to the user of the television 1 such as "viewer's age", "viewer's place of residence", and "zip code". the

本实施方式中,在与照片显示有关的显示画面(幻灯片放映显示画面或缩略图显示画面等)中,由于根据电视机1的显示部15的像素数生成显示用数据7,因此在请求这样的显示画面时,相关信息提取部33从相关信息存储部52提取电视机1的“像素数”信息。提取出的“像素数”的信息构成图7所示的显示用数据请求消息6的记录R5。  In this embodiment, in the display screen related to photo display (slideshow display screen or thumbnail display screen, etc.), since the display data 7 is generated according to the number of pixels of the display unit 15 of the television 1, it is requested that such When the screen is displayed, the related information extracting unit 33 extracts the “number of pixels” information of the television 1 from the related information storage unit 52 . The extracted information on the "number of pixels" constitutes the record R5 of the display data request message 6 shown in FIG. 7 . the

消息生成部34生成显示用数据请求消息6,该显示用数据请求消息6包含显示对象ID确定部31、请求显示画面确定部32、和相关信息提取部33的各部根据事件处理部11的通知而确定(提取)的请求显示用数据用的各种信息。将消息生成部34生成的显示用数据请求消息6(图7),通过消息发送控制部22,从发送部14a发送到显示用数据生成装置2。  The message generation unit 34 generates a display data request message 6 that includes the display object ID determination unit 31 , the request display screen determination unit 32 , and the related information extraction unit 33 according to the notification from the event processing unit 11 . Various information for the request display data to be determined (extracted). The display data request message 6 ( FIG. 7 ) generated by the message generating unit 34 is transmitted from the transmitting unit 14 a to the display data generating device 2 via the message transmission control unit 22 . the

图9是更详细地表示图1所示的电视机1的显示用数据执行处理部40的图。  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing in more detail the display data execution processing unit 40 of the television 1 shown in FIG. 1 . the

如图9所示,电视机1中,显示用数据执行处理部40的控制脚本执行部41还包括:控制脚本解析部140;幻灯片放映执行控制部141;操作菜单控制部142;以及照片旋转控制部143。  As shown in FIG. 9 , in the television 1, the control script execution unit 41 of the display data execution processing unit 40 further includes: a control script analysis unit 140; a slide show execution control unit 141; an operation menu control unit 142; and a photo rotation control unit 143 . the

这些控制脚本执行部41的各部分根据事件处理部11检测预定的事件(例如,如上述请求的显示用数据从显示用数据生成装置2提供时)并将预定信号通知显示用数据执行处理部40,执行图5所示的显示用数据执行处理(S11),处理显示用数据7。  Each part of these control script execution parts 41 detects a predetermined event (for example, when the display data requested as above is supplied from the display data generation device 2) according to the event processing part 11, and notifies the display data execution processing part 40 of a predetermined signal. , the display data execution process (S11) shown in FIG. 5 is executed, and the display data 7 is processed. the

控制脚本解析部140对图3所示的显示用数据7尤其是显示用数据7中包含的控制脚本110进行解析。例如,控制脚本解析部140对控制脚本110进行解析,提取出与操作菜单有关的脚本(操作菜单确定脚本122、操作功能定义脚本132等),将其解析结果传输到操作菜单控制部142。  The control script analysis unit 140 analyzes the display data 7 shown in FIG. 3 , especially the control script 110 included in the display data 7 . For example, the control script analysis unit 140 analyzes the control script 110, extracts scripts related to the operation menu (operation menu determination script 122, operation function definition script 132, etc.), and transmits the analysis result to the operation menu control unit 142. the

幻灯片放映执行控制部141控制执行相册照片的幻灯片放映用的各种处理的执行。具体而言,控制基本功能执行部42,按照布局定义脚本112生成幻灯片放映显示画面的数据,并使显示控制部24进行描绘。或者,控制基本功能执行部42,自动再现幻灯片放映,或者执行与照片重叠显示的字符串和图形等的显示/不显示。  The slideshow execution control unit 141 controls execution of various processes for executing a slideshow of album photos. Specifically, the basic function execution unit 42 is controlled to generate the data of the slideshow display screen according to the layout definition script 112 and to cause the display control unit 24 to draw. Alternatively, the basic function execution unit 42 is controlled to automatically reproduce a slide show, or to perform display/non-display of character strings, graphics, etc. superimposed on a photo. the

操作菜单控制部142控制将电视机1具有的功能(电视机1可执行的操作)选项一览表示的操作菜单的显示处理。具体而言,控制基本功能执行部42,按照布局定义脚本112的操作菜单确定脚本122,生成与幻灯片放映显示画面重叠的操作菜单的数据,并使显示控制部24进行描绘。  The operation menu control unit 142 controls display processing of an operation menu that lists options of functions (operations that the television 1 can execute) included in the television 1 . Specifically, the basic function execution unit 42 is controlled to generate data of an operation menu superimposed on the slide show display screen in accordance with the operation menu determination script 122 of the layout definition script 112 , and causes the display control unit 24 to draw. the

此外,对于构成由操作菜单确定脚本122所确定的操作菜单的每一个操作选项,与该选项被选择时电视机1要执行的功能相关。与操作选项对应的各功能由操作功能定义脚本132进行定义,通过控制脚本执行部41和受其控制的基本功能执行部42实现一个照片应用功能。  In addition, each operation option constituting the operation menu determined by the operation menu determination script 122 is related to the function to be executed by the television 1 when the option is selected. Each function corresponding to the operation option is defined by the operation function definition script 132, and a photo application function is realized through the control script execution unit 41 and the basic function execution unit 42 controlled by it. the

作为操作功能执行控制部的一个例子,举出有照片旋转控制部143。  As an example of the operation function execution control unit, there is the photo rotation control unit 143 . the

照片旋转控制部143控制基本功能执行部42,按照操作功能定义脚本132,执行照片的旋转和显示处理。例如,当用户选择“右转90度”的操作选项时,在将照片右转90度的状态下使其显示于显示部15。  The photo rotation control unit 143 controls the basic function execution unit 42 to execute rotation and display processing of a photo according to the operation function definition script 132 . For example, when the user selects an operation option of “rotate right 90 degrees”, the photo is displayed on the display unit 15 in a state of turning the photo 90 degrees to the right. the

显示控制部24根据控制脚本执行部41通知的显示画面数据,描绘显示区域,将显示部15中由显示用数据规定的显示画面显示于电视机1。  The display control unit 24 draws a display area based on the display screen data notified from the control script execution unit 41 , and displays the display screen specified by the display data on the display unit 15 on the television 1 . the

电视机的显示用数据执行处理流程  Data Execution Processing Flow for TV Display

图10是表示电视机1中的显示用数据执行处理流程的流程图。在图10中,作 为一个例子,对通过接收所请求的幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据而显示幻灯片放映显示画面、执行幻灯片放映的电视机1的处理流程进行说明。  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of display data execution processing in the television 1 . In FIG. 10 , as an example, the processing flow of the television 1 that displays the slide show display screen and executes the slide show by receiving the requested data for displaying the slide show display screen will be described. the

当从事件处理部11接收到开始显示用数据执行处理的通知时,控制脚本解析部140按照该通知,从显示用数据存储部51获取所接收的幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据,对其中包含的控制脚本进行解析(S101)。  When receiving a notification from the event processing unit 11 to start display data execution processing, the control script analysis unit 140 acquires the received data for displaying the slide show display screen from the display data storage unit 51 according to the notification, and includes The control script is analyzed (S101). the

幻灯片放映执行控制部141执行将幻灯片放映显示画面显示于显示部15用的脚本(布局定义脚本等)(S102)。显示控制部24按照幻灯片放映执行控制部141的控制,描绘幻灯片放映显示画面,并显示于显示部15(S103)。从而,完成初次描绘,例如如图11(a)所示,可以显示作为包含在上述幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据中的显示对象物111的照片。这里,成为事件待机状态(例如,用户通过操作部13进行按钮输入等)(S104)。此外,当幻灯片放映自动再现时,如图11(a)所示,幻灯片放映执行控制部141按照控制脚本,显示表示这种情况的自动进片中的图标1101。或者,幻灯片放映执行控制部141也可以按照控制脚本,显示照片标题1102、操作方法画面1103等。  The slide show execution control unit 141 executes a script (such as a layout definition script) for displaying the slide show display screen on the display unit 15 ( S102 ). The display control unit 24 draws the slide show display screen according to the control of the slide show execution control unit 141 and displays it on the display unit 15 ( S103 ). Accordingly, the first drawing is completed, and a photograph as the display object 111 included in the data for displaying the slide show display screen can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 11( a ). Here, it becomes an event standby state (for example, the user performs a button input through the operation unit 13, etc.) (S104). Also, when the slide show is automatically reproduced, as shown in FIG. 11( a ), the slide show execution control unit 141 displays an automatic film advance icon 1101 indicating this, according to the control script. Alternatively, the slideshow execution control unit 141 may display the photo title 1102, the operation method screen 1103, and the like in accordance with the control script. the

例如,初次描绘时(图11(a)),通过用户操作,按下设置于操作部13的黄色按钮(未图示)或确定按钮(未图示)时,该信号通过操作受理部21传输到事件处理部11,事件处理部11检测到事件(S104中的“是”)。  For example, when drawing for the first time ( FIG. 11( a )), when the user operates and presses the yellow button (not shown) or the OK button (not shown) provided on the operation unit 13, the signal is transmitted through the operation accepting unit 21. Going to the event processing section 11, the event processing section 11 detects the event (YES in S104). the

根据事件处理部11的判断,知道是按下了黄色按钮时(S105中的y),控制脚本执行部41就执行与之对应的处理。  When it is known from the judgment of the event processing unit 11 that the yellow button has been pressed (y in S105 ), the control script execution unit 41 executes the corresponding processing. the

这里,操作部13的黄色按钮是为了显示操作菜单1104(图11(b))而对电视机1进行操作用的按钮,另外,当在操作菜单1104显示的状态下按下时,是关闭操作菜单1104以返回到图11(a)的状态而对电视机1进行操作用的按钮。这样,设置于操作部13的各个按钮与它被按下时电视机1要执行的功能的对应关系,在控制脚本包含的操作内容定义脚本中进行描述。  Here, the yellow button of the operation unit 13 is a button for operating the TV 1 to display the operation menu 1104 ( FIG. 11( b )), and when pressed while the operation menu 1104 is displayed, it is a closing operation. The menu 1104 is a button for operating the television 1 to return to the state shown in FIG. 11( a ). In this way, the correspondence between each button provided on the operation unit 13 and the function to be executed by the television 1 when the button is pressed is described in the operation content definition script included in the control script. the

若控制脚本执行部41受理来自事件处理部11的通知,则按下黄色按钮时,对是否打开了操作菜单1104进行判定(S106)。  When the control script execution unit 41 receives the notification from the event processing unit 11, it is determined whether or not the operation menu 1104 is opened when the yellow button is pressed (S106). the

然后,当判定为未打开菜单1104时(S106中的“否”),操作菜单控制部142按照上述幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据中包含的控制脚本110的操作菜单确定脚本122,显示与该显示用数据对应的内容的操作菜单1104(S107)。具体而言,控制基本功能执行部42,将要显示的数据传输到显示控制部24。从而,显示部15的显示画面从图11(a)转移到图11(b)。  Then, when it is determined that the menu 1104 has not been opened ("No" in S106), the operation menu control unit 142 displays the corresponding menu 1104 according to the operation menu determination script 122 of the control script 110 included in the data for displaying the slide show display screen. The operation menu 1104 of the content corresponding to the data is displayed (S107). Specifically, the basic function execution unit 42 is controlled to transfer data to be displayed to the display control unit 24 . Accordingly, the display screen of the display unit 15 shifts from FIG. 11( a ) to FIG. 11( b ). the

另一方面,当判定为操作菜单1104正在显示时(S106中的“是”),操作菜单控制部142按照控制脚本110,关闭正在显示的操作菜单1104。从而,显示部15的显示画面从图11(b)转移到图11(a)。  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation menu 1104 is being displayed (YES in S106 ), the operation menu control unit 142 closes the displayed operation menu 1104 in accordance with the control script 110 . Accordingly, the display screen of the display unit 15 shifts from FIG. 11( b ) to FIG. 11( a ). the

在S105中,根据事件处理部11的判断,知道是按下了确定按钮时(S105中的k),控制脚本执行部41就执行与之对应的处理。  In S105, when it is known from the judgment of the event processing unit 11 that the OK button has been pressed (k in S105), the control script execution unit 41 executes the corresponding processing. the

这里,操作部13的确定按钮是在选择了上述操作菜单1104中的某一个操作选项的状态下按下时,若该操作选项具有子操作菜单,则是对电视机1进行操作以打开子操作菜单用的按钮。例如,如图11(b)和图11(c)所示,若在表示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105被选择的状态下按下确定按钮,则操作菜单控制部142就显示子操作菜单1106。或者,若所选择的操作选项无子操作菜单(若未在操作菜单确定脚本中进行定义),则在该操作选项被选择时,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本110,执行与该操作选项对应的处理。此外,在一个菜单都未打开的状态下按下确定按钮时,幻灯片放映执行控制部141就进行幻灯片放映执行处理。  Here, when the OK button of the operation unit 13 is pressed in the state where one of the operation options in the above-mentioned operation menu 1104 is selected, if the operation option has a sub-operation menu, the TV 1 is operated to open the sub-operation menu. Buttons for menus. For example, as shown in Fig. 11(b) and Fig. 11(c), if the OK button is pressed in the state where the operation option 1105 representing "photo rotation" is selected, the operation menu control section 142 will display the sub-operation menu 1106 . Or, if the selected operation option has no sub-operation menu (if not defined in the operation menu determination script), then when the operation option is selected, the control script execution unit 41 executes the sub-operation menu corresponding to the operation option according to the control script 110 . processing. In addition, when the OK button is pressed while none of the menus are open, the slideshow execution control unit 141 performs slideshow execution processing. the

更详细的情况如下文所述。  More details are described below. the

与S106相同,若控制脚本执行部41受理来自事件处理部11的通知,则按下确定按钮时,对是否打开了操作菜单1104进行判定(S109)。  Similar to S106, when the control script execution unit 41 receives the notification from the event processing unit 11, it is determined whether or not the operation menu 1104 is opened when the OK button is pressed (S109). the

然后,在判定为未打开操作菜单1104时(S109中的“否”),幻灯片放映执行控制部141就进行幻灯片放映执行处理(S110)。具体而言,在图11(a)的显示画面正在显示的状态下按下确定按钮时,幻灯片放映执行控制部141显示正在该显示画面显示的照片的下一显示顺序的照片的幻灯片。  Then, when it is determined that the operation menu 1104 has not been opened ("No" in S109), the slide show execution control unit 141 performs a slide show execution process (S110). Specifically, when the OK button is pressed while the display screen of FIG. 11( a ) is being displayed, the slide show execution control unit 141 displays a slide show of photos in the display order next to the photo being displayed on the display screen. the

另一方面,当判定为操作菜单1104打开时(S109中的“是”),按下确定按钮时,控制脚本执行部41判断聚焦到打开的操作菜单1104的操作选项中的哪一项(S111)。所谓聚焦状态,意味着利用光标选择操作选项的状态,本实施方式中,为了与其它的操作选项区别,仅仅所选择的操作选项的显示区域用别的颜色显示(例如,表示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105)。  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation menu 1104 is open (YES in S109), when the OK button is pressed, the control script execution unit 41 determines which of the operation options of the open operation menu 1104 is focused on (S111 ). The so-called focus state means the state of using the cursor to select an operation option. In this embodiment, in order to distinguish it from other operation options, only the display area of the selected operation option is displayed in another color (for example, the display area representing "photo rotation" Action option 1105). the

如图11(b)所示,在聚焦到表示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105的状态下判断为确定按钮被按下时(S112中的“是”),则控制脚本执行部41接着判断子操作菜单的开闭和子操作选项中的聚焦位置(S113)。  As shown in FIG. 11( b ), when it is determined that the OK button is pressed in the state of focusing on the operation option 1105 representing "photo rotation" ("Yes" in S112), the control script execution unit 41 then proceeds to determine the Opening and closing of the operation menu and the focus position in sub-operation options (S113). the

这里,当判断为子操作菜单1106被关闭时(S113中的A),操作菜单控制部142按照操作菜单确定脚本122,显示与表示“照片旋转”的操作选项对应的子操作菜单(S114)。图11(c)表示显示了操作选项1105的子操作菜单1106的例子。  Here, when it is determined that the sub-operation menu 1106 is closed (A in S113), the operation menu control unit 142 displays the sub-operation menu corresponding to the operation option indicating "photo rotation" according to the operation menu determination script 122 (S114). FIG. 11(c) shows an example of a sub-operation menu 1106 in which operation options 1105 are displayed. the

另一方面,当判断为聚焦到操作选项1105的子操作菜单1106中的某一个操作选项(例如图11(C)所示的“左转90度”或“右转90度”等时(S113中的B),照片旋转控制部143按照操作功能定义脚本132控制基本功能执行部42,执行照片旋转处理(S115)。例如,在聚焦到“左转90度”的子操作选项的状态下(图11(c))按下确定按钮时,照片旋转控制部143对图11(c)中显示的横向照片1107执行左转90度的处理。由此,如图11(d)所示,照片作为左转90度后的纵向照片1108而显示于显示部15。  On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus is on a certain operation option in the sub-operation menu 1106 of the operation option 1105 (for example, "turn left 90 degrees" or "turn right 90 degrees" shown in FIG. 11(C) (S113 In B), the photo rotation control part 143 controls the basic function execution part 42 according to the operation function definition script 132, and executes photo rotation processing (S115). For example, in the state of focusing on the sub-operation option of "turn left 90 degrees" ( Fig. 11 (c)) when the confirm button is pressed, the photo rotation control part 143 carries out the processing of turning left 90 degrees to the horizontal photo 1107 shown in Fig. 11 (c). Thus, as shown in Fig. 11 (d), the photo It is displayed on the display unit 15 as a vertical photo 1108 turned 90 degrees to the left.

另一方面,当判断为所聚焦的是操作选项1105以外的其它操作选项时,当该操作选项具有子操作菜单且子操作菜单被关闭时(S112中的“否”且S116中的A),操作菜单控制部142显示上述其它操作选项的子操作菜单(S117)。另一方面,当上述其它操作选项的子操作菜单被打开且聚焦到某一个子操作选项时(S112中的“是”且S116中的B),控制脚本执行部41按照操作功能定义脚本132,执行与该子操作选项对应的功能(S118)。  On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus is on an operation option other than the operation option 1105, when the operation option has a sub-operation menu and the sub-operation menu is closed ("No" in S112 and A in S116), The operation menu control unit 142 displays a sub-operation menu of the above-mentioned other operation options (S117). On the other hand, when the sub-operation menu of the above-mentioned other operation options is opened and focused on a certain sub-operation option ("Yes" in S112 and B in S116), the control script execution unit 41 defines the script 132 according to the operation function, Execute the function corresponding to the sub-operation option (S118). the

在S116中,当操作选项是不具有子操作菜单的选项时,控制脚本执行部41按照操作功能定义脚本132,执行与该操作选项对应的功能。  In S116 , when the operation option is an option without a sub-operation menu, the control script execution unit 41 executes the function corresponding to the operation option according to the operation function definition script 132 . the

此外,在S115的照片旋转处理后显示旋转后的照片时,若“照片旋转处理后关闭操作菜单”的脚本包含在控制脚本中,则如图11(d)所示,照片旋转控制部143在关闭操作菜单的状态下,显示旋转后的照片。当不包含上述“关闭操作菜单”的脚本时,如图11(e)所示,照片旋转控制部143在保持操作菜单打开的状态下,显示旋转后的照片。  In addition, when displaying the rotated photo after the photo rotation processing in S115, if the script "close the operation menu after photo rotation processing" is included in the control script, then as shown in FIG. 11(d), the photo rotation control unit 143 When the operation menu is closed, the rotated photo is displayed. When the above-mentioned "close operation menu" script is not included, as shown in FIG. 11( e ), the photo rotation control unit 143 displays the rotated photo while keeping the operation menu open. the

图12~图15是表示控制脚本执行部41的各部分在执行上述显示用数据执行处理时所参照的控制脚本的具体示例图。  FIGS. 12 to 15 are diagrams showing specific examples of control scripts that each part of the control script execution unit 41 refers to when executing the above-mentioned display data execution processing. the

图12所示的脚本132a包含在图3所示的操作功能定义脚本132中。在脚本132a中,描述了根据黄色按钮被按下时的显示状态要执行哪种功能。控制脚本执行部41(操作菜单控制部142)按照脚本132a,可以执行上述S106~S108的处理。  The script 132a shown in FIG. 12 is included in the operation function definition script 132 shown in FIG. 3 . In the script 132a, it is described which function is to be executed according to the display state when the yellow button is pressed. The control script execution unit 41 (operation menu control unit 142 ) can execute the above-mentioned processes of S106 to S108 according to the script 132 a. the

图12所示的脚本132b包含在图3所示的操作功能定义脚本132中。在脚本132b中,描述了根据黄色按钮被按下时的主操作菜单和子操作菜单(图11(c)的子操作菜单1106)的显示状态要执行哪种功能。更具体地说,描述为:按下确定按钮时,若子操作菜单未被打开,则打开子操作菜单,若子操作菜单被打开,则将该子操作菜单切换到不显示,并执行该子操作选项的功能。  The script 132b shown in FIG. 12 is included in the operation function definition script 132 shown in FIG. 3 . In the script 132b, it is described which function is to be executed according to the display state of the main operation menu and the sub-operation menu (sub-operation menu 1106 of FIG. 11(c) ) when the yellow button is pressed. More specifically, the description is: when the OK button is pressed, if the sub-operation menu is not opened, then open the sub-operation menu, if the sub-operation menu is opened, then switch the sub-operation menu to non-display, and execute the sub-operation option function. the

例如,脚本132d中定义了通过按下确定按钮选择照片旋转的子操作选项(子操 作菜单1106内)中的某一项时照片旋转控制部143要执行的照片旋转的功能。  For example, the script 132d defines the photo rotation function to be executed by the photo rotation control unit 143 when one of the photo rotation sub-operation options (in the sub-operation menu 1106) is selected by pressing the OK button. the

控制脚本执行部41(操作菜单控制部142、照片旋转控制部143)按照脚本132b,可以执行上述S113~S118的处理。  The control script execution unit 41 (the operation menu control unit 142 and the photo rotation control unit 143 ) can execute the above-mentioned processing of S113 to S118 according to the script 132b. the

图13所示的脚本122a包含在图3所示的操作菜单确定脚本122中。按照脚本122a的描述,根据当前正在显示的显示画面的内容,将要显示的主操作菜单1104(例如图11(b))进行确定。上述脚本132a(图12)中定义了如下功能:即,按下黄色按钮时,显示由脚本122a所确定的操作菜单(g id=“menu”)。  The script 122a shown in FIG. 13 is included in the operation menu determination script 122 shown in FIG. 3 . According to the description of the script 122a, the main operation menu 1104 to be displayed (for example, FIG. 11(b)) is determined according to the content of the currently displayed display screen. The following function is defined in the above-mentioned script 132a (Fig. 12): that is, when the yellow button is pressed, the operation menu (g id="menu") determined by the script 122a is displayed. the

图13所示的脚本122b包含在图3所示的操作菜单确定脚本122中。脚本122b对表示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105的子操作菜单1106进行确定。操作功能定义脚本132中定义了如下功能:即,在显示操作选项1105的状态下按下确定按钮时,显示由脚本122b确定的子操作菜单(g id=“submenu2”)。  The script 122b shown in FIG. 13 is included in the operation menu determination script 122 shown in FIG. 3 . The script 122b determines the sub-operation menu 1106 of the operation option 1105 indicating "photo rotation". The following function is defined in the operation function definition script 132: that is, when the OK button is pressed in the state where the operation option 1105 is displayed, the sub-operation menu (g id="submenu2") determined by the script 122b is displayed. the

这里,当图11(c)所示的横向照片1107不是应旋转的情况时,不希望电视机1(操作菜单控制部142)像操作菜单1104那样显示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105。作为不要进行旋转的情况,假设是例如由于电视机1自身不具有旋转照片的功能的情况纵向显示照片不合适、或者横向照片1107的状态已经适合照片的取向等理由,而使得相册作者(照片持有者)U不希望将其旋转的情况。  Here, when the landscape photo 1107 shown in FIG. As the case where rotation is not required, it is assumed that the album author (the photo holder) is for reasons such as that it is inappropriate to display the photo vertically because the television 1 itself does not have the function of rotating the photo, or that the state of the horizontal photo 1107 is already suitable for the orientation of the photo. Own) U don't want to rotate it. the

在这种情况下,只要根据作为显示对象物的照片(显示用数据的内容),将最佳操作菜单确定脚本122提供给电视机1即可。  In this case, it is only necessary to provide the optimal operation menu determination script 122 to the television 1 based on the photograph (content of the display data) as the object to be displayed. the

存在上述那样的情况时,对于包含上述照片的显示用数据,希望电视机1不执行“照片旋转”的功能。这种情况下,显示用数据生成装置2可以提供这样的控制脚本,该控制脚本包含图14所示的脚本122a’,以代替图13所示的脚本122a。这时,只要在该控制脚本的操作功能定义脚本132中不包含涉及照片旋转功能的脚本即可。图14所示的脚本122a’与脚本122a相比,对不包含表示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105的操作菜单1104(图16)进行确定。若根据这样的脚本,则如图16所示,操作菜单控制部142可以将操作菜单1104显示于显示部15。  In such a case, it is desirable that the television 1 not execute the function of "photo rotation" with respect to the display data including the above-mentioned photo. In this case, the display data generation device 2 may provide a control script including the script 122a' shown in FIG. 14 instead of the script 122a shown in FIG. 13 . In this case, the operation function definition script 132 of the control script does not need to include a script related to the photo rotation function. Script 122a' shown in FIG. 14 determines that operation menu 1104 (FIG. 16) does not include operation option 1105 indicating "photo rotation" compared to script 122a. According to such a script, as shown in FIG. 16 , the operation menu control unit 142 can display the operation menu 1104 on the display unit 15 . the

由以上可知,根据显示用数据的内容将最佳控制脚本提供给电视机1,由此,电视机1可以按照显示用数据,始终显示最佳的操作菜单。  As can be seen from the above, the optimal control script is provided to the television 1 according to the content of the display data, whereby the television 1 can always display an optimal operation menu according to the display data. the

而且,通过适当变更控制脚本,也能够控制电视机1,使得操作菜单1104中仅确定的操作选项与子操作菜单同样地以二级显示。例如,虽然能够进行照片旋转,但在提供照片的一侧,并不希望积极地使用照片旋转功能。在这种情况下,只要将操作菜单确定脚本122(图17(a))和操作功能定义脚本132提供给电视机1,使得在 操作菜单1104中设置“其它”的操作选项,仅在该选项被选择时,与子操作菜单同样地以二级显示操作选项1105即可。  Furthermore, by appropriately changing the control script, it is also possible to control the television 1 so that only the operation options specified in the operation menu 1104 are displayed in two levels, similarly to the sub-operation menu. For example, although photo rotation can be performed, it is not desirable to actively use the photo rotation function on the side that provides the photo. In this case, as long as the operation menu determination script 122 (Fig. 17(a)) and the operation function definition script 132 are provided to the TV set 1, the operation option of "other" is set in the operation menu 1104, only in this option When selected, it is only necessary to display the operation option 1105 in the second level, similar to the sub-operation menu. the

通过将上述操作菜单确定脚本122和操作功能定义脚本132提供给电视机1,如图17(b)所示,操作菜单控制部142能够与子操作菜单同样地以二级显示操作选项1105。又,在上述操作选项1105被选择时,照片旋转控制部143能够执行照片旋转处理。  By providing the above-mentioned operation menu specifying script 122 and operation function defining script 132 to the television 1, as shown in FIG. Also, when the above-mentioned operation option 1105 is selected, the photo rotation control unit 143 can execute photo rotation processing. the

或者,也可以采用以下结构:即,不管是否能旋转照片,而向电视机1提供相同的显示操作菜单1104用的控制脚本时,控制脚本执行部41根据控制脚本,对是否能旋转照片进行判定,确定是否显示“照片旋转”的子操作菜单1106。  Alternatively, the following configuration may be adopted: that is, when the same control script for displaying the operation menu 1104 is provided to the television 1 regardless of whether the picture can be rotated, the control script execution unit 41 judges whether the picture can be rotated according to the control script. , to determine whether to display the sub-operation menu 1106 of "photo rotation". the

例如,显示用数据生成装置2对电视机1提供图15所示的脚本132b’,以代替图12的脚本132b。从而,电视机1按照脚本1230进行工作,该脚本1230描述为仅在能够进行照片旋转的情况下执行之后的处理。即,仅当控制脚本执行部41判定为是可应用旋转处理的照片时,操作菜单控制部142进行由图13的脚本122b所确定的显示“照片旋转”的子操作菜单1106的处理。  For example, the display data generating device 2 provides the television 1 with a script 132b' shown in FIG. 15 instead of the script 132b of FIG. 12 . Accordingly, the television 1 operates according to the script 1230 described in the script 1230 to execute subsequent processing only when photo rotation is possible. That is, the operation menu control unit 142 executes the process of displaying the sub-operation menu 1106 of “photo rotation” specified by the script 122b of FIG. the

由以上可知,通过将图15所示的脚本132b’提供给电视机1,电视机1能够仅在照片可旋转的情况下才显示子操作菜单1106。  As can be seen from the above, by providing the script 132b' shown in FIG. 15 to the TV 1, the TV 1 can display the sub-operation menu 1106 only when the photo is rotatable. the

此外,图10所示的S110中,幻灯片放映执行控制部141执行的幻灯片放映执行处理,能够由图12所示的脚本132c进行控制。  In addition, in S110 shown in FIG. 10 , the slide show execution process executed by the slide show execution control unit 141 can be controlled by the script 132 c shown in FIG. 12 . the

在图11(b)所示的操作菜单1104未打开的状态下,用户按下操作部13的确定按钮时,幻灯片放映执行控制部141还对幻灯片放映是否正在自动再现中进行判定。  When the user presses the OK button of the operation unit 13 while the operation menu 1104 shown in FIG. the

幻灯片放映执行控制部141在其自身为幻灯片放映自动再现中的情况下按下确定按钮时,不显示自动进片中的图标1101,而是显示进片停止中的图标1109,并且停止幻灯片放映的自动再现。另一方面,在幻灯片放映再现停止中的情况下按下确定按钮时,不显示进片停止中的图标1109,而是显示自动进片中的图标1101,重新开始幻灯片放映的自动再现。如上所述,通过将脚本132c提供给电视机1,在操作菜单未打开的状态下,按下确定按钮,可以实现控制幻灯片放映的自动再现的电视机1。  When the slide show execution control unit 141 presses the OK button while the slide show itself is being played back automatically, instead of displaying the icon 1101 showing that the film is progressing automatically, it displays the icon 1109 that is stopping the film progressing, and stops the slide show. Automatic playback of movie shows. On the other hand, when the OK button is pressed while playback of the slide show is stopped, instead of the icon 1109 showing that the film is being advanced, the icon 1101 being automatically advanced is displayed, and the automatic playback of the slide show is restarted. As described above, by providing the script 132c to the television 1 and pressing the OK button while the operation menu is not open, the television 1 that controls the automatic reproduction of the slide show can be realized. the

接着,详细说明按照电视机1的请求生成包含上述那样的控制脚本的显示用数据并提供给电视机1的显示用数据生成装置2。  Next, a detailed description will be given of the display data generation device 2 that generates display data including the above-mentioned control script in response to a request from the television 1 and supplies it to the television 1 . the

显示用数据生成装置的结构1-详细情况  Structure of display data generating device 1-details

图18是表示本实施方式的显示用数据生成装置2的主要部分结构的框图。如图18所示,显示用数据生成装置2的请求消息解析部70还包括:显示对象ID获取部71;显示画面ID获取部72;以及相关信息获取部73。控制脚本生成部80还包括:显示对象属性判定部81;图像分析部82;操作选项选择部83;操作功能定义生成部(控制脚本生成单元)84;操作菜单生成部(控制脚本生成单元)85;以及脚本合成部86。存储部90在图4结构的基础上,还包括选项选择规则存储部93和操作功能存储部94。  FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the main configuration of the display data generation device 2 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18 , the request message analysis unit 70 of the display data generation device 2 further includes: a display object ID acquisition unit 71 ; a display screen ID acquisition unit 72 ; and a related information acquisition unit 73 . The control script generating unit 80 further includes: a display object attribute determining unit 81; an image analyzing unit 82; an operation option selecting unit 83; an operation function definition generating unit (control script generating unit) 84; an operation menu generating unit (control script generating unit) 85 ; and the script synthesis unit 86 . The storage unit 90 further includes an option selection rule storage unit 93 and an operation function storage unit 94 in addition to the structure shown in FIG. 4 . the

网络相册系统100(图2)中的相册管理服务器3的网络相册DB8中,存储有与相册有关的相册信息(请求图像的属性信息)、相册中包含的照片的照片信息(请求图像的属性信息)、以及照片数据本体,可用相册ID唯一地识别相册、用相册ID与照片ID的组合唯一地识别照片那样进行存储。  In the network album DB8 of the album management server 3 in the network album system 100 (FIG. 2), the album information (attribute information of the requested image) related to the album, the photo information (attribute information of the requested image) of the photos contained in the album are stored. ), and the photo data body can be stored in such a way that an album can be uniquely identified by an album ID, and a photo can be uniquely identified by a combination of an album ID and a photo ID. the

显示用数据生成装置2能够根据需要,通过通信部63获取网络相册DB8中存储的信息。  The display data generating device 2 can acquire information stored in the web album DB 8 through the communication unit 63 as needed. the

请求消息解析部70的各部分接收到从电视机1接收的显示用数据请求消息6(图7)时,执行图5所示的请求消息解析处理(S4)。又,控制脚本生成部80的各部分利用模式数据选择部61在S5中所选择的模式数据,执行生成控制脚本用的控制脚本生成处理(S6)。  When each part of the request message analysis unit 70 receives the display data request message 6 ( FIG. 7 ) received from the television 1 , it executes the request message analysis process shown in FIG. 5 ( S4 ). Moreover, each part of the control script generation part 80 executes the control script generation process for generating a control script using the pattern data selected by the pattern data selection part 61 in S5 (S6). the

在以下的说明中,列举从电视机1接收请求如图7所示的幻灯片放映显示画面(的显示用数据)的显示用数据请求消息6的情况的例子,说明显示用数据生成装置2的结构。  In the following description, an example of the case where the television 1 receives a display data request message 6 requesting a slide show display screen (display data) as shown in FIG. structure. the

显示用数据生成装置2生成显示用数据7(图3),作为对显示用数据请求消息6(图7)的响应。具体而言,根据显示用数据请求消息6所请求的幻灯片放映显示画面的内容,生成操作菜单的画面(操作菜单确定脚本122(图3)),规定其各操作选项被选择时的电视机1的动作(生成操作功能定义脚本132)。  The display data generation means 2 generates display data 7 ( FIG. 3 ) as a response to the display data request message 6 ( FIG. 7 ). Specifically, based on the content of the slideshow display screen requested by the display data request message 6, an operation menu screen (operation menu determination script 122 (FIG. 3)) is generated, and the TV screen when each operation option is selected is specified. 1 (generate operation function definition script 132). the

请求消息解析部70的显示对象ID获取部71获取包含在显示用数据请求消息中的识别成为要显示对象的显示对象物的显示对象ID。在本实施方式中,获取例如包含在图7所示的显示用数据请求消息6中的相册ID和照片ID。从而,显示用数据生成装置2能够判断请求对哪一个相册的哪一张照片进行幻灯片显示用的显示画面。  The display object ID acquiring section 71 of the request message analyzing section 70 acquires a display object ID for identifying a display object to be displayed included in the display data request message. In this embodiment, for example, the album ID and photo ID included in the display data request message 6 shown in FIG. 7 are acquired. Accordingly, the display data generation device 2 can determine which photo in which album is requested to display the display screen for slideshow. the

显示画面ID获取部72获取包含在显示用数据请求消息中的表示显示画面类型的显示画面ID。如上所述,在本实施方式中,显示用数据生成装置2提供给电 视机1的显示画面类型存在多种。因此,显示用数据请求消息中包含表示电视机1请求哪种类型的显示画面的显示画面ID。通过显示画面ID获取部72获取包含在显示用数据请求消息中的显示画面ID,从而显示用数据生成装置2可以判断所请求的是哪种显示画面的显示用数据。  The display screen ID acquiring unit 72 acquires the display screen ID indicating the type of the display screen included in the display data request message. As described above, in this embodiment, there are various types of display screens provided by the display data generation device 2 to the television 1. Therefore, the display data request message includes a display screen ID indicating which type of display screen the television 1 requests. The display screen ID acquisition unit 72 acquires the display screen ID included in the display data request message, so that the display data generation device 2 can determine which display screen data is requested. the

此外,当显示用数据生成装置2中生成的显示画面只有一种时,也可以不具有显示画面ID获取部72。  In addition, when there is only one type of display screen generated in the display data generating device 2, the display screen ID acquisition unit 72 may not be provided. the

相关信息获取部73获取包含在显示用数据请求消息中的作为该消息的请求方的电视机1的相关信息。若利用图7的例子,则相关信息获取部73从显示用数据请求消息6获取电视机1的终端ID和规格信息(画面的像素数)。  The related information acquisition unit 73 acquires the related information of the television 1 that is the requester of the message included in the display data request message. Using the example in FIG. 7 , the related information acquisition unit 73 acquires the terminal ID and specification information (the number of pixels of the screen) of the television 1 from the display data request message 6 . the

但是,相关信息并不限于图7的例子。例如,也可以如图8的相关信息表所示,显示用数据请求消息6中包含与电视机1的用户有关的用户信息、电视机1的其它规格信息(画面尺寸、机型名称、软件版本信息等)、或电视机1中设定的设定信息,采用获取这些信息的结构。具体而言,上述相关信息表(图8)中存储的电视机1的机型名称和电视机1为了实现照片应用功能而安装的软件的版本信息,包含在图7所示的显示用数据请求消息6中,相关信息获取部73可以从显示用数据请求消息6获取请求方的电视机1的机型名称和软件版本信息。  However, related information is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 7 . For example, as shown in the related information table of FIG. 8, the display data request message 6 includes user information related to the user of the TV set 1, other specification information (screen size, model name, software version) of the TV set 1. information, etc.), or the setting information set in the television 1, adopts a structure to acquire these information. Specifically, the model name of the TV set 1 stored in the related information table (FIG. 8) and the version information of the software installed on the TV set 1 in order to realize the photo application function are included in the display data request shown in FIG. In the message 6 , the relevant information acquiring unit 73 can acquire the model name and software version information of the requesting television 1 from the display data request message 6 . the

显示用数据生成装置2将相关信息获取部73获取的各种相关信息,用作为依照电视机1的请求而生成最佳的显示用数据(控制脚本)用的判断材料。  The display data generating device 2 uses various related information acquired by the related information acquiring unit 73 as a judgment material for generating optimal display data (control script) according to the request of the television 1 . the

在本实施方式中,相关信息获取部73获取电视机1的画面像素数作为相关信息。从而,显示用数据生成装置2可以根据作为显示对象物所确定的照片的像素数或尺寸和电视机1的画面像素数,生成最佳的显示用数据(控制脚本)。  In the present embodiment, the related information acquiring unit 73 acquires the screen pixel count of the television 1 as related information. Therefore, the display data generation device 2 can generate optimal display data (control script) based on the number of pixels or the size of the photograph specified as the display object and the number of screen pixels of the television 1 . the

或者,当用户信息中包含用户的年龄信息、可提供的显示用数据随年龄而不同时,显示用数据生成装置2根据相关信息获取部73获取的年龄信息,可以选择显示用数据中包含的控制脚本和显示对象物。或者,当请求对可提供的年龄有限制的显示用数据时,显示用数据生成装置2在用户的年龄不满足条件的情况下,不生成所请求的显示用数据,而能够进行生成包含出错消息的显示用数据等的处理。  Or, when the user information includes the age information of the user and the available display data varies with age, the display data generating device 2 can select the control data contained in the display data according to the age information acquired by the related information acquisition part 73. Script and display objects. Alternatively, when requesting display data with a limit on the available age, the display data generating device 2 can generate an error message including an error message instead of generating the requested display data if the age of the user does not satisfy the condition. processing of display data, etc. the

此外,显示用数据生成装置2中,在生成显示用数据时但不利用上述相关信息的情况下,也可以不具有相关信息获取部73。  In addition, in the display data generating device 2 , when the above-mentioned related information is not used when generating the display data, the related information acquisition unit 73 may not be provided. the

模式数据选择部61如上所述,从模式数据存储部91选择用于生成所请求的显示用数据的最佳模式数据。在本实施方式中,根据显示画面ID获取部72获取的显示画面ID,选择作为该显示画面雏形的模式数据。  As described above, the pattern data selection unit 61 selects the optimum pattern data for generating the requested display data from the pattern data storage unit 91 . In the present embodiment, pattern data as a prototype of the display screen is selected based on the display screen ID acquired by the display screen ID acquisition unit 72 . the

图19是表示模式数据存储部91中存储的模式数据表的示例图。在图19所示的例子中,上述各种显示画面(单张显示画面、幻灯片放映显示画面、缩略图显示画面等)的多种显示画面雏形与显示画面ID相关联地存储。  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern data table stored in the pattern data storage unit 91 . In the example shown in FIG. 19 , various display screen prototypes of the above-mentioned various display screens (single-image display screen, slide show display screen, thumbnail display screen, etc.) are stored in association with display screen IDs. the

在图7所示的例子中,显示画面ID获取部72从显示用数据请求消息6获取显示画面ID揝cr_C。”因而,模式数据选择部61参照图19所示的模式数据存储部91,作为模式数据,选择显示画面ID“Scr_C”所确定的幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据生成用的模式数据。将模式数据选择部61所选择的模式数据的内容进行合成,而完成作为控制脚本。  In the example shown in FIG. 7 , the display screen ID acquiring unit 72 acquires the display screen ID “cr_C” from the display data request message 6 . Therefore, the pattern data selection unit 61 refers to the pattern data storage unit 91 shown in FIG. The content of the pattern data selected by the data selection unit 61 is synthesized and completed as a control script.

控制脚本生成部80利用模式数据选择部61所选择的模式数据,生成应包含于所请求的显示用数据中的控制脚本。  The control script generation unit 80 uses the pattern data selected by the pattern data selection unit 61 to generate a control script to be included in the requested display data. the

控制脚本生成部80的显示对象属性判定部81对显示对象ID获取部71所确定的显示对象物的属性进行判定。显示对象属性判定部81根据相册(照片)的相册ID(照片ID),从网络相册DB8(图2)获取相册(照片)的属性信息(相册信息/照片信息),判定该相册(照片)的属性。  The display object attribute determination unit 81 of the control script generation unit 80 determines the attribute of the display object specified by the display object ID acquisition unit 71 . Display object attribute judging section 81 acquires attribute information (album information/photo information) of an album (photo) from the network album DB 8 (FIG. Attributes. the

例如,显示对象属性判定部81能够判定作为显示对象物而确定的照片是否需要旋转功能、照片的像素数是否小于请求方的电视机1的像素数、是否要对照片加备注、是否要对照片加上著作权保护锁等。然而,并不限于上述例子,显示对象属性判定部81能够根据从电视机1接收的显示用数据请求消息中包含的相关信息、确定的相册的相册信息、照片的照片信息,对显示对象物的各种属性进行判定。  For example, the display object attribute determination unit 81 can determine whether the photo specified as the display object needs a rotation function, whether the number of pixels of the photo is smaller than the number of pixels of the TV set 1 of the requesting party, whether to add a note to the photo, whether to update the photo Plus copyright protection lock, etc. However, it is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and the display object attribute determination unit 81 can identify the display object according to the relevant information included in the display data request message received from the television 1, the album information of the specified album, and the photo information of the photo. Various attributes are judged. the

图像分析部82在显示对象物为图像数据(相册的照片等)时,分析该图像数据。  The image analysis unit 82 analyzes the image data when the display object is image data (photographs in an album, etc.). the

更具体地说,分析照片的每一个像素的颜色信息,确定照片的色调。如图11(b)、图11(c)所示,操作菜单1104与照片重叠显示。这时,最好是操作菜单1104的颜色比照片的色调更显眼,使得用户容易看到。从而,图像分析部82可以确定比照片的色调显眼的颜色作为操作菜单的颜色,由此来确定照片色调,输出到操作菜单生成部85。  More specifically, the color information of each pixel of the photo is analyzed to determine the color tone of the photo. As shown in FIG. 11( b ) and FIG. 11( c ), the operation menu 1104 is displayed superimposed on the photo. In this case, it is preferable that the color of the operation menu 1104 is more conspicuous than the tone of the photograph so that the user can easily see it. Therefore, the image analysis unit 82 can specify a color that stands out from the color tone of the photo as the color of the operation menu, thereby specifying the color tone of the photo, and outputting it to the operation menu generation unit 85 . the

又,图像分析部82也可以进行图像识别处理,识别照片中被拍摄物体的拍摄位置。然后,将该处理结果输出到操作菜单生成部85。由此,操作菜单生成部85能够确定操作菜单的显示位置,而不覆盖照片的被拍摄物体。  In addition, the image analysis unit 82 may perform image recognition processing to recognize the shooting position of the subject in the photo. Then, the processing result is output to the operation menu generation unit 85 . Accordingly, the operation menu generation unit 85 can determine the display position of the operation menu without covering the subject of the photo. the

图20是表示网络相册DB8中存储的相册信息表的一个示例图。在图20所示的例子中,相册信息对每一个相册都以与相册ID相关联的记录进行存储,形成表的构造。  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an album information table stored in the network album DB8. In the example shown in FIG. 20 , album information is stored as a record associated with an album ID for each album, forming a table structure. the

“相册ID”一栏表示识别相册用的相册ID。显示对象属性判定部81根据该相册ID,获取由显示对象ID获取部71确定的相册的相册信息。  The column of "Album ID" indicates an album ID for identifying an album. The display object attribute determination unit 81 acquires the album information of the album specified by the display object ID acquisition unit 71 based on the album ID. the

“相册作者”一栏表示制作相册的相册作者。“相册标题”一栏表示相册的标题。“相册备注”一栏表示相册作者赋予的对该相册的备注。“相册制作日期”一栏表示制作该相册(登录在相册管理服务器3中)的相册制作日期。这些相册基本信息是相册作者U通过PC4在相册管理服务器3中设定、登录的信息。  The column of "album author" indicates the album author who made the album. The "album title" column indicates the title of the album. The column of "Album Remarks" indicates the remarks on the album given by the author of the album. The column of "album creation date" indicates the album creation date when the album was created (registered in the album management server 3). The album basic information is the information set and registered by the album author U in the album management server 3 through the PC 4 . the

“照片张数”一栏表示该相册中包含的照片张数。“照片ID”一栏表示识别该相册中包含的照片用的照片ID。在本实施方式中,照片ID表示显示顺序。在以幻灯片放映或缩略图显示多张照片时,控制脚本生成部80生成布局定义脚本,使得按照上述显示顺序显示照片。“照片文件名”一栏表示照片的文件名。  The "Number of Photos" column indicates the number of photos contained in the album. The column of "photo ID" indicates a photo ID for identifying a photo included in the album. In the present embodiment, photo IDs represent display order. When displaying a plurality of photos in a slide show or as thumbnails, the control script generator 80 generates a layout definition script so that the photos are displayed in the display order described above. The "photo file name" column indicates the file name of the photo. the

此外,“声音文件名”和“效果ID”栏将在后文中阐述。  In addition, the columns of "sound file name" and "effect ID" will be described later. the

图21是表示网络相册DB8中存储的照片信息表的一个示例图。在图21中,作为照片信息表的一个例子,所示照片信息表是表示相册ID为_0125478225142584的相册(图_20)所包含的照片一览表。然而,网络相册DB8所存储的照片信息表并不仅仅是该表。即,网络相册DB8中,对图20的相册信息表所管理的每一个相册,都准备上述照片信息表。  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a photo information table stored in the network album DB8. In FIG. 21, as an example of the photo information table, the photo information table shows a list of photos included in the album (FIG. _20) whose album ID is _0125478225142584. However, the photo information table stored in the web album DB 8 is not limited to this table. That is, in the network album DB 8, the above-mentioned photo information table is prepared for each album managed by the album information table of FIG. 20 . the

显示对象属性判定部81和图像分析部82是根据显示对象ID获取部71获取的相册ID,参照与该相册相关联的照片信息表构成。  The display object attribute determination unit 81 and the image analysis unit 82 are configured by referring to the photo information table associated with the album based on the album ID acquired by the display object ID acquisition unit 71 . the

如图21所示,管理相册照片的照片信息表对每一张照片都存储一个记录,存储有:唯一地识别相册内照片用的照片ID(显示顺序);以及与该照片ID相关联的“照片文件名”、“横向像素数”、“纵向像素数”、“数据大小”、“照片标题”、“照片备注”、“旋转功能”、“著作权保护信息”、和照片数据本体。  As shown in Figure 21, the photo information table for managing album photos all stores a record for each photo, storing: the photo ID (display order) that uniquely identifies the photos in the album; and the " Photo file name", "horizontal pixel number", "vertical pixel number", "data size", "photo title", "photo note", "rotation function", "copyright protection information", and photo data body. the

“横向像素数”一栏表示照片的横向像素。“纵向像素数”一栏表示照片的纵向像素。“数据大小”一栏表示照片的数据大小。“照片标题”一栏表示相册作者对每张照片设定的照片标题。“照片备注”一栏表示相册作者对每张照片登录的对照片的备注。  The "horizontal pixels" column indicates the horizontal pixels of the photo. The column of "Vertical Pixels" indicates the vertical pixels of the photo. The "Data Size" column indicates the data size of the photo. The "photo title" column indicates the photo title set by the album author for each photo. The column of "Photo Remarks" indicates the remark on the photo registered by the album author for each photo. the

“旋转功能”一栏表示有无旋转功能的必要性。“旋转功能”为“要”的照片表示需要对照片进行旋转处理,“不要”的照片表示不需要对该照片进行旋转处理。关于旋转功能的要/不要的设定,只要在相册作者U将照片上传到相册管理服务器3时进行即可。相册作者U对于不要进行旋转的照片,可以将旋转功能设定为“不要”而上传照片。  The column of "rotation function" indicates whether or not the rotation function is necessary. A photo whose "rotation function" is "yes" means that the photo needs to be rotated, and a photo whose "rotation function" is "does not" means that the photo does not need to be rotated. The necessary/non-necessary setting of the rotation function may be performed when the album author U uploads the photo to the album management server 3 . Album creator U can set the rotation function to "do not" and upload photos that do not want to be rotated. the

此外,也可以设置表示照片的上下方向的“上下方向”一栏,来代替“旋转功能”一栏。从而,若照片实际的上下与照片的上下方向一致,则显示对象属性判定部81就可以判定为不需要旋转功能。  In addition, instead of the column of "rotation function", a column of "vertical direction" indicating the vertical direction of the photo may be provided. Therefore, if the actual up-and-down direction of the photo coincides with the up-and-down direction of the photo, the display object attribute determination unit 81 can determine that the rotation function is unnecessary. the

“著作权保护信息”一栏表示有无赋予照片的著作权保护信息。“著作权保护信息”为“有”的照片表示加上著作权保护锁,禁止印刷和复制等,“无”的照片表示可以自由地进行印刷和复制等。  The column of "copyright protection information" indicates whether there is copyright protection information assigned to the photograph. A photo with "Copyright protection information" as "Yes" means that a copyright protection lock is attached, and printing and copying are prohibited, and a photo with "No" means that printing and copying are free. the

上述相册信息(图20)和照片信息(图21)是在显示对象属性判定部81判定相册(照片)的属性时图像分析部82分析照片时根据需要而读出的。  The above album information ( FIG. 20 ) and photo information ( FIG. 21 ) are read as necessary when the image analysis unit 82 analyzes the photo when the display object attribute judging unit 81 judges the attribute of the album (photo). the

如上所述,显示对象属性判定部81、图像分析部82参照网络相册DB8,对确定作为显示对象数据的相册和照片的属性进行判定,并进行照片的图像分析,将其结果输出到操作选项选择部83、操作菜单生成部85。  As described above, the display target attribute judging unit 81 and the image analyzing unit 82 refer to the network album DB 8, judge the properties of the album and the photo that are the data to be displayed, perform image analysis of the photo, and output the result to the operation option selection part 83 and an operation menu generating part 85. the

此外,上述说明中,说明了相册信息和照片信息是由表格结构形成的,该表格结构具有多栏构成的记录,但并不限于此。只要适当构成相册(照片)信息,使其包含显示用数据生成装置2判定显示对象物属性所需的信息即可。  In addition, in the above description, it has been explained that the album information and the photo information are formed by a table structure, and the table structure has records composed of multiple columns, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The album (photograph) information may be appropriately structured so as to include information necessary for the display data generating device 2 to determine the attribute of the display object. the

又,上述说明中,采用了以下结构,即,显示对象属性判定部81根据照片信息的“旋转功能”而判定照片的旋转功能的必要性,但并不限于此。例如,也可以是图像分析部82利用图像解析算法确定照片的上下,判定其是否与实际照片数据的上下一致。若所确定的照片上下与实际照片的上下一致,则显示对象属性判定部81就判定该照片不需要旋转功能。  In addition, in the above description, the structure in which the display object attribute determination unit 81 determines the necessity of the rotation function of the photo based on the "rotation function" of the photo information is adopted, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the image analysis unit 82 may specify the top and bottom of the photo using an image analysis algorithm, and determine whether or not it matches the top and bottom of the actual photo data. If the specified top and bottom of the photo match the top and bottom of the actual photo, the display object attribute determination unit 81 determines that the rotation function is not required for the photo. the

操作选项选择部83对显示画面中显示的操作菜单所包含的操作选项进行选择。操作选项选择部83根据显示对象属性判定部81和图像分析部82输出的判定结果和分析结果,选择应包含在操作菜单中的操作选项(电视机1的功能)。从而,可以完成用于显示与显示用数据(显示画面)的内容对应的最佳操作菜单的控制脚本。又,上述控制脚本可以将该操作菜单中列出的操作选项的各种功能提供给电视机1。  The operation option selection unit 83 selects an operation option included in the operation menu displayed on the display screen. The operation option selection unit 83 selects operation options (functions of the television 1 ) to be included in the operation menu based on the determination and analysis results output by the display object attribute determination unit 81 and the image analysis unit 82 . Accordingly, a control script for displaying an optimal operation menu corresponding to the contents of the display data (display screen) can be completed. In addition, the above-mentioned control script can provide various functions of the operation options listed in the operation menu to the television 1 . the

操作选项选择部83参照选项选择规则存储部93中存储的选择规则,根据上述判定结果和分析结果,选择适合该显示画面的操作菜单中添加的操作选项。  The operation option selection unit 83 refers to the selection rule stored in the option selection rule storage unit 93 , and selects an operation option to be added to the operation menu on the display screen based on the determination result and the analysis result. the

图22是表示选项选择规则存储部93中存储的操作选项选择部83选择操作选项用的规则表的示例图。  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a rule table for selecting an operation option by the operation option selection unit 83 stored in the option selection rule storage unit 93 . the

如图22所示,在规则表中,预先列出了根据控制脚本的描述而能够提供给电视机1的各功能,将各功能以及与各功能有关的各种信息与功能ID(栏C1)相关联 地存储。  As shown in Fig. 22, in the rule table, each function that can be provided to the television 1 according to the description of the control script is listed in advance, and each function and various information related to each function and the function ID (column C1) stored in association. the

栏C2的“功能”表示提供给上述电视机1的功能的内容。  "Function" in the column C2 indicates the content of the functions provided to the above-mentioned television 1 . the

栏C3的“判定方法”表示对所请求的照片或显示用数据请求消息进行判定处理的顺序。这各个判定处理由显示对象属性判定部81(还有图像分析部82、操作选项选择部83等)执行。根据该判定结果,操作选项选择部83可以判断是否在操作菜单中添加功能操作选项。  The "judgment method" in the column C3 indicates the procedure of judging the requested photograph or display data request message. These respective determination processes are executed by the display object attribute determination section 81 (also the image analysis section 82, the operation option selection section 83, and the like). Based on the determination result, the operation option selection unit 83 can determine whether to add a function operation option to the operation menu. the

栏C4的“选择规则”表示根据栏C3所示的判定方法产生的判定结果操作选项选择部83确定是否在操作菜单(或子操作菜单)中添加该功能的操作选项用的规则。栏C4中,对栏C41的每一个判定结果(搃f),都确定了确定操作选项选择部83应采取的动作的选择动作(搕hen)(栏擟42)。  "Selection rule" in column C4 indicates a rule for the operation option selection unit 83 to determine whether to add the operation option of the function to the operation menu (or sub-operation menu) based on the judgment result generated by the judgment method shown in column C3. In the column C4, for each determination result (搃f) in the column C41, a selection action (搕hen) for specifying an action to be taken by the operation option selection unit 83 is specified (column 42). the

如上所述,操作选项选择部83按照栏C4的“选择规则”,根据显示对象属性判定部81的判定结果,选择应添加的操作选项。  As described above, the operation option selection unit 83 selects the operation option to be added based on the determination result of the display object attribute determination unit 81 according to the “selection rule” in the column C4. the

此外,即使不进行任一种判定,对于所有显示用数据共同的应始终提供的功能(例如功能5~7),不需要栏C3和栏C41的信息。在本实施方式中,对于功能5~7,规定为“始终在操作菜单中添加”的选择规则  In addition, even if neither judgment is performed, the information in the column C3 and the column C41 is unnecessary for the functions (for example, functions 5 to 7) that are common to all display data and should always be provided. In this embodiment, for functions 5 to 7, it is specified as the selection rule of "always add in the operation menu"

操作选项选择部83的选择结果(例如,操作选项选择部83选择的功能的功能ID)被传输到操作功能定义生成部84和操作菜单生成部85。  The selection result by the operation option selection section 83 (for example, the function ID of the function selected by the operation option selection section 83 ) is transmitted to the operation function definition generation section 84 and the operation menu generation section 85 . the

操作功能定义生成部84根据操作选项选择部83选择的功能ID,从操作功能存储部94提取使电视机1执行该功能用的操作功能定义脚本132(图3)即内容,并嵌入到模式数据中。  Based on the function ID selected by the operation option selection unit 83, the operation function definition generating unit 84 extracts from the operation function storage unit 94 the content of the operation function definition script 132 (FIG. 3 ) for the television 1 to execute the function, and embeds it in the pattern data. middle. the

操作菜单生成部85根据操作选项选择部83选择的功能ID,生成包含该功能的操作选项的操作菜单(操作菜单确定脚本122(图3))。具体而言,根据功能ID,从操作功能存储部94提取操作选项名(图11(b)的操作菜单1104中表示各操作选项的文本数据(内容)),并嵌入到模式数据中。  Based on the function ID selected by the operation option selection unit 83 , the operation menu generating unit 85 generates an operation menu (operation menu specifying script 122 ( FIG. 3 )) including the operation options of the function. Specifically, the operation option name (text data (contents) indicating each operation option in the operation menu 1104 of FIG. 11( b )) is extracted from the operation function storage unit 94 based on the function ID, and embedded in the pattern data. the

操作菜单生成部85除嵌入上述操作选项名(内容)之外,在操作选项选择部83确定应添加的操作选项时,计算出显示各操作选项的显示位置和显示尺寸(起点X和Y坐标、宽度、高度(内容)),并嵌入到模式数据中。  In addition to embedding the above-mentioned operation option names (contents), the operation menu generator 85 calculates the display position and display size (start point X and Y coordinates, width, height(content)), and embedded in the schema data. the

此外,如上所述,操作菜单生成部85也可以根据图像分析部82的分析结果,确定操作菜单的显示颜色或确定操作菜单的显示位置。  In addition, as described above, the operation menu generation unit 85 may determine the display color of the operation menu or the display position of the operation menu based on the analysis result of the image analysis unit 82 . the

作为显示颜色的确定方法,设想例如照片整体色调中红色较强时选择蓝色系、或操作菜单重叠位置的色调中白色较强时选择黑色系等。  As a method of determining the display color, it is conceivable, for example, to select a blue color when the overall tone of the photo is relatively red, or to select a black color when the color tone of the superimposed position of the operation menu is relatively white. the

图23是表示操作功能存储部94中存储的功能表的示例图。功能表存储有应嵌入到模式数据中的内容的信息。  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a function table stored in the operation function storage unit 94 . The feature table stores information about what should be embedded in the schema data. the

如图23所示,在功能表中,预先列出了根据控制脚本的描述而能够提供给电视机1的各功能,将各功能以及与各功能有关的各种信息与功能ID相关联地存储。与规则表(图22)不同,对子操作菜单中的每一个子操作选项(功能1-1、1-2等)也相关联地存储各种信息。  As shown in FIG. 23 , in the function table, the functions that can be provided to the television 1 according to the description of the control script are listed in advance, and each function and various information related to each function are stored in association with the function ID. . Different from the rule table (FIG. 22), various information is stored in association with each sub-operation option (function 1-1, 1-2, etc.) in the sub-operation menu. the

栏C5的“操作选项名”表示图11(b)的操作菜单1104中表示各操作选项的文本数据。操作菜单生成部85将栏C5的文本数据(操作选项名)和各操作选项的显示位置、显示尺寸的信息嵌入到模式数据中,从而完成操作菜单确定脚本。  "Operation option name" in the column C5 indicates text data representing each operation option in the operation menu 1104 of FIG. 11( b ). The operation menu generation unit 85 embeds the text data (operation option name) of the column C5 and the display position and display size information of each operation option into the pattern data to complete the operation menu specifying script. the

栏C6的“脚本”表示对作为照片应用功能而使电视机1执行的预定处理进行定义的操作功能定义脚本。如图23所示,对每一种功能都准备了脚本。操作功能定义生成部84将栏C6的脚本嵌入到模式数据中,完成将对每一种功能准备的各个脚本汇总为一个的操作功能定义脚本。  "Script" in the column C6 indicates an operation function definition script that defines predetermined processing to be executed by the television 1 as a photo application function. As shown in Fig. 23, scripts are prepared for each function. The operation function definition generation part 84 embeds the script of the column C6 into pattern data, and completes each script prepared for each function into one operation function definition script. the

此外,图23中,为了易于理解,而用句子来表示栏C6的脚本,但操作菜单生成部85实际从栏C6提取出并嵌入到模式数据中的信息,如图12的脚本132b所示,是作为由XML描述的文本数据构成的。  In addition, in FIG. 23, the script of the column C6 is shown in sentences for easy understanding, but the operation menu generator 85 actually extracts from the column C6 and embeds the information in the pattern data, as shown in the script 132b of FIG. It is constituted as text data described by XML. the

此外,图23所示的功能表是说明用的一个例子,并不限定本发明。显示用数据生成装置2除了提供图23所示的功能以外,还能够将电视机1显示照片(第一功能)时执行的其它所有功能(第二功能)提供给电视机1。  In addition, the function table shown in FIG. 23 is an example for explanation, and does not limit this invention. In addition to the functions shown in FIG. 23 , the display data generating device 2 can provide the TV 1 with all other functions (second functions) executed when the TV 1 displays a picture (the first function). the

图24是表示模式数据的具体示例图。在图24中,仅表示图19所示的显示画面ID“Scr_C”的模式数据中的操作菜单生成部85生成的操作菜单确定脚本122的部分。脚本240是确定操作菜单用的脚本的雏形,脚本250是确定子操作菜单用的脚本的雏形。  Fig. 24 is a diagram showing a specific example of pattern data. In FIG. 24 , only a portion of the operation menu specifying script 122 generated by the operation menu generating unit 85 in the pattern data of the display screen ID “Scr_C” shown in FIG. 19 is shown. Script 240 is a prototype of a script for specifying an operation menu, and script 250 is a prototype of a script for specifying a sub-operation menu. the

图24中,用“_***_”表示操作菜单生成部_85嵌入内容的部位。具体而言,将替换位置241替换成操作选项名,将替换位置242替换成该操作选项的显示位置(起点的X和Y坐标),将替换位置243和244替换成操作菜单的显示尺寸(宽度和高度)。  In FIG. 24, "_***_" indicates the part where the operation menu generation part_85 embeds the content. Specifically, the replacement position 241 is replaced with the operation option name, the replacement position 242 is replaced with the display position of the operation option (X and Y coordinates of the starting point), and the replacement positions 243 and 244 are replaced with the display size (width) of the operation menu. and height). the

由此,当在所有的替换位置中嵌入操作功能定义生成部84所确定的实际值时,就完成控制脚本中的操作菜单确定脚本122(图13)。  In this way, when the actual values determined by the operation function definition generation unit 84 are embedded in all the replacement positions, the operation menu determination script 122 ( FIG. 13 ) in the control script is completed. the

图25和图26是表示操作功能定义生成部84生成的操作功能定义脚本的具体示例图。操作功能定义生成部84根据操作选项选择部83的选择结果,从操作功能 存储部94的功能表(栏C6)确定脚本,从而完成每一种功能的操作功能定义脚本。图25表示定义“旋转功能”的操作功能定义脚本的具体例子。按照图25的操作功能定义脚本,根据图12的脚本132d,执行照片旋转处理时,在该时刻正在显示的照片变成不显示,并计算旋转位置(算出变量rotateno)。然后,根据算出的旋转位置,显示旋转后的照片(图12的脚本132d),实现照片的旋转功能。图26表示定义“备注显示功能”的操作功能定义脚本的具体例子。操作功能定义生成部84将这各功能的脚本嵌入到模式数据中,从而完成一个操作功能定义脚本。  25 and 26 are diagrams showing specific examples of the operation function definition script generated by the operation function definition generation unit 84 . The operation function definition generation part 84 determines the script from the function table (column C6) of the operation function storage part 94 according to the selection result of the operation option selection part 83, thereby completing the operation function definition script of each function. Fig. 25 shows a specific example of an operation function definition script defining a "rotation function". According to the operation function definition script of FIG. 25, when the photo rotation process is executed according to the script 132d of FIG. 12, the photo currently being displayed at that time is not displayed, and the rotation position is calculated (the variable rotateno is calculated). Then, based on the calculated rotation position, the rotated photo is displayed (script 132d in FIG. 12 ), and the photo rotation function is realized. FIG. 26 shows a specific example of an operation function definition script defining a "remark display function". The operation function definition generating unit 84 embeds the scripts of these functions into the pattern data, thereby completing one operation function definition script. the

脚本合成部86将上述控制脚本生成部80的各部分生成的各种脚本(例如,操作菜单确定脚本122(图13)或操作功能定义脚本132(图12)等)合成为一个,生成控制脚本。控制脚本合成部86生成的控制脚本包括根据显示用数据请求消息请求的显示用数据的内容而将适当功能提供给电视机1的脚本。  The script synthesis unit 86 synthesizes various scripts (for example, the operation menu determination script 122 ( FIG. 13 ) or the operation function definition script 132 ( FIG. 12 ), etc.) generated by the above-mentioned control script generation unit 80 to generate a control script. . The control script generated by the control script synthesizing unit 86 includes a script for providing appropriate functions to the television 1 in accordance with the content of the display data requested by the display data request message. the

此外,上述例子中,仅说明了控制脚本生成部80的各部分根据模式数据生成操作菜单确定脚本122和操作功能定义脚本132,但并不限于此。未图示的控制脚本生成部80的各部分在模式数据选择部61所选择的模式数据中嵌入适当的内容,完成图3所示的显示对象物确定脚本121、属性信息确定脚本123、状态转移定义脚本131,并提供给脚本合成部86。  In addition, in the above-mentioned example, each part of the control script generation part 80 was only described as generating the operation menu determination script 122 and the operation function definition script 132 according to the pattern data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Each part of the control script generation part 80 (not shown) embeds appropriate content in the pattern data selected by the pattern data selection part 61, and completes the display object specification script 121, the attribute information specification script 123, and the state transition shown in FIG. The script 131 is defined and provided to the script synthesis unit 86 . the

脚本合成部86生成的控制脚本被提供给显示用数据生成部62。显示用数据生成部62对从脚本合成部86获取的控制脚本和显示对象物进行合成,从而生成显示用数据,并通过发送部63b提供给请求方的电视机1。  The control script generated by the script synthesis unit 86 is supplied to the display data generation unit 62 . The display data generation unit 62 synthesizes the control script acquired from the script synthesis unit 86 and the display object to generate display data, and supplies the data to the requesting television 1 through the transmission unit 63b. the

作为显示用数据生成部62确定的显示对象物,可列举有存储在网络相册DB8中的相册信息、照片信息、照片、以及存储在显示对象物存储部92中的其它图像(操作按钮的图像等在各显示画面中通用的图像)等。  Examples of the display objects specified by the display data generation unit 62 include album information, photo information, photographs stored in the network album DB 8, and other images (images of operation buttons, etc.) stored in the display object storage unit 92. common image on each display screen), etc. the

这样,接收上述显示用数据的电视机1就可以显示所请求的显示用画面(例如幻灯片放映显示画面),并且在该显示画面显示的过程中,能够按照该显示用数据的控制脚本,执行预定的照片应用功能。显示用数据生成装置2能够根据所请求的显示用数据的内容,对控制脚本进行适当变更,并提供给电视机1。由以上可知,能够根据显示的显示用数据的内容,容易地变更电视机1的功能。  In this way, the television set 1 receiving the above-mentioned display data can display the requested display screen (such as a slide show display screen), and during the display process of the display screen, it can execute according to the control script of the display data. Scheduled photo app functionality. The display data generating device 2 can appropriately change the control script according to the content of the requested display data, and provide it to the television 1 . As can be seen from the above, the functions of the television 1 can be easily changed according to the contents of the displayed display data. the

而且,当在网络相册系统100的服务中添加新的照片应用功能时,希望对市场上流通后的电视机1也能添加该功能。根据本发明的显示用数据生成装置2,只要通过重新生成控制脚本,并提供给电视机1,就能够容易地对电视机1添加新的功能。例如,在幻灯片放映中添加带有照片淡入等效果的功能时,只要在控制脚本中 描述上述效果的功能,并且在操作菜单确定脚本中添加对应的操作选项即可。  Furthermore, when a new photo application function is added to the service of the network album system 100, it is expected that the function can also be added to the TV 1 that has been distributed in the market. According to the display data generation device 2 of the present invention, a new function can be easily added to the television 1 simply by newly generating the control script and providing it to the television 1 . For example, when adding a photo fade-in function to a slide show, you only need to describe the function of the above effect in the control script, and add the corresponding operation option in the operation menu confirmation script. the

图27是详细表示显示用数据生成装置2中生成显示用数据的处理(图5的S3~S8)的流程的流程图。  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of processing (S3 to S8 in FIG. 5 ) for generating display data in the display data generating device 2 . the

当接收部63a从电视机1接收到显示用数据请求消息(图7)时(S201中的“是”),请求消息解析部70对所接收的显示用数据请求消息进行解析(S202)更具体地说,显示对象ID获取部71获取相册ID和照片ID,显示画面ID获取部72获取显示画面ID,相关信息获取部73获取规格信息(画面的像素数)。  When the receiving unit 63a receives the display data request message ( FIG. 7 ) from the television set 1 ("Yes" in S201), the request message analysis unit 70 analyzes the received display data request message (S202). In other words, the display object ID acquiring unit 71 acquires an album ID and a photo ID, the display screen ID acquiring unit 72 acquires a display screen ID, and the related information acquiring unit 73 acquires specification information (number of pixels of a screen). the

然后,模式数据选择部61根据上述显示画面ID,从模式数据存储部91的模式数据表中,选择用于生成所请求的显示用数据的最佳模式数据(S203)。这里,作为一个例子,选择生成幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据用的模式数据。  Then, the pattern data selection unit 61 selects optimum pattern data for generating the requested display data from the pattern data table in the pattern data storage unit 91 based on the display screen ID (S203). Here, as an example, pattern data for generating data for displaying a slide show display screen is selected. the

控制脚本生成部80依据所选择的模式数据,生成包含在显示用数据中的控制脚本。首先,控制脚本生成部80根据上述相册ID和照片ID,对作为存储在网络相册DB8中的显示对象的照片进行确定。  The control script generating unit 80 generates a control script included in the display data based on the selected pattern data. First, the control script generator 80 specifies a photo to be displayed stored in the network album DB 8 based on the album ID and the photo ID. the

显示对象属性判定部81从网络相册DB8,获取所确定的照片的照片信息(图21)(S204)。  The display object attribute determination unit 81 acquires photo information ( FIG. 21 ) of the identified photo from the Internet album DB 8 ( S204 ). the

然后,显示对象属性判定部81根据所取得的照片信息和包含在显示用数据请求消息中的规格信息,判定照片的属性(S205)。具体情况如下所述。  Then, the display object attribute determination unit 81 determines the attribute of the photograph based on the acquired photograph information and the specification information included in the display data request message (S205). The details are as follows. the

(1)判定照片的上下是否正确。  (1) Determine whether the top and bottom of the photo are correct. the

显示对象属性判定部81从图21所示的照片信息表,根据上述确定的照片的“上下方向”(或“旋转功能”)的值,判定照片的上下方向是否正确(要/不要旋转功能)。  The display object attribute judging section 81 judges whether the vertical direction of the photo is correct (whether or not the rotation function is required) from the photo information table shown in FIG. . the

(2)比较电视机1的画面像素数与照片的像素数。  (2) Compare the number of pixels of the screen of the television 1 with the number of pixels of the photo. the

显示对象属性判定部81将图7所示的电视机1的画面像素数(R5)与由图21所示的“横向像素”和“纵向像素”求出的照片像素数进行比较,判断照片像素数是否小于画面像素数。  The display object attribute determination unit 81 compares the number of screen pixels (R5) of the television 1 shown in FIG. 7 with the number of picture pixels obtained from the “horizontal pixels” and “vertical pixels” shown in FIG. Whether the number is less than the number of screen pixels. the

(3)判定照片有无备注。  (3) Determine whether the photo has a note. the

显示对象属性判定部81判定图21所示的“照片备注”中是否存储有备注。  The display object attribute determination unit 81 determines whether or not a comment is stored in the “photo comment” shown in FIG. 21 . the

(4)判定照片的著作权保护信息。  (4) Determine the copyright protection information of the photograph. the

显示对象属性判定部81根据图21所示的“著作权保护信息”,判定是否对照片加上著作权保护锁。  The display object attribute judging unit 81 judges whether or not to apply a copyright protection lock to the photograph based on the "copyright protection information" shown in FIG. 21 . the

然后,图像分析部82从网络相册DB8获取所确定的照片,并分析该照片(S206)。更具体地说,确定照片的色调,确定被拍摄物体的显示位置。  Then, the image analysis unit 82 acquires the identified photograph from the web album DB 8 and analyzes the photograph (S206). More specifically, the color tone of the photo is determined, and the display position of the object being photographed is determined. the

操作选项选择部83按照显示对象属性判定部81的判定结果,选择应在操作菜单中显示的操作选项(提供给电视机1的功能)(S207)。  The operation option selection unit 83 selects operation options (functions provided to the television 1 ) to be displayed in the operation menu according to the determination result of the display object attribute determination unit 81 ( S207 ). the

操作选项选择部83按照选择规则(栏C4),在判定为所确定的照片的上下不正确时,确定在操作菜单中添加旋转功能的操作选项及其子操作选项。只有在需要旋转功能的情况下,才可以向电视机1提供旋转功能。  The operation option selection unit 83 determines an operation option for adding a rotation function to the operation menu and its sub-operation options when it is determined that the top and bottom of the specified photo are incorrect according to the selection rule (column C4). The television 1 may be provided with a swivel function only if the swivel function is required. the

又,当判定为照片的像素数小于电视机1的画面像素数时,在操作菜单中添加画面尺寸切换功能(放大照片从而以电视机1的全屏尺寸显示的功能)的操作选项。只有在照片的尺寸小于电视机1的画面尺寸的情况下,才可以提供放大显示功能给电视机1。  Also, when it is determined that the number of pixels of the photo is smaller than the number of pixels of the screen of the TV 1, an operation option of a screen size switching function (a function of enlarging the photo and displaying it in the full screen size of the TV 1) is added to the operation menu. Only when the size of the photo is smaller than the screen size of the TV 1 , can the enlarged display function be provided to the TV 1 . the

当判定为照片带有备注时,添加备注显示功能的操作选项。当判定为照片未加上著作权保护锁时,在操作菜单中添加印刷功能的操作选项。从而,在显示画面中显示的照片加上著作权保护锁的情况下,能够控制电视机1,使其不可以进行印刷。  When it is determined that a photo has a comment, an operation option for the comment display function is added. When it is determined that the photo is not protected by a copyright protection lock, the operation option of the printing function is added to the operation menu. Therefore, when the copyright protection lock is attached to the photo displayed on the display screen, it is possible to control the television 1 so that it cannot be printed. the

此外,操作选项选择部83也可以是这样的结构,即,根据相关信息获取部73获取的相关信息的内容,选择应选择的操作选项。例如,在显示用数据请求消息中包含设定信息(设定是否始终显示图11(a)那样的操作方法画面1103的信息(图8的“操作方法显示”)),作为相关信息。  In addition, the operation option selection unit 83 may be configured to select an operation option to be selected based on the content of the related information acquired by the related information acquisition unit 73 . For example, setting information (information for setting whether to always display the operation method screen 1103 like FIG. 11( a ) (“operation method display” in FIG. 8 )) is included in the display data request message as related information. the

操作选项选择部83在判定上述设定信息“操作方法显示”的内容并设定操作方法显示为“否”时,确定不添加操作方法显示功能的操作选项(或作为操作选项“其它”的子操作选项而添加)。另一方面,当设定操作方法显示为“是”时,确定添加该操作选项。  When the operation option selection section 83 judges the content of the above-mentioned setting information "operation method display" and sets the operation method display to "No", it determines not to add the operation option of the operation method display function (or as a child of the operation option "other"). operation options). On the other hand, when the setting operation method is displayed as "Yes", it is determined to add the operation option. the

从而,只有在请求方的电视机1设定为“显示操作方法画面”时,才提供操作方法显示功能给电视机1。  Therefore, the operation method display function is provided to the television 1 only when the requester's television 1 is set to "display the operation method screen". the

操作选项选择部83在S207中,从选项选择规则存储部93选择应包含在操作菜单中的操作选项(功能)时,将所选择的功能的功能ID提供给操作功能定义生成部84和操作菜单生成部85。  When the operation option selection unit 83 selects an operation option (function) to be included in the operation menu from the option selection rule storage unit 93 in S207, it provides the function ID of the selected function to the operation function definition generation unit 84 and the operation menu. Generate part 85. the

然后,操作功能定义生成部84根据上述功能ID,从操作功能存储部94的功能表(图23)提取出栏C6的脚本(操作功能定义脚本),并嵌入到模式数据中,从而生成操作功能定义脚本(S208)。操作菜单生成部85根据上述功能ID,提取出栏C5的操作选项名,并嵌入到模式数据中,从而生成操作菜单确定脚本(S209)。这时,计算出操作菜单的显示尺寸和显示位置、显示颜色等,并将计算结果嵌入到模式数据中。  Then, the operation function definition generation part 84 extracts the script (operation function definition script) of column C6 from the function table (FIG. 23) of the operation function storage part 94 based on the above-mentioned function ID, and embeds it in the schema data, thereby generating the operation function definition. script (S208). The operation menu generation part 85 extracts the operation option name of column C5 based on the said function ID, embeds it in pattern data, and generates an operation menu determination script (S209). At this time, the display size, display position, display color, etc. of the operation menu are calculated, and the calculation results are embedded in the pattern data. the

脚本合成部86将控制脚本生成部80的各部分生成的各种脚本合成,生成控制脚本(S210)。  The script synthesizing unit 86 synthesizes various scripts generated by the respective sections of the control script generating unit 80 to generate a control script (S210). the

显示用数据生成部62确定所需要的所有显示对象物,并从网络相册DB8和/或显示对象物存储部92提取出来(S211),与上述生成的控制脚本进行合成,从而生成显示用数据(S212)。  The display data generating part 62 determines all required display objects, and extracts them from the Internet album DB 8 and/or the display object storage part 92 (S211), and synthesizes them with the control script generated above to generate the display data ( S212). the

发送部63b发送显示用数据生成部62生成的显示用数据,作为对电视机1的显示用数据请求消息的响应(S213)。  The transmission unit 63b transmits the display data generated by the display data generation unit 62 as a response to the display data request message of the television 1 (S213). the

图27的流程图中,叙述了生成包含在相册中的一张照片的幻灯片放映显示画面的情况,但在连续生成包含在相册中的所有照片的幻灯片放映显示画面时,也可以对每一张照片重复S204~S212的处理。  In the flowchart of FIG. 27 , the case of generating a slide show display screen for one photo included in an album is described, but when continuously generating slide show display screens for all photos included in an album, it is also possible to create a slide show display screen for each photo. The processing of S204 to S212 is repeated for one photo. the

根据上述结构和方法,显示用数据生成装置2根据电视机1所请求的显示用数据,生成最佳的操作菜单画面,并将该操作菜单的操作选项对应的功能与上述操作菜单画面的数据一起提供给电视机1。接收了上述显示用数据的电视机1可以显示所请求的显示用画面(例如幻灯片放映显示画面),并且在该显示画面显示的过程中,能够按照该显示用数据的控制脚本,执行预定的照片应用功能。  According to the above-mentioned structure and method, the display data generation device 2 generates the optimal operation menu screen according to the display data requested by the television 1, and uses the functions corresponding to the operation options of the operation menu together with the data on the above-mentioned operation menu screen. Provided to TV1. The television set 1 that has received the above-mentioned display data can display the requested display screen (for example, a slide show display screen), and during the display process of the display screen, can execute a predetermined program according to the control script of the display data. Photo app features. the

即,利用显示用数据的控制脚本,对于电视机1显示的每一个显示用数据(显示画面),都选定要显示的操作菜单的操作选项,从而能够使电视机1可执行的功能具有个性化。  That is, using the control script of the display data, for each display data (display screen) displayed on the television 1, the operation options of the operation menu to be displayed are selected, so that the functions executable by the television 1 can be individualized. change. the

按照上文中到目前为止所述的内容,通过变更控制脚本而提供给电视机1,能够容易地变更电视机1的功能。  By changing the control script and providing it to the television 1 as described so far, the functions of the television 1 can be easily changed. the

作为涉及操作菜单的变更,可列举:增加或减少操作菜单的操作选项;变更某一操作选项的子操作菜单的有无、子操作选项的数量;根据需要变更操作选项名;以及变更操作菜单的显示位置、显示颜色等。  Changes involving the operation menu include: increasing or reducing the operation options of the operation menu; changing the presence or absence of a sub-operation menu and the number of sub-operation options for a certain operation option; changing the name of the operation option as required; and changing the name of the operation menu Display position, display color, etc. the

又,电视机1按照控制脚本,可以根据自身的动作而动态地变更操作菜单。  In addition, the television 1 can dynamically change the operation menu according to its own actions according to the control script. the

例如,操作菜单控制部142(图9)也可以根据幻灯片放映执行控制部141的动作,动态地变更图11(c)所示的进片控制的操作选项1110的操作选项名(图11(c)的例子中的“自动进片开始/停止”)。  For example, the operation menu control unit 142 (FIG. 9) may dynamically change the operation option name of the operation option 1110 of the film advance control shown in FIG. "Automatic film advance start/stop" in the example of c)). the

在控制脚本中,预先准备了两种应在进片控制的操作选项1110的部分显示的操作选项名的文本数据。第一种是表示开始自动进片的功能的操作选项名为“自动进片开始”,第二种是表示停止自动进片的功能的操作选项名为“自动进片停止”。  In the control script, text data of two types of operation option names to be displayed in the operation option 1110 of the film advance control is prepared in advance. The first one is to indicate that the operation option of the function of starting the automatic film advance is named "automatic film advance start", and the second is that the operation option of the function of stopping the automatic film advance is named "automatic film advance stop". the

而且,在显示操作菜单1104的情况下,电视机1为幻灯片放映自动再现中时, 在上述控制脚本中预先准备了规定在操作选项1110的区域中显示操作选项名为“自动进片停止”的脚本,电视机1为幻灯片放映自动再现停止中时,在上述控制脚本中预先准备了规定显示操作选项名为“自动进片开始”的脚本。  Moreover, in the case of displaying the operation menu 1104, when the television set 1 is automatically reproducing the slide show, it is preliminarily prepared in the above-mentioned control script to display the operation option name "automatic film advance stop" in the area of the operation option 1110. script, when the television 1 is stopping the automatic playback of the slide show, a script specifying the display operation option named "start of automatic film advance" is prepared in advance in the above-mentioned control script. the

从而,若在幻灯片放映执行控制部141为幻灯片放映自动再现中时按下确定按钮(调出操作菜单1104之后),则操作菜单控制部142如图28(a)所示,显示包含“自动进片停止”的操作选项1110a的操作菜单1104。另一方面,若在幻灯片放映执行控制部141为幻灯片放映自动再现停止中时按下确定按钮,则如图28(a)所示,显示包含“自动进片开始”的操作选项1110b的操作菜单1104。这样,电视机1按照上述控制脚本,就能够动态地变更操作菜单1104的显示。  Therefore, when the slide show execution control unit 141 presses the OK button (after the operation menu 1104 is called) while the slide show is being played back automatically, the operation menu control unit 142 displays a display including “ The operation menu 1104 of the operation option 1110a of "Auto Film Advance Stop". On the other hand, when the OK button is pressed when the slide show execution control unit 141 is stopping the automatic playback of the slide show, as shown in FIG. Operation menu 1104 . In this way, the television 1 can dynamically change the display of the operation menu 1104 according to the above-mentioned control script. the

或者,也能控制操作菜单以外的显示方法(图11(a)所示的自动进片中的图标1101、照片标题1102、操作方法画面1103等。)更具体地说,在控制脚本中,也可以与添加定义停止相册中包含的照片的幻灯片放映的自动再现的功能的脚本相对应,添加指示进行变更的脚本,该变更是将表示自动再现中的自动进片中的图标1101变更到表示自动再现停止中的进片停止中的图标1109。  Or, it is also possible to control the display method other than the operation menu (the icon 1101, the photo title 1102, the operation method screen 1103, etc. shown in FIG. Corresponding to the addition of a script defining the function of stopping the automatic reproduction of the slide show of photos contained in the album, a script for instructing a change of changing the icon 1101 indicating that the automatic reproduction is in progress to that indicating An icon 1109 during stoppage of film advance is automatically reproduced. the

而且,在控制脚本中,通过变更检测到预定事件时的电视机1的动作,可以容易地变更电视机1的功能。例如,对于照片的旋转功能,也可以添加能够每次180度旋转照片的子操作选项,而不是每次90度旋转,或者用控制脚本任意地变更以幻灯片放映自动显示一张照片的时间宽度。  Furthermore, by changing the operation of the television 1 when a predetermined event is detected in the control script, the functions of the television 1 can be easily changed. For example, for the photo rotation function, you can also add a sub-operation option that can rotate the photo 180 degrees each time instead of 90 degrees each time, or use the control script to arbitrarily change the time width of automatically displaying a photo in a slide show . the

变形例1-变更操作选项的显示顺序  Modification 1 - Change the display order of operation options

显示用数据生成装置2的操作菜单生成部85生成显示操作菜单用的操作菜单确定脚本时,根据预定条件确定操作选项的显示顺序,从而能够确定以该顺序显示操作选项的操作菜单。  When the operation menu generating unit 85 of the display data generating device 2 generates the operation menu specifying script for displaying the operation menu, the display order of the operation options is determined according to predetermined conditions, thereby specifying the operation menu to display the operation options in this order. the

设想例如根据用户利用各功能的频率,确定操作选项的显示顺序。  It is assumed that, for example, the display order of the operation options is determined according to the frequency with which the user utilizes each function. the

电视机1每当执行显示用数据生成装置2提供的功能时,将表示利用该功能的菜单利用信息发送到显示用数据生成装置2。菜单利用信息中包含有识别所利用的功能用的功能ID。除此之外,上述菜单利用信息中也可以包含电视机1的终端ID、用户信息、利用该功能的日期时间信息。  Every time the television 1 executes a function provided by the display data generating device 2 , it transmits menu use information indicating that the function is used to the display data generating device 2 . The function ID for identifying the function used is included in the menu use information. In addition, the above-mentioned menu usage information may include the terminal ID of the television 1, user information, and date and time information for using the function. the

显示用数据生成装置2在图23所示的功能表中,对每一功能都具有存放其利用次数的一栏。  In the function table shown in FIG. 23, the display data generating device 2 has a column for storing the number of times of use for each function. the

当显示用数据生成装置2从电视机1接收菜单利用信息时,请求消息解析部70就从所接收的菜单利用信息中获取功能ID,对电视机1利用的功能进行确定。 控制部60的未图示的功能利用次数管理部在操作功能存储部94的功能表中,将所确定的功能的利用次数加1。这样,对于每一功能(操作选项)都存储了利用次数。  When the display data generating device 2 receives the menu use information from the television 1, the request message analyzing unit 70 acquires the function ID from the received menu use information, and specifies the function used by the television 1. The function use count management unit (not shown) of the control unit 60 adds 1 to the use count of the specified function in the function table of the operation function storage unit 94. In this way, the utilization count is stored for each function (operation option). the

然后,在操作菜单生成部85生成操作菜单确定脚本时,操作菜单生成部85对操作选项选择部83所选择的每一个操作选项,都从操作功能存储部94读出其利用次数。操作菜单生成部85可以生成操作菜单确定脚本,使得操作选项按照利用次数由多到少的顺序排列。  Then, when the operation menu generation unit 85 generates the operation menu determination script, the operation menu generation unit 85 reads the usage count from the operation function storage unit 94 for each operation option selected by the operation option selection unit 83 . The operation menu generation unit 85 may generate the operation menu determination script so that the operation options are arranged in descending order of the number of times of use. the

图29(a)和图29(b)是表示操作选项的显示顺序变更前后的操作菜单显示示例图。如图29(a)所示,电视机1之前根据控制脚本使表示“照片旋转”的操作选项1105在前面而显示操作菜单1104。这时,“照片一览显示”的操作选项1111显示在第三个。  FIG. 29( a ) and FIG. 29( b ) are diagrams showing an example of operation menu display before and after changing the display order of operation options. As shown in FIG. 29( a ), the television 1 previously displayed an operation menu 1104 with an operation option 1105 indicating "photo rotation" in front of the control script. At this time, the operation option 1111 of "photo list display" is displayed in the third place. the

之后,电视机1再次向显示用数据生成装置2请求幻灯片放映显示画面显示用数据。显示用数据生成装置2根据此时各功能的利用频率,确定显示选项的显示顺序,生成新的控制脚本。此时,若设“照片一览显示”的功能被用户利用得最多,则显示用数据生成装置2的操作菜单生成部85这样生成操作菜单确定脚本,使得“照片一览显示”的操作选项1111显示在第一个。  Thereafter, the television 1 requests the data for displaying the slide show display screen from the display data generating device 2 again. The display data generation device 2 determines the display order of display options according to the frequency of use of each function at that time, and generates a new control script. At this time, if the function of "displaying a list of photos" is most frequently used by users, the operation menu generating unit 85 of the display data generating device 2 generates an operation menu determination script such that the operation option 1111 of "displaying a list of photos" is displayed on First. the

电视机1按照包含上述操作菜单确定脚本的新控制脚本,如图29(b)所示,将“照片一览显示”的操作选项1111作为第一个而显示操作菜单1104。  The television 1 displays an operation menu 1104 with the operation option 1111 of "photo list display" as the first one as shown in FIG. 29(b) according to the new control script including the operation menu determination script. the

这样,根据用户的功能利用次数,能够动态地变更操作菜单的图样,使经常使用的功能的操作选项位于容易选择的位置(例如列表的上部)。由此,能够始终向用户提供容易选择经常使用的功能的操作菜单。  In this way, the pattern of the operation menu can be dynamically changed according to the number of times the user uses the function, so that the operation options of the frequently used functions are located at an easy-to-select position (for example, at the top of the list). Thereby, it is possible to always provide the user with an operation menu that makes it easy to select frequently used functions. the

或者,显示用数据生成装置2也可以对相册的每一张照片,存储照片被用户的电视机1所请求、浏览的次数。这样,显示用数据生成装置2就可以生成显示该照片用的控制脚本,使得对经常浏览的受欢迎的照片进行装饰而使其显眼、或者赋予标记,再进行显示。  Alternatively, the display data generating device 2 may store, for each photo in the album, the number of times the photo has been requested and browsed by the user's television 1 . In this way, the display data generation device 2 can generate a control script for displaying the photographs so that popular photographs that are frequently browsed are decorated to make them stand out, or are marked and displayed. the

变形例2-聚焦移动  Modification 2 - focus movement

若使用控制脚本,就能够使电视机1的操作菜单控制部142(图9)进行如下所示的动作。  By using the control script, the operation menu control unit 142 ( FIG. 9 ) of the television 1 can be operated as follows. the

具体而言,操作菜单控制部142按照控制脚本,根据电视机1中设定的信息和自身的工作状态,确定聚焦位置。然后,使光标位于所确定的聚焦位置,只有该操作选项显示为显眼的颜色(聚焦显示处理)。  Specifically, the operation menu control unit 142 determines the focus position according to the information set in the television 1 and its own working state according to the control script. Then, the cursor is positioned at the determined focus position, and only the operation option is displayed in a conspicuous color (focus display processing). the

图30是表示电视机1执行聚焦显示处理用的控制脚本的具体示例图。如图30 所示,在显示(子)操作菜单时,控制脚本中规定了:(1)读取设定信息;(2)读取幻灯片放映执行控制部141的动作;(3)使光标位于与所读取的内容一致的(子)操作选项;以及(4)变更光标所位于的(子)操作选项的显示颜色,从而显示(子)操作菜单。  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script for the television 1 to execute in-focus display processing. As shown in Figure 30, when the (sub) operation menu is displayed, the control script stipulates: (1) read the setting information; (2) read the action of the slide show execution control unit 141; (3) make the cursor The (sub)operation item is located in accordance with the read content; and (4) the display color of the (sub)operation item where the cursor is located is changed to display the (sub)operation menu. the

电视机1按照上述控制脚本,进行上述动作(1)~(4)。  The television 1 performs the above-mentioned operations (1) to (4) in accordance with the above-mentioned control script. the

这里,更详细地说明在选择主操作选项后进行子操作菜单的聚焦显示处理。显示用数据执行处理部40的操作菜单控制部142按照图30的控制脚本,首先读取设定信息。所谓设定信息,是指图8所示的相关信息存储部52中存储的相关信息表内的设定信息(栏组C12)。若用图8所示的例子进行说明,则操作菜单控制部142从相关信息存储部52分别读出“备注显示”=“进行”、“操作方法显示”=“进行”、“循环再现”=“不进行”、“进片间隔”=“10秒”的值。  Here, the process of performing focused display of the sub-operation menu after the main operation option is selected will be described in more detail. The operation menu control unit 142 of the display data execution processing unit 40 first reads setting information in accordance with the control script of FIG. 30 . The setting information refers to the setting information (column group C12 ) in the related information table stored in the related information storage unit 52 shown in FIG. 8 . If the example shown in FIG. 8 is used for description, then the operation menu control unit 142 reads out “remark display”=“proceed”, “operation method display”=“proceed”, “loop reproduction”= Values of "No", "Film Advance Interval" = "10 seconds". the

然后,操作菜单控制部142读取幻灯片放映执行控制部141的动作状态,判断是幻灯片放映自动再现中还是停止中。这里,判断是再现中。  Then, the operation menu control unit 142 reads the operating state of the slide show execution control unit 141 and determines whether the slide show is being automatically reproduced or stopped. Here, it is determined that reproduction is in progress. the

接着,操作菜单控制部142根据操作菜单确定脚本,将应在显示部15显示的(子)操作菜单进行确定。然后,确定与上述读取的内容一致的操作选项,并使光标位于该操作选项。  Next, the operation menu control unit 142 determines a (sub)operation menu to be displayed on the display unit 15 based on the operation menu determination script. Then, determine the operation option consistent with the content read above, and place the cursor on the operation option. the

操作菜单控制部142变更光标所位于的操作选项的显示颜色,显示操作菜单。  The operation menu control unit 142 changes the display color of the operation option where the cursor is located, and displays the operation menu. the

图31(a)~(e)是表示电视机1根据上述控制脚本而聚焦显示的子操作菜单的示例图。  31( a ) to ( e ) are diagrams showing examples of sub-operation menus that are displayed in focus on the television 1 based on the control script described above. the

图31(a)表示显示了“备注显示设定”操作选项的子操作菜单的例子。在上述例子中,由于操作菜单控制部142读出了“备注显示”=“进行”的值,因此确定聚焦位置为“显示照片备注”的子操作选项而显示子操作菜单。  Fig. 31(a) shows an example of a sub-operation menu displaying the operation option of "remark display setting". In the above example, since the operation menu control unit 142 has read the value of "remark display" = "go", the sub-operation menu is displayed by specifying the sub-operation option of "display photo remark" as the focus position. the

图31(b)表示显示了“操作方法显示设定”操作选项的子操作菜单的例子。在上述例子中,由于操作菜单控制部142读出了“操作方法显示”=“进行”的值,因此确定聚焦位置为“显示操作方法”的子操作选项而显示子操作菜单。  Fig. 31(b) shows an example of a sub-operation menu in which the operation option "operation method display setting" is displayed. In the above example, since the operation menu control unit 142 has read the value of "display operation method" = "go", the focus position is determined as the sub-operation option of "display operation method" and the sub-operation menu is displayed. the

图31(c)表示显示了“循环再现”操作选项的子操作菜单的例子。在上述例子中,由于操作菜单控制部142读出了“循环再现”=“不进行”的值,因此确定聚焦位置为“不循环再现”的子操作选项而显示子操作菜单。  Fig. 31(c) shows an example of the sub-operation menu displaying the operation option of "loop reproduction". In the above example, since the operation menu control unit 142 has read the value of "loop playback" = "not performed", the sub-operation option of "no loop playback" is determined to be the focus position and the sub-operation menu is displayed. the

图31(d)表示显示了“自动进片间隔”操作选项的子操作菜单的例子。在上述例子中,由于操作菜单控制部142读出了“进片间隔”=“10秒”的值,因此确定聚焦位置为“以10秒间隔进片”的子操作选项而显示子操作菜单。  Fig. 31(d) shows an example of the sub-operation menu displaying the operation option of "automatic film advance interval". In the above example, since the operation menu control unit 142 has read the value of "film advance interval" = "10 seconds", the focus position is determined as the sub-operation option of "advance film at 10-second intervals" and the sub-operation menu is displayed. the

图31(e)表示显示了“自动进片开始/停止”操作选项的子操作菜单的例子。在上 述例子中,由于操作菜单控制部142判断为“幻灯片放映执行控制部141是在幻灯片放映自动再现中”,因此确定聚焦位置为“开始自动进片”的子操作选项而显示子操作菜单。  Fig. 31(e) shows an example of a sub-operation menu displaying the "automatic film advance start/stop" operation option. In the above example, since the operation menu control unit 142 judged that “the slide show execution control unit 141 is in automatic playback of the slide show”, it determined that the focus position was the sub-operation option of “Start automatic film advance” and displayed the sub-operation option. Action menu. the

这样,通过将上述控制脚本提供给电视机1,电视机1根据电视机1中设定的信息和自身的工作状态,能够显示聚焦到与其内容一致的预定操作选项的状态的操作菜单。  In this way, by providing the above-mentioned control script to the television 1, the television 1 can display an operation menu focused on a predetermined operation option consistent with its content according to the information set in the television 1 and its own working state. the

实施方式2  Implementation mode 2

背景技术和课题  Background Technology and Issues

以往,对于处理大容量的数字图像数据并显示的图像显示装置,在VRAM(Video Random Access Memory:视频随机存储器)等图像用缓冲器中描绘图像从而在显示部中显示的描绘处理成为高负荷处理,而更高速地进行这种描绘处理就成为要解决的课题。  Conventionally, for an image display device that processes and displays large-capacity digital image data, the rendering process of rendering an image in an image buffer such as VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) and displaying it on the display unit is a high-load process. , and performing such rendering processing at a higher speed becomes a problem to be solved. the

因此,为了更高速地进行描绘处理,通过丰富硬件资源及其结构,或减少处理的数据量从而减轻描绘处理的负荷,不断努力以力图实现描绘处理高速化。  Therefore, in order to perform rendering processing at a higher speed, efforts have been made to increase the speed of rendering processing by enriching hardware resources and configurations, or reducing the amount of processed data to reduce the load of rendering processing. the

例如,专利文献2(日本公开专利公报:特开平6-149533(1994年5月27日公开))中,揭示了在具有双缓冲器的段描绘方式中,通过省去对远离显示区域的段的一个缓冲器的处理,从而能够实现高速描绘处理的图形和显示装置及其高速描绘方式。  For example, Patent Document 2 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication: JP-A-6-149533 (published on May 27, 1994)) discloses that in the segment rendering method with double buffers, by omitting the The processing of a buffer, thereby enabling high-speed rendering processing graphics and display devices and their high-speed rendering methods. the

然而,专利文献2的装置中,即使在部分更新信息的情况下,也必须对所有信息(整个画面的量)进行再描绘,从而存在的问题是,会产生除需要再描绘部分以外的无用的再描绘处理。  However, in the device of Patent Document 2, even if the information is partially updated, all the information (the amount of the entire screen) must be re-rendered, so there is a problem that useless information other than the part that needs to be re-rendered will be generated. Redraw processing. the

因此,专利文献3(日本公开专利公报:特开平11-65813(1999年3月9日公开))中,揭示了能够部分更新信息并防止发生描绘处理延迟的描绘处理装置。  Therefore, Patent Document 3 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication: JP-A-11-65813 (published on March 9, 1999)) discloses a rendering processing device capable of partially updating information and preventing delays in rendering processing. the

然而,在专利文献3的装置中,装置中内置的应用程序计算再描绘所需的再描绘区域。因此,无法根据信息(显示用数据)的内容,动态地变更装置计算再描绘区域的顺序,不管是进行哪种信息的再描绘时,都是以固定的顺序计算再描绘区域。因而存在的问题是,对于某一信息,再描绘区域中就会包含信息提供者不希望的区域,产生无用的再描绘处理。  However, in the device of Patent Document 3, an application built in the device calculates a re-rendering area required for re-rendering. Therefore, the order in which the device calculates the re-rendering area cannot be dynamically changed according to the content of the information (display data), and the re-rendering area is calculated in a fixed order no matter what kind of information is re-rendered. Therefore, there is a problem that, for a certain piece of information, an area not intended by the information provider is included in the re-rendering area, resulting in useless re-rendering processing. the

而且,若在上述不希望的再描绘区域中部分地包含不需要更新的其他信息(特别是具有复杂形状的目标物等),就必须进行切出再描绘区域中相关的部分(剪辑处理)。这时,存在的问题是,成为这一部分再描绘对象的目标物形状越复杂,则为 了剪辑处理而对装置产生的负荷就越大。  Furthermore, if other information that does not need to be updated (particularly, objects with complex shapes, etc.) is partially included in the above-mentioned undesired re-rendering area, it is necessary to cut out the relevant part in the re-rendering area (clip processing). At this time, there is a problem that the more complicated the shape of the object to be redrawn in this part, the greater the load on the device for editing processing. the

又,在电视机或便携式电话等图像显示装置中,大多数情况下都对硬件资源的设计有限制(制造成本的限制、装置自身大小的限制等),不考虑这些而丰富描绘处理高速化用的资源,是不现实的。特别是对于存储区域有极限的电视机等图像显示装置,希望实现更加高效的再描绘处理。  In addition, in image display devices such as televisions and mobile phones, there are often restrictions on the design of hardware resources (restrictions on manufacturing costs, restrictions on the size of the device itself, etc.), and there are many ways to increase the speed of rendering processing without taking these into consideration. resources are unrealistic. In particular, for an image display device such as a television having a limited storage area, it is desired to realize more efficient re-rendering processing. the

因此,本实施方式中,在显示用数据的控制脚本中,根据电视机1(图1、6、9)显示的显示用数据(显示画面)的内容,规定该显示用数据中的最佳再描绘区域。所谓最佳再描绘区域,即不需要复杂的处理且所需最低限度的再描绘区域。电视机1按照控制脚本,考虑显示用数据的内容,确定最佳再描绘区域,从而可以进行高效率的再描绘处理。所谓考虑显示用数据的内容,是指考虑例如在该显示画面中能够更新的目标物是哪一个、或该目标物的显示位置是固定还是移动的等,但并不限于此。  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the control script of the display data, the optimal reproduction of the display data is specified based on the content of the display data (display screen) displayed on the television 1 (FIGS. 1, 6, and 9). Depict the area. The so-called optimal re-rendering area refers to the minimum re-rendering area that does not require complicated processing. The television 1 can perform efficient re-rendering processing by determining an optimal re-rendering region in consideration of the contents of the display data according to the control script. Considering the contents of the display data means, for example, which object can be updated on the display screen, or whether the display position of the object is fixed or moving, etc., but is not limited thereto. the

下面,说明可以指定最佳再描绘区域、高效率地执行再描绘处理的电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2(网络相册系统100)。  Next, the television 1 and the display data generating device 2 (network album system 100 ) capable of specifying an optimum redrawing area and efficiently performing redrawing processing will be described. the

关于控制脚本(再描绘控制脚本)  About the control script (redrawing the control script)

图32是表示本实施方式的显示用数据(图3)中包含的控制脚本的具体示例图。所示例子为,在图32的控制脚本中包含:规定了显示圆、云、弹出框的三个图形的布局定义脚本112;以及操作内容定义脚本113,该操作内容定义脚本113规定了在通过操作部13输入预定信号(例如慳)时将上述显示的圆的半径从_50变更到100而显示的情况。  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script included in the display data ( FIG. 3 ) according to this embodiment. The example shown is that the control script in FIG. 32 includes: a layout definition script 112 that specifies three graphics for displaying a circle, a cloud, and a pop-up box; A case where the radius of the circle displayed above is changed from -50 to 100 and displayed when a predetermined signal (for example, '') is input to the operation unit 13 . the

在布局定义脚本112中,将上述三个图形分别夹在标签(“<”和“>”)之间来定义(脚本112a)。利用这样的一组标签来定义在显示画面中显示的图像数据或文本数据(或声音/视频数据),在以下的说明中,不论哪种数据形式,都将其称为目标物。  In the layout definition script 112, the above-mentioned three figures are defined by sandwiching tags ("<" and ">"), respectively (script 112a). Image data or text data (or audio/video data) displayed on a display screen is defined by such a set of tags, and in the following description, regardless of the data format, it will be referred to as an object. the

如图33(a)所示,电视机1按照上述布局定义脚本112,能够在显示部15中显示上述三个目标物(圆331、云332、弹出框333)。  As shown in FIG. 33( a ), the television 1 can display the above-mentioned three objects (circle 331 , cloud 332 , and pop-up box 333 ) on the display unit 15 according to the above-mentioned layout definition script 112 . the

然后,说明本实施方式的电视机1确定最佳再描绘区域、高效率地执行再描绘处理用的再描绘控制脚本。  Next, a re-rendering control script for determining an optimal re-rendering area and efficiently executing the re-rendering process will be described for the television 1 according to the present embodiment. the

再描绘控制脚本构成上述控制脚本的一部分,由再描绘区域定义脚本112b和再描绘区域变更脚本113b组成。  The re-rendering control script constitutes a part of the above-mentioned control script, and is composed of the re-rendering area definition script 112b and the re-rendering area change script 113b. the

再描绘区域定义脚本112b利用区域的起点(X和Y坐标)以及区域的宽度和高度,而将应再描绘的区域定义成矩形形状。此外,该再描绘区域的目标物是使电视 机1将再描绘区域进行确定用的目标物,由于并不是用户希望看到的目标物,因此如图33(a)所示,在显示部15中并未显示再描绘区域的矩形(由于未设定颜色(指定为“none”),因此无论显示属性的“visibility”是显示还是不显示的设定,用户都无法看到)。  The redrawing area definition script 112b defines the area to be redrawn in a rectangular shape using the start point (X and Y coordinates) of the area and the width and height of the area. In addition, the object in the redrawing area is an object for the television 1 to determine the redrawing area. Since it is not an object that the user wants to see, as shown in FIG. The rectangle of the redrawing area is not displayed in (since the color is not set (specified as "none"), the user cannot see it regardless of whether the "visibility" of the display attribute is displayed or not). the

再描绘区域变更脚本113b获取再描绘区域定义脚本112b所定义的再描绘区域,定义对该部分进行的变更处理。在图32所示的例子中,再描绘区域变更脚本113b规定在输入信号’a’时,将不显示的设定变更为显示(变更函数“setTrait(“visibility”,“visible”);”)。这样,通过利用再描绘区域变更脚本113b定义变更处理,电视机1可以在适当的定时判断再描绘区域定义脚本112b所定义的再描绘区域的再描绘必要性。  The re-rendering area change script 113b acquires the re-rendering area defined by the re-rendering area definition script 112b, and defines a change process to be performed on this part. In the example shown in FIG. 32, the redrawing area change script 113b stipulates that when the signal 'a' is input, the non-display setting is changed to display (change function "setTrait("visibility","visible");") . In this way, by defining change processing using the redrawing area change script 113b, the television 1 can judge the necessity of redrawing the redrawing area defined by the redrawing area definition script 112b at an appropriate timing. the

图33(b)是表示在按下操作部13的预定按钮并输入信号’a’时电视机1按照操作内容定义脚本113执行变更处理后的显示部15的显示示例图。根据操作内容定义脚本113所定义的,圆331的半径从50变为100而显示。  33(b) is a diagram showing an example display of the display unit 15 after the TV 1 executes the change process according to the operation content definition script 113 when a predetermined button of the operation unit 13 is pressed and a signal 'a' is input. The radius of the circle 331 is changed from 50 to 100 and displayed by the operation content definition script 113 . the

若控制脚本中未描述上述再描绘控制脚本,则当目标物(圆331)发生变更时,电视机1将该变更对象的目标物的外接矩形(图33(c)的虚线框内网状的区域334)确定为再描绘区域。然后,当再描绘区域中部分地包含目标物(云332或弹出框333)时,进行剪辑处理(切出该目标物中包含在再描绘区域中的部分)。对于该剪辑区域(图33(c)的涂黑的部分)的计算,上述目标物的形状越复杂,则电视机1的负荷就越高。  If the above-mentioned re-drawing control script is not described in the control script, then when the target object (circle 331) changes, the TV 1 will change the circumscribed rectangle of the target object (reticulate in the dotted line frame of FIG. 33 (c) area 334) is determined as the re-rendering area. Then, when an object (cloud 332 or popup 333 ) is partially included in the redrawing area, clipping processing (cutting out the portion of the object included in the redrawing area) is performed. For the calculation of the clipping area (the blacked-in portion in FIG. 33(c) ), the more complex the shape of the object is, the higher the load on the television 1 will be. the

本实施方式中,当圆331发生变更时,电视机1将上述再描绘控制脚本预先定义的矩形区域(图33(c)的点划线框内的斜线区域335)确定为再描绘区域。因而,由于再描绘区域中完全包含了目标物(云332或弹出框333)(或完全不包含),因此不需要进行剪辑处理。其结果,能够提高电视机1的再描绘处理效率。  In this embodiment, when the circle 331 is changed, the television 1 determines the rectangular area (hatched area 335 inside the dotted line frame in FIG. 33( c )) previously defined by the re-rendering control script as the re-rendering area. Therefore, since the target object (cloud 332 or pop-up frame 333 ) is completely contained (or not contained at all) in the redrawing area, clipping processing is not required. As a result, the redrawing processing efficiency of the television 1 can be improved. the

这样,为了避免目标物的剪辑处理,希望将再描绘区域定义脚本的再描绘区域定义为不使其部分地包含目标物。  In this way, in order to avoid clipping of the object, it is desirable to define the redrawing area of the redrawing area definition script so as not to partially include the object. the

生成显示用数据(由控制脚本和显示对象物组成)的显示用数据生成装置2对控制脚本中描述的所有目标物(图形、照片、操作菜单、文本数据等),确定再描绘区域,使再描绘区域完全包含目标物或完全不包含目标物(使其不会只包含一部分目标物),从而生成再描绘区域指定脚本。即,显示用数据生成装置2根据电视机1所请求的显示画面(显示用数据)的内容(目标物位置),计算出所需最低限度的最佳再描绘区域,将指定这样的再描绘区域的控制脚本提供给电视机1。  The display data generation device 2 that generates display data (consisting of control scripts and display objects) determines a redrawing area for all objects (graphics, photos, operation menus, text data, etc.) described in the control script, and makes the redrawing area The rendering area completely includes the target object or does not include the target object at all (so as not to include only a part of the target object), thereby generating a re-rendering area specifying script. That is, the display data generation device 2 calculates the minimum necessary re-rendering area based on the content (object position) of the display screen (display data) requested by the television 1, and designates such a re-rendering area The control script of is provided to TV1. the

以下,详细说明按照上述再描绘控制脚本进行再描绘用的电视机1的结构。  Hereinafter, the configuration of the television 1 for re-rendering according to the above-mentioned re-rendering control script will be described in detail. the

电视机的结构2-详细情况  TV structure 2-details

图34是表示本实施方式的电视机1的主要部分结构的框图。图34与实施方式1的图9相同,是更详细地表示图1所示的电视机1的显示用数据执行处理部40的图。  FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of the television 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is the same as FIG. 9 of Embodiment 1, and is a diagram showing the display data execution processing unit 40 of the television 1 shown in FIG. 1 in more detail. the

图34所示的电视机1中,与图9的不同点在于:控制脚本执行部41除包括控制脚本解析部140和照片旋转控制部143之外,还包括变更检测部144、再描绘区域确定部145、剪辑部146、以及描绘部147;存储部50具有再描绘区域信息存储部55。  The TV 1 shown in FIG. 34 differs from that in FIG. 9 in that the control script execution unit 41 includes a change detection unit 144, a redrawing area determination section 145 , clipping section 146 , and rendering section 147 ; the storage section 50 has a redrawing area information storage section 55 . the

此外,虽然这里未图示,但控制脚本执行部41也可以包括已进行了说明的幻灯片放映执行控制部141和操作菜单控制部142。  In addition, although not shown here, the control script execution unit 41 may include the slide show execution control unit 141 and the operation menu control unit 142 already described. the

又,电视机1还具有如上文所述的用RAM等易失性存储装置构成的暂存部18和帧缓冲器19。  Furthermore, the television 1 further includes the temporary storage unit 18 and the frame buffer 19 constituted by a volatile storage device such as a RAM as described above. the

暂存部18暂时保存从显示用数据存储部51取出的显示用数据执行处理部40的各部分进行处理的显示用数据。  The temporary storage unit 18 temporarily stores the display data fetched from the display data storage unit 51 and the display data processed by each part of the processing unit 40 . the

帧缓冲器19暂时保存显示用数据执行处理部40的各部分处理结束后生成的应在显示部15显示的一个画面量的显示画面数据。保存在帧缓冲器19中的显示画面数据通过显示控制部24而描绘于显示部15,并进行显示而能够使用户看到。  The frame buffer 19 temporarily stores display screen data for one screen to be displayed on the display unit 15 , which is generated after the processing of each part of the display data execution processing unit 40 is completed. The display screen data stored in the frame buffer 19 is drawn on the display unit 15 by the display control unit 24 and displayed so that the user can see it. the

控制脚本解析部140如上文所述,对控制脚本进行解析。下面,进一步详细地说明控制脚本解析部140的功能。  The control script analysis unit 140 analyzes the control script as described above. Next, the function of the control script analysis unit 140 will be described in more detail. the

关于DOM树  About the DOM tree

本实施方式中,更详细地说,控制脚本解析部140具有将作为XML文档的控制脚本展开成被称为是DOM(Document Object Model:文档对象模型)树的树结构的功能。DOM树定义XML文档的逻辑结构。通过将控制脚本展开成DOM树,能够对每一个用标签描述的目标物来处理控制脚本内的数据,并且能够识别目标物间的关系。DOM树的优点在于,能够访问所希望的目标物,而与控制脚本的描述顺序无关。  In this embodiment, more specifically, the control script analysis unit 140 has a function of developing a control script that is an XML document into a tree structure called a DOM (Document Object Model: Document Object Model) tree. A DOM tree defines the logical structure of an XML document. By expanding the control script into a DOM tree, the data in the control script can be processed for each object described by tags, and the relationship between objects can be identified. The advantage of the DOM tree is that desired objects can be accessed regardless of the order in which the control scripts are described. the

例如,将图32所示的控制脚本像图35所示的DOM树那样展开。控制脚本解析部140输出的这种DOM树在上述电视机1的暂存部18上展开,通过显示用数据执行处理部40的各部分,根据需要而读出。  For example, the control script shown in FIG. 32 is expanded like the DOM tree shown in FIG. 35 . Such a DOM tree output by the control script analysis unit 140 is expanded on the temporary storage unit 18 of the television 1, and is read by each unit of the display data execution processing unit 40 as necessary. the

变更检测部144检测控制脚本中描述的规定变更处理的脚本(例如,再描绘区 域变更脚本113b的变更函数等),判定每一个目标物的再描绘处理的必要性。  The change detection unit 144 detects a script that specifies change processing described in the control script (for example, a change function of the re-rendering area change script 113b, etc.), and determines the necessity of re-rendering processing for each object. the

当变更检测部144检测到描述了变更正在显示的目标物的处理的变更处理脚本并判定为需要进行目标物的再描绘时,对DOM树上的该目标物设置变更的标记。设置变更标记表示对该目标物需要进行再描绘处理。  When the change detection unit 144 detects a change processing script describing a process of changing an object being displayed and determines that redrawing of the object is necessary, it sets a changed flag on the object on the DOM tree. Setting the change flag indicates that the object needs to be redrawn. the

在图32和图35所示的控制脚本中,变更检测部144检测由ID=’updatearea’识别的矩形(预先定义为再描绘区域的图33(c)的斜线部)和由ID=’circle’识别的圆(图33(a)的圆331),作为需要进行再描绘的目标物。因而,在图34中,变更检测部144对矩形目标物“rect”和圆形目标物“circle”,设置了变更标记341  In the control script shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 35, the change detection unit 144 detects the rectangle identified by ID='updatearea' (the hatched part in FIG. The circle identified by circle' (the circle 331 in FIG. 33( a )) is used as the object to be redrawn. Therefore, in FIG. 34, the change detection unit 144 sets change flags 341 for the rectangular object "rect" and the circular object "circle".

变更检测部144检测的并不限于上述变更函数,例如,也可以检测动画的目标物。只要通过对目标物增加变更,可以正确地检测需要进行再描绘的目标物,从而也可以在任何条件下检测变更对象的目标物。  What the change detection unit 144 detects is not limited to the above-mentioned change function, and for example, an animated object may be detected. Only by changing the target object, the target object that needs to be redrawn can be detected correctly, and the target object that is the subject of change can also be detected under any conditions. the

再描绘区域确定部145从暂存部18获取变更检测部144设置了变更标记的目标物的信息,对再描绘区域进行确定。  The re-rendering area specifying unit 145 acquires information on objects whose change flags are set by the change detection unit 144 from the temporary storage unit 18 , and specifies the re-rendering area. the

具体而言,再描绘区域确定部145对暂存部18中存储的DOM树(图35)进行扫描,获取设置了变更标记341的所有目标物的再描绘区域。将列出再描绘区域确定部145所取得的各再描绘区域的表格称为再描绘区域列表。再描绘区域确定部145生成再描绘区域列表,并存储到再描绘区域信息存储部55。此外,当目标物具有圆形或其它复杂的形状时,计算出完全包含该目标物的外接矩形的区域,将算出的矩形作为该目标物的再描绘区域而添加到列表中。  Specifically, the re-rendering area specifying unit 145 scans the DOM tree ( FIG. 35 ) stored in the temporary storage unit 18 , and acquires the re-rendering areas of all objects for which the change flag 341 is set. The table that lists the re-rendering regions acquired by the re-rendering region specifying unit 145 is referred to as a re-rendering region list. The re-rendering area specifying unit 145 generates a re-rendering area list, and stores it in the re-rendering area information storage unit 55 . In addition, when the target object has a circular or other complex shape, a circumscribed rectangular area completely including the target object is calculated, and the calculated rectangle is added to the list as a redrawing area of the target object. the

当根据DOM树而将所有再描绘区域添加到列表中时,再描绘区域确定部145就对列出的所有再描绘区域进行扫描,若存在重叠的区域,则将其合并成一个。即,计算出重叠的所有再描绘区域的外接矩形。  When all the re-rendering regions are added to the list according to the DOM tree, the re-rendering region determination unit 145 scans all the re-rendering regions listed, and merges them into one if there are overlapping regions. That is, the circumscribed rectangles of all overlapping redrawing regions are calculated. the

图36(a)是表示存储在再描绘区域信息存储部55中的再描绘区域列表的示例图。表示再描绘区域确定部145根据图32和图35所示的控制脚本而生成的再描绘区域列表的例子。  FIG. 36( a ) is a diagram showing an example of a redrawing area list stored in the redrawing area information storage unit 55 . An example of a redrawing region list generated by the redrawing region specifying unit 145 based on the control scripts shown in FIGS. 32 and 35 is shown. the

对每一个构成一个显示画面的控制脚本,都生成再描绘区域列表。在图32和图35所示的例子中,由于对矩形目标物“rect”和圆形目标物“circle”设置了变更标记341,因此将这两个目标物的再描绘区域添加到列表中。在再描绘区域列表中,对应于识别图32和图35的控制脚本用的控制脚本ID和识别该控制脚本内的目标物用的目标物ID,存储有该目标物的再描绘区域信息(作为矩形的起点的X和Y坐标、宽度、高度)。  A redrawing area list is generated for each control script constituting a display screen. In the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 35 , since the change flag 341 is set for the rectangular object "rect" and the circular object "circle", the redrawing areas of these two objects are added to the list. In the redrawing area list, corresponding to the control script ID for identifying the control script of FIG. 32 and FIG. X and Y coordinates of the rectangle's starting point, width, height). the

再描绘区域确定部145一旦列出设置了变更标记的所有目标物再描绘区域,接着就执行互相重叠的再描绘区域的合并。然后,最终确定一个再描绘区域(不重叠时也可以是多个),并将其确定作为确定再描绘区域。  Once the re-rendering area specifying unit 145 lists all object re-rendering areas for which the change flag is set, then merges the re-rendering areas that overlap each other. Then, finally determine one re-rendering area (or a plurality of them if they do not overlap), and determine it as the final re-rendering area. the

图36(b)是表示存储在再描绘区域信息存储部55中的确定再描绘区域信息的示例图。表示图36(a)的各再描绘区域合并时的例子。在图36(a)的例子中,由于列出的再描绘区域如图33(c)所示进行了重合,因此,将圆331的外接矩形区域334与再描绘控制脚本预先定义的矩形区域335合并,从而算出一个确定再描绘区域。此外,由于对于一个控制脚本,也有时会算出多个确定再描绘区域,因此,利用再描绘区域ID可以分别管理各再描绘区域。  FIG. 36( b ) is a diagram showing an example of determined re-rendering area information stored in the re-rendering area information storage unit 55 . An example of combining the redrawing regions in Fig. 36(a) is shown. In the example of FIG. 36(a), since the listed re-rendering areas are overlapped as shown in FIG. 33(c), the circumscribed rectangular area 334 of the circle 331 and the predefined rectangular area 335 Combined to calculate a definite redrawing area. Also, since a plurality of definite redrawing areas may be calculated for one control script, each redrawing area can be individually managed using the redrawing area ID. the

由此,将再描绘区域确定部145输出的确定再描绘区域提供给对该确定再描绘区域执行再描绘处理的描绘部147。  Thus, the determined re-rendering area output by the re-rendering area specifying unit 145 is supplied to the rendering unit 147 that executes the re-rendering process on the determined re-rendering area. the

描绘部147进行再描绘区域确定部145所确定的确定再描绘区域的再描绘。剪辑部146进行剪辑处理。  The rendering unit 147 performs re-rendering of the specified re-rendering area specified by the re-rendering area specifying unit 145 . The clipping unit 146 performs clipping processing. the

具体而言,首先,描绘部147对于确定再描绘区域内的变更对象目标物(设置有变更标记341的目标物),反映变更处理结果,并写入到暂存部18。  Specifically, first, the rendering unit 147 reflects the change processing result on the change target object (object provided with the change flag 341 ) in the identified re-rendering area, and writes the result to the temporary storage unit 18 . the

然后,描绘部147对DOM树进行扫描,只要是有部分包含在上述确定再描绘区域内的变更对象以外的目标物,就获取定义该目标物的脚本。这是因为,只要包含在确定再描绘区域内,如果连无变更的目标物也不进行再描绘,则无法正确地显示变更后的信息。这里,当上述目标物完全包含在确定再描绘区域中时,根据所取得的脚本,将上述目标物写入到暂存部18。  Then, the rendering unit 147 scans the DOM tree, and acquires a script defining the object as long as there is an object other than the change target partially included in the determined re-rendering area. This is because the information after the change cannot be correctly displayed unless the object is re-drawn even if it is included in the definite re-rendering area. Here, when the above-mentioned object is completely included in the determined re-rendering area, the above-mentioned object is written into the temporary storage unit 18 based on the acquired script. the

另一方面,当所取得的目标物部分地包含在确定再描绘区域内时,剪辑部146计算出该目标物中包含在确定再描绘区域内的部分,将其作为剪辑区域送回到描绘部147。描绘部147将从剪辑部146获取的剪辑区域写入到暂存部18。  On the other hand, when the acquired object is partly included in the determined re-rendering area, the trimming unit 146 calculates the part of the object included in the determined re-rendering area, and sends it back to the rendering unit 147 as a clipping area. . The rendering unit 147 writes the clipping area acquired from the clipping unit 146 into the temporary storage unit 18 . the

此外,再描绘控制脚本指定的再描绘区域可如上文所述,由显示用数据生成装置2根据显示用数据的内容进行定义,使其不部分地包含目标物(特别是复杂形状的目标物)。从而,使得电视机1计算出的确定再描绘区域不包含复杂形状,可以避免高负荷的剪辑处理。  In addition, the re-rendering area designated by the re-rendering control script can be defined by the display data generation device 2 according to the content of the display data as described above so that it does not partially include objects (especially objects with complex shapes). . Therefore, the determined re-rendering area calculated by the television 1 does not contain complex shapes, and high-load clipping processing can be avoided. the

由此,确定再描绘区域内需要进行再描绘的所有目标物都被写出到暂存部18。最后,描绘部147将写出到暂存部18的变更处理后的确定再描绘区域的数据描绘于帧缓冲器19,更新保存在帧缓冲器19中的该确定再描绘区域内的变更处理前的数据。然后,结束对于确定再描绘区域的再描绘,将变更后的新信息显示于显示部 15。  As a result, all objects that need to be re-rendered in the determined re-rendering area are written to the temporary storage unit 18 . Finally, the rendering unit 147 renders the data written in the temporary storage unit 18 to the frame buffer 19 in the determined re-rendering area after the change process, and updates the data stored in the frame buffer 19 in the determined re-rendering area before the change process. The data. Then, the re-rendering of the determined re-rendering area is completed, and the changed new information is displayed on the display unit 15. the

根据上述结构,电视机1接收到包含指定再描绘区域的再描绘控制脚本的显示用数据时,首先按照显示用数据的控制脚本,显示初始显示画面。然后,变更检测部144检测到已显示的信息发生变更时,再描绘区域确定部145根据包含在控制脚本中的再描绘控制脚本,对确定再描绘区域进行确定。描绘部147对再描绘区域确定部145所确定的确定再描绘区域内进行再描绘,显示反映了变更的新显示画面。  According to the above configuration, when receiving display data including a re-rendering control script specifying a re-rendering area, the television 1 first displays an initial display screen in accordance with the control script of the display data. Then, when the change detection unit 144 detects that the displayed information has been changed, the re-rendering area determination unit 145 determines the re-rendering area according to the re-rendering control script included in the control script. The rendering unit 147 performs re-rendering in the determined re-rendering area specified by the re-rendering area specifying unit 145, and displays a new display screen reflecting the change. the

这里,上述再描绘控制脚本指定的再描绘区域作为不需要复杂处理且所需最低限度的再描绘区域,是根据显示用数据的内容而预先定义的。即,电视机1按照这种再描绘控制脚本而确定的确定再描绘区域,不会部分地包含目标物。由此,既避免了目标物的剪辑处理,又仅对所需最低限度的区域进行再描绘即可,其结果,能够高效率地执行再描绘处理。  Here, the re-rendering area specified by the re-rendering control script is defined in advance based on the content of the display data as a re-rendering area that does not require complex processing and requires a minimum. That is, the fixed re-rendering area determined by the television 1 according to such a re-rendering control script does not partially include the target object. In this way, clipping processing of the object can be avoided, and only a minimum necessary area can be re-rendered. As a result, the re-rendering process can be executed efficiently. the

又,由于利用控制脚本实现再描绘区域的指定,因此可以使电视机1根据显示用数据的内容,始终确定最佳的再描绘区域,从而可以使电视机1避免剪辑处理的负荷,可以始终高效率地进行再描绘处理。  In addition, since the designation of the re-rendering area is realized by using the control script, the television 1 can always determine the optimal re-rendering area according to the content of the display data, so that the TV 1 can avoid the load of clipping processing and can always be high. Efficiently perform redrawing processing. the

再描绘处理流程  Redraw the processing flow

图37是表示电视机1中的再描绘处理流程的流程图。再描绘处理是在控制脚本执行部41(图34)解析(展开成DOM树)并执行显示用数据的控制脚本而描绘初始画面后,在事件处理部11检测到预定事件时,由控制脚本执行部41的各部分执行的。  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the flow of re-rendering processing in the television 1 . The re-rendering process is performed by the control script when the event processing unit 11 detects a predetermined event after the control script execution unit 41 ( FIG. 34 ) analyzes (expands into a DOM tree) and executes the control script of the display data to draw the initial screen. executed by each part of section 41. the

再描绘处理大体上由三个步骤组成。即,变更检测部144根据再描绘区域变更脚本对再描绘的必要性进行判定的步骤;再描绘区域确定部145根据再描绘区域定义脚本对再描绘区域进行确定的步骤;以及对描绘部147所确定的再描绘区域进行再描绘的步骤。  The re-rendering process generally consists of three steps. That is, the steps of the change detection unit 144 determining the necessity of re-rendering based on the re-rendering area change script; the steps of the re-rendering area determination unit 145 determining the re-rendering area based on the re-rendering area definition script; The determined re-rendering area is re-rendered. the

下面,说明各步骤的详细情况。  Next, the details of each step will be described. the

在初始画面正在显示的状态下,事件处理部11检测到预定事件时(S301中的“是”),控制脚本执行部41和事件处理部11按照当前展开的DOM树(控制脚本),执行该显示用数据的处理(S302)。变更检测部144从正在执行的控制脚本中检测到变更函数(或动画目标物)等再描绘区域变更脚本时(S303中的“是”),对检测到的变更对象目标物设置变更标记(S304)。这时,检测到的变更对象目标物可以是一个,也可以是多个。  In the state where the initial screen is being displayed, when the event processing unit 11 detects a predetermined event (“Yes” in S301), the control script execution unit 41 and the event processing unit 11 execute the event according to the currently expanded DOM tree (control script). Processing of data for display (S302). When the change detection unit 144 detects a redrawing area change script such as a change function (or animation object) from the currently executing control script ("Yes" in S303), it sets a change flag to the detected change target object (S304 ). At this time, one or more objects to be changed may be detected. the

然后,再描绘区域确定部145根据变更检测部144检测到的变更对象目标物, 对每一个目标物生成再描绘区域列表。  Then, the re-rendering area determination unit 145 generates a re-rendering area list for each object based on the change target object detected by the change detection unit 144. the

首先,再描绘区域确定部145对暂存部18中展开的上述控制脚本的DOM树进行扫描,依次获取目标物(S305)。接着,当对所取得的目标物设置有变更标记时(S306中的“是”),算出该变更对象目标物的再描绘区域,并添加到再描绘区域列表中(S307)。这里,若目标物区域定义为矩形,则将其原样列出,若定义为矩形以外的形状,则算出该目标物的外接矩形并将其列出。对DOM树上的所有目标物都执行S305~S307的处理。  First, the re-rendering area determination unit 145 scans the DOM tree of the above-mentioned control script expanded in the temporary storage unit 18, and sequentially acquires objects (S305). Next, when the change flag is set on the acquired object (YES in S306), the re-rendering area of the object to be changed is calculated and added to the re-rendering area list (S307). Here, if the target area is defined as a rectangle, it is listed as it is, and if it is defined as a shape other than a rectangle, the circumscribed rectangle of the target is calculated and listed. The processing of S305-S307 is executed for all objects on the DOM tree. the

接着,再描绘区域确定部145最后对添加到再描绘区域列表中的各再描绘区域进行扫描,若存在重合的再描绘区域,则将其合并,将最终的确定再描绘区域输出到描绘部147(S308)。  Next, the re-rendering area determination unit 145 finally scans the re-rendering areas added to the re-rendering area list, if there are overlapping re-rendering areas, merge them, and output the final determined re-rendering area to the rendering unit 147 (S308). the

然后,描绘部147将包含在确定的确定再描绘区域内的所有目标物写入到暂存部18,准备在帧缓冲器19中描绘用的显示用数据。  Then, the rendering unit 147 writes all objects included in the determined definite re-rendering area to the temporary storage unit 18 to prepare display data for rendering in the frame buffer 19 . the

首先,描绘部147对暂存部18中展开的DOM树进行扫描,依次获取目标物(S309)。判定所取得的目标物是否有部分与上述确定再描绘区域重叠(S310)。然后,当判定为目标物与确定再描绘区域重叠时(S310中的“是”),接着判定所取得的目标物是否是有变更标记的变更对象目标物(S311)。  First, the rendering unit 147 scans the DOM tree expanded in the temporary storage unit 18, and sequentially acquires objects (S309). It is determined whether part of the obtained object overlaps with the determined re-rendering area (S310). Then, when it is determined that the object overlaps with the determined redrawing area (YES in S310 ), it is then determined whether the acquired object is an object to be changed with a change flag ( S311 ). the

当描绘部147判定为目标物是变更对象目标物时(S311中的“是”),控制脚本执行部41的各部分按照变更脚本,对变更对象目标物执行变更处理(S312)。然后,将由该变更处理获得的变更后的目标物,写出到暂存部18的预定区域(S313)。  When the drawing unit 147 determines that the object is a change target object (YES in S311 ), each part of the control script execution unit 41 executes change processing on the change target object according to the change script ( S312 ). Then, the changed object obtained by the change process is written to a predetermined area of the temporary storage unit 18 (S313). the

另一方面,当S311中判定为目标物不是变更对象目标物时(“否”),描绘部147接着判定该目标物与确定再描绘区域重叠的部分仅仅是一部分,还是全部(S314)。这里,当判定为所取得的目标物完全与确定再描绘区域重叠时(S314中的“否”),将所取得的目标物保持原样地写出到暂存部18的预定区域(S315)。另一方面,当判定为所取得的目标物与确定再描绘区域部分重叠时(S314中的“是”),剪辑部146计算出该目标物与上述确定再描绘区域重叠的部分(剪辑区域)(S316)。然后,描绘部147将所取得目标物的上述剪辑区域写出到暂存部18的预定区域(S317)。对DOM树上的所有目标物都执行S309~S317的处理。  On the other hand, when it is determined in S311 that the object is not an object to be changed ("No"), the rendering unit 147 next determines whether the overlapping portion of the object and the determined re-rendering area is only a part or all (S314). Here, when it is determined that the acquired object completely overlaps the determined redrawing area ("No" in S314), the acquired object is written as it is to the predetermined area of the temporary storage unit 18 (S315). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired object partially overlaps with the definite re-drawing area (YES in S314), the clipping unit 146 calculates the overlapping portion of the target object and the definite re-drawing area (the clipping area). (S316). Then, the rendering unit 147 writes the clipping area of the acquired object to a predetermined area of the temporary storage unit 18 (S317). The processes of S309-S317 are executed for all objects on the DOM tree. the

最后,描绘部147将结束了写出的变更后的确定再描绘区域的数据从暂存部18再描绘到帧缓冲器19的确定再描绘区域。然后,结束对于确定再描绘区域的再描绘,将变更后的新信息显示于显示部15。  Finally, the rendering unit 147 re-renders the data of the changed definite re-rendering area whose writing is completed from the temporary storage unit 18 to the definite re-rendering area of the frame buffer 19 . Then, the re-rendering of the determined re-rendering area ends, and the changed new information is displayed on the display unit 15 . the

如上所述,上述再描绘区域定义脚本指定的再描绘区域作为不需要复杂处理且 所需最低限度的再描绘区域,是根据显示用数据的内容而预先定义的。即,再描绘区域确定部145按照这种脚本而确定的确定再描绘区域,不会部分地包含复杂形状的目标物。从而,可以避免复杂形状的目标物的剪辑处理,并且能够仅对所需最低限度的区域进行再描绘。其结果,能够高效率地执行再描绘处理。  As described above, the re-rendering area designated by the re-rendering area definition script is defined in advance based on the content of the display data as a re-rendering area that does not require complex processing and requires the minimum. That is, the determined re-rendering region determined by the re-rendering region specifying unit 145 according to such a script does not partially include objects of complex shapes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid clipping processing of an object having a complex shape, and to redraw only a minimum necessary area. As a result, the re-rendering process can be efficiently executed. the

又,由于利用控制脚本实现再描绘区域的指定,因此可以使电视机1根据显示用数据的内容,始终确定最佳的再描绘区域,从而可以使电视机1避免剪辑处理的负荷,可以始终高效率地进行再描绘处理。  In addition, since the designation of the re-rendering area is realized by using the control script, the television 1 can always determine the optimal re-rendering area according to the content of the display data, so that the TV 1 can avoid the load of clipping processing and can always be high. Efficiently perform redrawing processing. the

如上所述,预先利用控制脚本指定显示画面上的再描绘区域,对于包含许多复杂形状目标物的显示画面和对事件作出响应而产生很多变更处理的显示画面来说,效果特别大。  As described above, using the control script to designate the redrawing area on the display screen in advance is particularly effective for a display screen containing many complex-shaped objects and a display screen that undergoes many changes in response to events. the

下面,利用图38(a)~(i)的例子说明这样指定的再描绘区域的具体例子,使得可以避免复杂形状的目标物的剪辑处理,并且能够仅对所需最低限度的区域进行再描绘。若电视机1按照图38(i)中指定的再描绘区域(再描绘区域定义脚本)而对确定再描绘区域进行确定,则与利用对每一个需要变更的目标物所计算出的再描绘区域而对确定再描绘区域进行确定的情况相比,无剪辑处理的负荷,能够更加有效地进行再描绘处理。  Next, specific examples of the redrawing area specified in this way will be described using the examples in Fig. 38(a) to (i), so that clipping processing of complex-shaped objects can be avoided, and only the minimum required area can be redrawn. . If the television set 1 determines the re-rendering region according to the re-rendering region specified in FIG. On the other hand, compared with the case where the re-rendering area is determined, the re-rendering process can be performed more efficiently without the load of clipping processing. the

图38(a)~(d)是表示显示于显示部15的包含复杂形状目标物的显示画面的具体示例图。还用箭头表示图38(a)~(d)的各显示画面间发生的变更以及与引发该变更的事件的对应关系。  38( a ) to ( d ) are diagrams showing specific examples of a display screen including a complex-shaped object displayed on the display unit 15 . Changes that occur between the display screens in FIGS. 38( a ) to ( d ) and correspondences with events that cause the changes are also indicated by arrows. the

图38(e)~(h)分别图示在显示画面中发生图38(a)→(b)、(c)→(d)、(a)→(c)、(b)→(d)的变更时所确定的确定再描绘区域。这里,用图38(e)~(h)图示的确定再描绘区域,表示在无再描绘区域定义脚本的情况下,利用对每一个需要变更的目标物计算出的再描绘区域而确定的确定再描绘区域。  Figure 38(e)~(h) respectively illustrate the occurrence of Figure 38(a)→(b), (c)→(d), (a)→(c), (b)→(d) in the display screen The definite redraw area determined when the change of . Here, the determined re-rendering area shown in Fig. 38 (e) to (h) means that when there is no re-rendering area definition script, it is determined by using the re-rendering area calculated for each object that needs to be changed. Determine the repainting area. the

图38(i)表示按照再描绘区域定义脚本所确定的确定再描绘区域。  FIG. 38(i) shows the determined re-rendering area determined according to the re-rendering area definition script. the

图38(a)是显示当日每隔一定时间的天气(四个)、与各时刻的气温和降水概率的预报用的显示画面,表示最初处理显示用数据而显示的初始画面。光标381表示当日四个时刻的天气预报,聚焦于四个天气预报图标382中的最接近该初始画面显示时刻的将来时刻的天气预报图标。背景云(复杂形状的目标物)383为显示画面的图案,在任何画面中都始终设置在天气预报的各种信息(所有目标物)的后面。此外,各天气预报图标382内的各天气标志384也是会增加剪辑处理负荷的复杂形状的目标物。  FIG. 38( a ) is a display screen for displaying the weather (four) at regular intervals of the day, and the forecast of temperature and precipitation probability at each time, and shows an initial screen displayed by initially processing the data for display. The cursor 381 represents the weather forecast at four times of the day, focusing on the weather forecast icon at a future time closest to the initial screen display time among the four weather forecast icons 382 . The background cloud (object of complex shape) 383 is a pattern of the display screen, and is always placed behind various information of the weather forecast (all objects) on any screen. In addition, each weather symbol 384 within each weather forecast icon 382 is also an object with a complex shape that increases the processing load of clipping. the

在显示图38(a)的状态下按下设置于操作部13的黄色按钮时,从图38(a)变到图38(b)的显示画面。即,显示12点的详细信息弹出框385。因而,如图38(e)所示,将作为详细信息弹出框385的外接矩形的区域380e确定为确定再描绘区域。  When the yellow button provided on the operation part 13 is pressed in the state in which FIG. 38( a ) is displayed, it changes from FIG. 38( a ) to the display screen of FIG. 38( b ). That is, a 12-point detailed information popup 385 is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38( e ), a region 380 e that is a circumscribed rectangle of the detailed information popup 385 is determined as a determined re-rendering region. the

在显示图38(a)的状态下按下设置于操作部13的右十字按钮时,变成图38(c)的显示画面。即,光标381从12点的天气预报图标382移动到18点的天气预报图标382。因而,如图38(g)所示,将作为上述两个天气预报图标382的外接矩形的区域380g确定作为确定再描绘区域。  When the right cross button provided on the operation unit 13 is pressed while FIG. 38( a ) is displayed, the display screen of FIG. 38( c ) is displayed. That is, the cursor 381 moves from the weather forecast icon 382 at 12 o'clock to the weather forecast icon 382 at 18 o'clock. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38( g ), a region 380 g that is a circumscribed rectangle of the above-mentioned two weather forecast icons 382 is determined as a definite redrawing region. the

同样地,在无再描绘区域定义脚本的情况下,由于将发生变更的各目标物的外接矩形确定为确定再描绘区域,所以各确定再描绘区域(区域380e~380h)在任何一个显示画面中,都部分地包含背景云383或天气标志384等复杂形状的目标物,其结果,必须进行高负荷的剪辑处理。  Similarly, when there is no re-rendering area definition script, since the circumscribed rectangle of each object that has changed is determined as the definite re-rendering area, each definite re-rendering area (areas 380e to 380h ) is displayed on any one of the display screens. , all partially contain complex-shaped objects such as the background cloud 383 or the weather sign 384, and as a result, a high-load editing process must be performed. the

因此,如图38(i)所示,利用再描绘区域定义脚本指定再描绘区域,使其完全包含或完全不包含复杂形状的目标物,并且将其限制在所需最低限度的区域内。由此,电视机1按照上述再描绘区域定义脚本,如区域380i所示,不是部分地包含复杂形状的目标物,从而能够确定最佳的确定再描绘区域。  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(i), the re-rendering area is designated by the re-rendering area definition script so as to completely include or not include complex-shaped objects, and to limit it to the required minimum area. As a result, the TV 1 can specify an optimal definite re-rendering region without partially including a complex-shaped object as shown in the region 380i according to the re-rendering region definition script. the

其结果,能够避免剪辑处理,高效率地执行再描绘处理。  As a result, clipping processing can be avoided, and re-drawing processing can be performed efficiently. the

变形例3-照片旋转时的再描绘处理  Modification 3 - Redrawing processing when the photo is rotated

上述例子中,对根据控制脚本而避免剪辑处理并高效率地执行再描绘处理的电视机1进行了说明,所述控制脚本指定再描绘区域,使其不是部分地包含复杂形状的目标物。  In the above-mentioned example, the television 1 that avoids clipping processing and efficiently executes re-rendering processing based on a control script that designates a re-rendering area so that it does not partially include complex-shaped objects has been described. the

但是,控制脚本并不限于上述例子。也可以用控制脚本指定再描绘区域,使得配置于预定显示位置的目标物始终为再描绘处理的对象,而与其形状的复杂度无关,与该目标物是否是变更对象目标物也无关。  However, the control script is not limited to the above examples. The re-rendering area can also be designated by the control script, so that the object placed at the predetermined display position is always the object of the re-rendering process, regardless of the complexity of its shape, and it does not matter whether the object is an object to be changed. the

这样,对于根据目标物的显示区域而指定再描绘区域必然发生的情况,具体考虑有以下所述的情况。  In this way, the following cases are specifically considered for the case where the designation of the re-rendering area inevitably occurs based on the display area of the object. the

变更显示画面时会发生以下情况:即,由于硬件限制即暂存部18的存储容量的极限,所以为了暂时保存变更处理过程中生成的数据,必须使用为了保存实际输出到显示部15的显示画面数据而确保的区域(以下称为ARGB区域)。  When the display screen is changed, the following situation may occur: that is, due to hardware limitations, that is, the limit of the storage capacity of the temporary storage unit 18, in order to temporarily save the data generated during the change process, it is necessary to use the display screen actually output to the display unit 15 for saving. The area secured for the data (hereinafter referred to as the ARGB area). the

在这种情况下,将输出到显示部15的显示画面数据描绘到上述ARGB区域之前,必须清空该ARGB区域中变更处理过程所用的区域(脏区)。  In this case, before rendering the display screen data output to the display unit 15 in the ARGB area, it is necessary to clear the area (dirty area) used for the change process in the ARGB area. the

但是,仅清空脏区并不够,当该区域中从变更前就原来配置有目标物时,对这 种目标物(非变更对象目标物)也需要进行再描绘以复原。因而,如上所述,需要指定再描绘区域,使得对卷入变更处理的目标物(在变更处理过程中与脏区重叠的目标物)也准确地进行再描绘。  However, it is not enough to just clear the dirty area. If there is an object in the area before the change, it is necessary to redraw the object (not the object to be changed) to restore it. Therefore, as described above, it is necessary to designate a redrawing area so that redrawing can be accurately performed on an object involved in the change process (an object overlapping with a dirty area during the change process). the

下面,以变更处理(图37的S312)是照片旋转处理(图10的S115)的情况为例,对根据目标物的显示区域和在照片旋转处理过程中变脏(推测为变脏)的区域按照指定再描绘区域的控制脚本执行再描绘处理的电视机1进行说明。  Next, taking the case where the change processing (S312 in FIG. 37) is the photo rotation processing (S115 in FIG. 10) as an example, the display area of the object and the area that is dirty (presumably dirty) during the photo rotation processing A description will be given of the television 1 that executes the re-rendering process in accordance with a control script that designates a re-rendering area. the

旋转照片时的问题  Problems when rotating photos

暂存部的结构  The structure of the staging department

图39是表示执行照片旋转处理的电视机1(特别是暂存部18)的主要部分结构的框图。如实施方式1中所说明的那样,照片旋转控制部143按照控制脚本执行照片的旋转和显示处理。更详细地说,照片旋转控制部143实现以下动作:即,将暂存部18用作为工作区域,从显示用数据存储部51获取成为旋转对象的照片,旋转所获取的照片,并将旋转后的照片发送到帧缓冲器19,从而在显示部15中显示旋转后的照片。  FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of the television 1 (particularly, the temporary storage unit 18 ) that executes the photo rotation process. As described in Embodiment 1, the photo rotation control unit 143 executes photo rotation and display processing according to the control script. More specifically, the photo rotation control unit 143 implements the following operations: that is, using the temporary storage unit 18 as a work area, acquires a photo to be rotated from the display data storage unit 51, rotates the acquired photo, and converts the rotated The rotated photo is sent to the frame buffer 19 so that the rotated photo is displayed on the display unit 15 . the

照片旋转控制部143用作为工作区域的暂存部18,具有ARGB区域181、预备区域182、和YUV区域183。上述三个区域在暂存部18中利用硬件固定。  The photo rotation control unit 143 serves as the temporary storage unit 18 of the work area, and has an ARGB area 181 , a spare area 182 , and a YUV area 183 . The above three areas are fixed by hardware in the temporary storage unit 18 . the

YUV区域183是暂存以YUV形式接收并存储在显示用数据存储部51中的JPEG照片用的区域。  The YUV area 183 is an area for temporarily storing JPEG photographs received in YUV format and stored in the display data storage unit 51 . the

ARGB区域181和预备区域182是暂存将保存在YUV区域183中的YUV形式的JPEG照片转换成ARGB形式用的区域。  The ARGB area 181 and the spare area 182 are areas for temporarily storing the JPEG photograph in the YUV format stored in the YUV area 183 into the ARGB format. the

ARGB区域181是保存实际输出到显示部15的显示画面数据用的区域。输出到帧缓冲器19的显示画面数据,必须由ARGB181提供。预备区域182是在控制脚本执行部41对转换成ARGB形式后的照片执行旋转等变更处理时用作为工作区域的预备的区域。  The ARGB area 181 is an area for storing display screen data actually output to the display unit 15 . Display image data output to frame buffer 19 must be provided by ARGB181. The spare area 182 is an area used as a spare area for the work area when the control script execution unit 41 performs change processing such as rotation on the photograph converted into the ARGB format. the

此外,所谓YUV形式,是指用亮度信号(Y)、亮度信号与蓝色成分之差(U)、以及亮度信号与红色成分之差(V)这三个信息表示颜色的形式。由于对亮度信号分配较多的数据量,因此通过少量画质的劣化可以得到高数据压缩率,这一点是采用YUV形式的优点。  In addition, the so-called YUV format refers to a format in which a color is represented by three pieces of information: a luminance signal (Y), a difference between the luminance signal and a blue component (U), and a difference between a luminance signal and a red component (V). Since a large amount of data is allocated to the luminance signal, a high data compression rate can be obtained with a small amount of image quality degradation, which is an advantage of using the YUV format. the

因此,当照片包含在显示用数据中从显示用数据生成装置2提供时,照片常为YUV形式。从而,由于为了显示于显示部15而需要转换成RGB形式(ARGB形式),因此,利用控制脚本执行部41将照片在YUV区域183中展开后,转换成ARGB 形式,在ARGB区域181或预备区域183中展开后,发送到帧缓冲器19。  Therefore, when a photo is included in the display data and supplied from the display data generating device 2, the photo is always in the YUV format. Therefore, since it needs to be converted into an RGB format (ARGB format) for display on the display unit 15, after the photo is expanded in the YUV area 183 by the control script execution unit 41, it is converted into the ARGB format, and is displayed in the ARGB area 181 or the spare area. After being expanded in 183, it is sent to the frame buffer 19. the

照片旋转时的ARGB区域和预备区域的状态  The state of the ARGB area and the preparation area when the photo is rotated

接着,根据图40对以下进行说明:即,未利用包含在控制脚本中的再描绘区域定义脚本指定适当的再描绘区域的情况下,照片旋转控制部143旋转照片时的ARGB区域181和预备区域182的状态以及该情况下的问题。  Next, the ARGB area 181 and the spare area when the photo rotation control unit 143 rotates a photo will be described with reference to FIG. 182 status and problems in this case. the

图40(a)是初始描绘时的ARGB区域181和预备区域182的状态。在ARGB区域181中,保存有当前正在显示部15显示的显示画面的数据(圆形目标物190、纵向照片185、背景)。预备区域182中未保存任何数据。或者,也可能在其它操作过程中残留某些数据。  FIG. 40( a ) shows the state of the ARGB area 181 and the spare area 182 at the time of initial drawing. In the ARGB area 181 , data of the display screen currently being displayed on the display unit 15 (the circular object 190 , the vertical photograph 185 , and the background) are stored. No data is stored in the spare area 182 . Alternatively, some data may remain from other operations. the

这里,输入将纵向照片185旋转90度的指示时,照片旋转控制部143执行照片旋转处理。因此,首先如图40(b)所示,调出在ARGB区域181中转换成ARGB形式的纵向照片185并暂存于ARGB区域181。然后如图40(c)所示,将暂存的纵向照片185旋转90度而得到的照片作为横向照片186,暂存于预备区域182。然后如图40(d)所示,清空ARGB区域181的脏区(即在旋转处理过程中被暂时使用的区)188。然后,照片旋转控制部143对再描绘区域进行确定,再描绘变更后(旋转后)的显示画面。  Here, when an instruction to rotate the vertical photo 185 by 90 degrees is input, the photo rotation control unit 143 executes photo rotation processing. Therefore, first, as shown in FIG. 40( b ), the vertical photo 185 converted into the ARGB format in the ARGB area 181 is called out and temporarily stored in the ARGB area 181 . Then, as shown in FIG. 40( c ), a photo obtained by rotating the temporarily stored vertical photo 185 by 90 degrees is temporarily stored in the spare area 182 as a horizontal photo 186 . Then, as shown in FIG. 40( d ), the dirty area (ie, the area temporarily used during the rotation process) 188 of the ARGB area 181 is cleared. Then, the photo rotation control unit 143 determines the re-rendering area, and re-renders the changed (rotated) display screen. the

这时,在未特别指定再描绘区域定义脚本的情况下,按照上述流程,电视机1如图40(g)所示,将照片旋转前(纵向照片185)的区域和旋转后(横向照片186)的区域确定为再描绘区域,将这些各个区域的外接矩形确定为确定再描绘区域(确定再描绘区域184)。  At this time, in the case where the re-rendering area definition script is not specifically designated, according to the above-mentioned flow, the television 1, as shown in FIG. ) area is determined as a re-rendering area, and the circumscribed rectangles of these areas are determined as a re-rendering area (determined re-rendering area 184). the

一旦确定了确定再描绘区域184,则如图40(e)所示,照片旋转控制部143就将暂存在预备区域182中的横向照片186写出到ARGB区域181。接着,照片旋转控制部143检测与照上述那样确定的确定再描绘区域184部分重叠的圆形目标物190。然后,如图40(f)所示,剪辑部146切出应进行再描绘的区域,将圆形目标物190的剪辑区域187写入到ARGB区域181。将保存在该ARGB区域181中的显示画面数据输出到帧缓冲器19,并显示于显示部15。  Once the re-rendering area 184 is confirmed, as shown in FIG. Next, the photograph rotation control unit 143 detects the circular object 190 partially overlapping the determined re-drawing region 184 determined as described above. Then, as shown in FIG. 40( f ), the clipping unit 146 cuts out the area to be redrawn, and writes the clipping area 187 of the circular object 190 into the ARGB area 181 . The display screen data stored in the ARGB area 181 is output to the frame buffer 19 and displayed on the display unit 15 . the

这样,若未利用再描绘区域定义脚本指定再描绘区域,使其完全包含上述圆形目标物190,则本来如图40(h)所示,必须显示横向照片186和圆形目标物190,可是上述圆形目标物190的左侧未复原而显示,从而产生无法正确进行照片旋转处理的问题。  In this way, if the re-rendering area is not designated by the re-rendering area definition script so as to completely include the above-mentioned circular object 190, the horizontal photo 186 and the circular object 190 must be displayed originally as shown in FIG. 40(h), but The left side of the above-mentioned circular object 190 is displayed without being restored, and there is a problem that the photo rotation process cannot be performed correctly. the

为了解决上述问题,需要变更提供给电视机1的控制脚本。具体而言,只要根 据图40(d)所示的脏区188那样可知是因预定的处理而预先弄脏的区域,利用再描绘区域定义脚本指定完全包含与该脏区重叠的所有目标物那样的再描绘区域即可。  In order to solve the above problems, it is necessary to change the control script provided to the television 1 . Specifically, as long as it is known from the dirty area 188 shown in FIG. 40(d) that it is an area that has been previously dirty due to predetermined processing, use the re-rendering area definition script to specify that all objects overlapping with the dirty area are completely included. Such a redrawing area is sufficient. the

此外,本实施方式中,由于所调出的照片必定是从左上开始描绘的,因此能够根据起点坐标(X,Y)=(0,0)和照片的大小来对脏区188进行确定。即,将指定区域189作为再描绘区域的控制脚本提供给电视机1。  In addition, in this embodiment, since the called photo must be drawn from the upper left, the dirty area 188 can be determined according to the starting point coordinate (X, Y)=(0, 0) and the size of the photo. That is, a control script specifying the region 189 as a redrawing region is provided to the television 1 . the

图41是表示根据圆形目标物190和照片旋转处理过程中使用的区域189指定再描绘区域的控制脚本的示例图。再描绘区域定义脚本112c是将区域189指定作为再描绘区域的脚本,再描绘区域变更脚本113c是使变更检测部144识别上述指定的再描绘区域作为变更对象目标物用的脚本。  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a control script for designating a redrawing area based on the circular object 190 and the area 189 used in the photo rotation process. The re-rendering area definition script 112c is a script for specifying the area 189 as a re-rendering area, and the re-rendering area change script 113c is a script for making the change detection unit 144 recognize the specified re-rendering area as an object to be changed. the

照片旋转处理流程  Photo rotation processing flow

图42是表示作为图37的S312中的变更处理的照片旋转控制部143执行的照片旋转处理流程的流程图。此外,设再描绘区域确定部145在图37的S308中,将图40(i)的区域189确定为确定再描绘区域。又,以下将图37的S311中判断作为变更对象目标物的目标物称为旋转对象照片。  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the flow of photo rotation processing executed by the photo rotation control unit 143 as the change processing in S312 of FIG. 37 . In addition, it is assumed that the re-rendering area specifying unit 145 specifies the area 189 in FIG. 40(i) as the determined re-rendering area in S308 of FIG. 37 . Hereinafter, the object judged to be the object to be changed in S311 of FIG. 37 is referred to as a photo to be rotated. the

照片旋转控制部143判定预备区域182中是否保存有旋转对象照片的旋转后数据(S401),当判定为未保存时(S401中的“否”),接着判定YUV区域183中是否保存有上述旋转对象照片(S402)。照片旋转控制部143在判定为YUV区域183中保存有YUV形式的旋转对象照片时(S402中的“是”),将保存的旋转对象照片从YUV形式转换成ARGB形式,并在ARGB区域181中展开(S404)。另一方面,在判定为YUV区域183中未保存旋转对象照片时(S402中的“否”),照片旋转控制部143将存储在显示用数据存储部51中的旋转对象照片写入到YUV区域183(S403),然后执行S404的步骤。  The photo rotation control unit 143 determines whether the rotated data of the photo to be rotated is stored in the spare area 182 (S401), and if it is determined that it is not stored ("No" in S401), then it is determined whether the above-mentioned rotated data is stored in the YUV area 183. Object photo (S402). When the photo rotation control unit 143 determines that the photo to be rotated is stored in the YUV format in the YUV area 183 (YES in S402), it converts the photo to be rotated from the YUV format to the ARGB format, and stores it in the ARGB area 181. Expand (S404). On the other hand, when it is determined that the photo to be rotated is not stored in the YUV area 183 (No in S402), the photo rotation control unit 143 writes the photo to be rotated stored in the display data storage unit 51 into the YUV area. 183 (S403), and then execute the step of S404. the

然后,照片旋转控制部143以控制脚本确定的角度来旋转保存在ARGB区域181中的旋转对象照片,并将旋转后的照片描绘于预备区域182(S405),返回S401的判定。  Then, the photo rotation control unit 143 rotates the photo to be rotated stored in the ARGB area 181 at an angle determined by the control script, draws the rotated photo in the spare area 182 (S405), and returns to the determination of S401. the

在S401中,当判定为预备区域182中保存有旋转对象照片的旋转后数据时(“是”),照片旋转控制部143清空ARGB区域181中由再描绘区域确定部145所确定的确定再描绘区域(S406)。  In S401, when it is determined that the rotated data of the photo to be rotated is stored in the spare area 182 ("Yes"), the photo rotation control unit 143 clears the fixed re-rendering determined by the re-rendering area determination unit 145 in the ARGB area 181. area (S406). the

最后,照片旋转控制部143将暂存在预备区域182中的旋转后的旋转对象照片写入到ARGB区域181(S407),结束照片旋转处理。  Finally, the photo rotation control unit 143 writes the rotated photo to be rotated temporarily stored in the spare area 182 into the ARGB area 181 ( S407 ), and ends the photo rotation process. the

之后,如图37中已述的那样,若有旋转对象照片以外的包含在确定再描绘区 域内的其它目标物(在图40(a)~(i)的例子中为圆形目标物190),则将其写入ARGB区域181,并将ARGB区域181中更新的确定再描绘区域输出到帧缓冲器19。  Afterwards, as already described in Fig. 37, if there are other objects (circular object 190 in the example of Fig. , write it into the ARGB area 181 , and output the updated determined re-rendering area in the ARGB area 181 to the frame buffer 19 . the

如上所述,即使是在变更处理过程中必须使用应保存显示画面数据的暂存区域(ARGB区域181)的情况下,只要根据显示用数据的内容生成最佳控制脚本,并提供给电视机1,而该最佳控制脚本指定可知是因变更处理而预先弄脏的区域以及完全包含与该脏区重叠的目标物的再描绘区域即可。  As described above, even when it is necessary to use the temporary storage area (ARGB area 181) in which the display screen data should be stored during the change process, an optimal control script can be generated based on the content of the display data and provided to the television 1. , and the optimal control script only needs to designate the area known to be pre-dirty due to the change process and the re-rendering area completely including the object overlapping with the dirty area. the

电视机1按照上述控制脚本指定的再描绘区域,即使是变更对象目标物以外的目标物,也可以正确地确定需要进行再描绘的目标物,并进行再描绘。  The television 1 can accurately determine the object that needs to be re-rendered and perform the re-rendering even if it is an object other than the target object to be changed according to the re-rendering area specified by the above-mentioned control script. the

由以上可知,即使是在暂存部18的存储容量有极限的情况下,也能够实现可以对大容量的数字图像数据实施变更处理从而显示的电视机1。  As can be seen from the above, even when the storage capacity of the temporary storage unit 18 is limited, it is possible to realize the television 1 capable of performing modification processing on large-capacity digital image data and displaying it. the

此外,上述说明中,是假设照片格式为JPEG的情况进行了说明,但电视机1可显示的格式并不限于JPEG,也可以显示位图、PNG(Portable Network Graphic:可移植的网络图像)等各种格式的照片和图像。又,因格式的不同而是否能够应用旋转处理也不同的情况下,只要这样构成照片旋转控制部143即可:即,判定旋转对象照片的格式,仅对能够进行旋转处理的格式的照片进行照片旋转处理。  In addition, in the above explanation, the case where the photo format is assumed to be JPEG has been explained, but the format that can be displayed on the TV 1 is not limited to JPEG, and bitmap, PNG (Portable Network Graphic: Portable Network Graphics) and the like can also be displayed. Photos and images in various formats. In addition, when whether or not rotation processing can be applied differs depending on the format, the photo rotation control unit 143 may be configured in such a way that it determines the format of the photo to be rotated, and performs photo processing only for photos in a format that can be rotated. Rotation processing. the

变形例4-预载时的再描绘处理  Variation 4 - Redrawing during preloading

上述例子中,描述了根据显示用数据的内容(因变更处理而变脏的区域和卷入变更处理的目标物)而部分指定应再描绘的区域的例子。然而,指定再描绘区域的再描绘区域定义脚本并不限于此,也可以根据需要,将指定整个画面作为再描绘区域的再描绘区域定义脚本提供给电视机1。  In the above example, an example was described in which an area to be redrawn is partially designated based on the content of display data (area dirty by the change process and object involved in the change process). However, the redrawing area definition script specifying the redrawing area is not limited to this, and a redrawing area definition script specifying the entire screen as the redrawing area may be provided to the television 1 as necessary. the

如上所述,电视机1获取显示用数据(第一显示用数据)时,将包含在第一显示用数据中的第一控制脚本展开成DOM树,并写入暂存部18(预载)。然后,在初次显示该显示用数据时,由于不存在之前的描绘数据,因此与再描绘区域无关,对整个画面进行描绘。  As described above, when the television 1 acquires display data (first display data), the first control script included in the first display data is expanded into a DOM tree and written into the temporary storage unit 18 (preloading). . Then, when the display data is displayed for the first time, since there is no previous rendering data, rendering is performed on the entire screen regardless of the re-rendering area. the

之后,当第一显示画面发生变更时,利用上述结构和方法,仅对作为与上一次描绘数据的差异的确定再描绘区域进行再描绘。  Afterwards, when the first display screen is changed, the above structure and method are used to re-render only the determined re-rendering area which is the difference from the last rendering data. the

但是,即使是在显示其它显示画面即按照第二显示用数据的第二控制脚本显示不同于上述的第二显示画面的情况下,也会在电视机1中发生上述第一控制脚本的DOM树原样存储于暂存部18的状况。  However, even when displaying another display screen, that is, displaying a second display screen different from the above-mentioned second display screen according to the second control script of the second display data, the DOM tree of the above-mentioned first control script will be generated in the television 1. The status is stored in the temporary storage unit 18 as it is. the

在这种情况下,已预载的第一显示用数据显示一次后,显示第二显示用数据,之后再次显示第一显示用数据时,有时会判断为无再描绘区域。假设这是在上述第 一显示用数据的第一控制脚本中未包含变更检测部144检测的变更脚本(动画的目标物或变更函数等)的情况。或者,假设是即使第一控制脚本中存在那样的变更脚本、但整个画面中也只有一部分画面被确定作为再描绘区域的情况。  In this case, when the preloaded first display data is displayed once, the second display data is displayed, and then the first display data is displayed again, it may be determined that there is no redrawing area. Assume that this is the case where the change script detected by the change detection unit 144 (animated object, change function, etc.) is not included in the first control script of the first display data. Alternatively, it is assumed that even if such a change script exists in the first control script, only a part of the entire screen is specified as the re-rendering area. the

如上所述,当判断为无再描绘区域或判断为只有一部分是再描绘区域时,与是否检测到从第二显示画面返回到第一显示画面用的事件无关,产生显示画面未从第二显示画面转移到第一显示画面或只有一部分显示画面返回到第一显示画面等无法正确地进行显示画面转移的问题。  As described above, when it is determined that there is no redrawing area or only part of the redrawing area is determined, regardless of whether an event for returning from the second display screen to the first display screen is detected, the display screen does not change from the second display screen to the first display screen. The screen transitions to the first display screen or only a part of the display screen returns to the first display screen, etc. The problem that the display screen transition cannot be performed correctly. the

在这种情况下,需要将再描绘区域指定为整个画面,以使整个画面从第二显示画面返回到第一显示画面。  In this case, it is necessary to designate the re-rendering area as the entire screen so that the entire screen returns from the second display screen to the first display screen. the

因此,在处理与目前为止显示的显示画面不同的显示画面的显示用数据时,将指定再描绘区域为整个画面的再描绘区域定义脚本包含在各控制脚本中,而提供给电视机1。  Therefore, when processing display data for a display screen different from the display screen displayed so far, a redrawing area definition script specifying the redrawing area as the entire screen is included in each control script and provided to the television 1 . the

由此,在电视机1中,当事件处理部11检测到指示从当前正在显示的第二显示画面返回到曾显示过的第一显示画面的信号输入时,控制脚本执行部41按照显示第一显示画面用的第一控制脚本,将整个画面确定为确定再描绘区域,对第一显示画面的整个画面进行再描绘。因而,即使是从不同的显示画面返回到原来的显示画面的情况下,也能够正确地进行画面转移。  Thus, in the television 1, when the event processing unit 11 detects the input of a signal instructing to return from the currently displayed second display screen to the previously displayed first display screen, the control script execution unit 41 displays the first The first control script for the display screen determines the entire screen as the determined re-rendering area, and re-renders the entire screen of the first display screen. Therefore, even when returning to the original display screen from a different display screen, screen transition can be accurately performed. the

如上所述,通过根据显示用数据的内容而在控制脚本中描述再描绘控制脚本并提供给电视机1,可以指定显示用数据的作者(显示用数据生成装置2)希望的再描绘区域。通过在控制脚本中进行描述,可以始终指定想要更新的区域,或者始终不指定不想要更新的区域。  As described above, by describing the re-rendering control script in the control script based on the content of the display data and providing it to the television 1, the re-rendering area desired by the author of the display data (display data generating device 2) can be specified. By describing in the control script, you can always specify the area you want to update, or you can always not specify the area you don't want to update. the

此外,对于变更检测部144作为变更对象而检测到的动画目标物,也可以将该目标物运动所需的再描绘区域作为该目标物的外接矩形,使得电视机1能够进行确定那样描述控制脚本。  In addition, for an animation object detected by the change detection unit 144 as a change object, the redrawing area required for the movement of the object may be used as a circumscribed rectangle of the object so that the TV 1 can determine the control script. . the

又,再描绘区域的形状并不仅限于矩形。只要是不需要复杂的剪辑处理的简单图形,就可以是任何图形。例如,也可以在控制脚本中定义具有像框架那样中空的矩形、圆形、或椭圆形等形状的再描绘区域。  Also, the shape of the redrawing area is not limited to a rectangle. Any graphics may be used as long as they are simple graphics that do not require complicated clipping processing. For example, a redrawing area having a shape such as a hollow rectangle like a frame, a circle, or an ellipse may be defined in the control script. the

实施方式3  Implementation mode 3

在上述实施方式1的说明中,说明了根据显示用数据的内容生成控制脚本来适当地变更要显示的操作菜单以及将与操作菜单对应的照片应用功能提供给电视机1的情况。  In the description of Embodiment 1 above, a case was described in which a control script is generated based on the content of display data, an operation menu to be displayed is appropriately changed, and a photo application function corresponding to the operation menu is provided to the television 1 . the

将控制脚本提供给电视机1的各照片应用功能描述在例如控制脚本所包含的图12的脚本132a~132d等操作功能定义脚本中。操作功能定义脚本中描述有何时(事件的定义)做和如何做(要执行功能的定义)。如实施方式1中所述,通过根据显示用数据的内容变更上述要执行功能的定义的部分,可以灵活地变更电视机1的照片应用功能。  Each photo application function that provides the control script to the television 1 is described in an operation function definition script such as scripts 132a to 132d in FIG. 12 included in the control script, for example. When (definition of event) and how to do (definition of function to be executed) are described in the operation function definition script. As described in Embodiment 1, the photo application function of the television 1 can be flexibly changed by changing the defined part of the function to be executed according to the content of the display data. the

而且,如图12所示,要执行功能的定义的部分与成为触发电视机1执行该功能的事件的定义相对应。这些事件在大多数情况下,通过用户按下设置于操作部13的各种按钮而由事件处理部11检测。例如,由于脚本132a中描述为  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12 , the definition of a function to be executed corresponds to the definition of an event that triggers the television 1 to execute the function. These events are often detected by the event processing unit 11 when the user presses various buttons provided on the operation unit 13 . For example, since script 132a describes as

if(evt.data==‘y’),  if(evt.data=='y'),

因此,表示对操作部13的黄色按钮(‘y’表示通过黄色按钮输入的信号)的按下作出响应,执行脚本132a定义的操作菜单显示/不显示的功能。即,黄色按钮(事件)与操作菜单显示/不显示的功能相对应。  Therefore, it indicates that the function of displaying/not displaying the operation menu defined by the script 132a is executed in response to pressing of the yellow button ('y' indicates a signal input through the yellow button) of the operation unit 13 . That is, the yellow button (event) corresponds to the function of display/non-display of the operation menu. the

本实施方式中,说明以下情况:即,通过对操作功能定义脚本中的操作部13的按钮(事件)与功能的组合进行适当设定,控制由操作部13进行操作的电视机1的动作。由此,对于同一按钮,能够向每一个显示用数据分配不同的功能,或者能够将同一功能,对每一个显示用数据分配给不同的按钮。  In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the operation of the television 1 operated by the operation unit 13 is controlled by appropriately setting combinations of buttons (events) and functions of the operation unit 13 in the operation function definition script. In this way, different functions can be assigned to the same button for each display data, or the same function can be assigned to different buttons for each display data. the

在生成控制脚本的显示用数据生成装置2中,对于这些按钮和功能的组合,在生成控制脚本时根据显示用数据的内容选择最佳的组合。即,由于无论使电视机1显示哪个显示用数据,都始终考虑用户的操作性而生成操作功能定义脚本,因此能够维持用户对电视机1的操作性。  In the display data generating device 2 that generates a control script, among these combinations of buttons and functions, an optimal combination is selected according to the contents of the display data when generating the control script. That is, since the operation function definition script is always generated in consideration of the operability of the user regardless of the display data to be displayed on the television 1 , the operability of the user on the television 1 can be maintained. the

又,显示用数据生成装置2也可以根据来自电视机1的请求,变更上述按钮与功能的组合,从而生成操作功能定义脚本。例如,电视机1将指示发送到显示用数据生成装置2(也可以是用户对电视机1进行该操作),使其可以对确定按钮作出响应,而执行到目前为止是对黄色按钮响应而执行某种功能的动作。显示用数据生成装置2根据该指示,可以将上述功能与确定按钮对应,而不是与黄色按钮对应,从而生成操作功能定义脚本。  In addition, the display data generation device 2 may generate an operation function definition script by changing the combination of the above-mentioned buttons and functions in response to a request from the television 1 . For example, the TV 1 sends an instruction to the display data generating device 2 (the user may also perform the operation on the TV 1) so that it can respond to the OK button, and the execution has so far been performed in response to the yellow button. action of some kind. The display data generating device 2 can generate an operation function definition script by associating the above-mentioned function with the OK button instead of the yellow button based on the instruction. the

图43是表示操作功能定义脚本的一个示例图。脚本431中定义了“按下(操作部13的)确定按钮时”的事件。‘k’表示通过确定按钮输入的信号。  Fig. 43 is a diagram showing an example of an operation function definition script. In the script 431, an event of "when the OK button (of the operation unit 13) is pressed" is defined. 'k' indicates a signal input via the OK button. the

又,在脚本431之后,定义了按下确定按钮时电视机1的控制脚本执行部41要执行的功能。这里作为一个例子,定义了在电视机1正显示图11(b)的显示画面的状态下检测到确定按钮被按下时使操作菜单控制部142显示图11(c)的显示画面 即子操作菜单1106的功能。  Further, after the script 431, a function to be executed by the control script execution unit 41 of the television 1 when the OK button is pressed is defined. Here, as an example, it is defined that when the TV 1 is displaying the display screen of FIG. 11( b ), when it is detected that the OK button is pressed, the operation menu control unit 142 displays the display screen of FIG. 11( c ), that is, the sub-operation Functions of the menu 1106 . the

这里,设显示用数据生成装置2将图43所示的操作功能定义脚本的脚本431变成  Here, it is assumed that the display data generation device 2 changes the script 431 of the operation function definition script shown in FIG. 43 into

if(evt.data==‘d’)  if(evt.data=='d')

然后提供给电视机1。在这种情况下,按下右十字按钮而不是按下确定按钮时,电视机1显示子操作菜单1106。‘d’表示通过右十字按钮输入的信号。  Then provided to the TV 1. In this case, when the right cross button is pressed instead of the OK button, the television 1 displays the sub-operation menu 1106 . 'd' indicates the signal input via the right cross button. the

如上所述,在操作功能定义脚本中,通过改变按钮与功能的组合即变更事件的定义,可以控制电视机1,使其通过不同按钮的输入而执行同一功能。  As described above, in the operation function definition script, by changing the combination of buttons and functions, that is, changing the definition of events, it is possible to control the television 1 to execute the same function by inputting different buttons. the

此外,电视机1按照状态转移定义脚本,可以对按下的按钮作出响应,显示与当前正在显示的显示画面不相同的显示画面(转移画面)。在状态转移定义脚本中,描述有事件发生时确定转移到哪一个显示画面的转移目标信息。因此,在状态转移定义脚本中,也可以例如以下所述,变更按钮与转移目标信息的组合。  In addition, the television 1 can display a display screen (transition screen) different from the display screen currently being displayed in response to a button being pressed according to the state transition definition script. In the state transition definition script, describe the transition target information to determine which display screen to transition to when an event occurs. Therefore, in the state transition definition script, the combination of the button and the transition destination information may be changed, for example, as described below. the

图44(a)和(b)是表示按下确定按钮时的显示画面转移的图。  44( a ) and ( b ) are diagrams showing the transition of the display screen when the OK button is pressed. the

如图44(a)所示,电视机1在相册历史画面440a正在显示的状态下检测到确定按钮被按下时,获取幻灯片放映显示画面440b(最初是相册的标题画面)并显示。在相册历史画面440a的操作方法画面1103中,也可以显示对通过确定按钮转移到幻灯片放映显示画面440b(标题画面)进行的说明。  As shown in FIG. 44( a ), when the TV 1 detects that the OK button is pressed while the album history screen 440a is being displayed, it acquires a slideshow display screen 440b (first, the title screen of the album) and displays it. On the operation method screen 1103 of the album history screen 440a, an explanation for transitioning to the slideshow display screen 440b (title screen) by the OK button may be displayed. the

在这种情况下,状态转移定义脚本中,将确定按钮与转移到幻灯片放映显示画面440b用的转移目标信息相对应。  In this case, in the state transition definition script, the OK button is associated with the transition destination information for transitioning to the slide show display screen 440b. the

如图44(b)所示,电视机1在相册历史画面440a正在显示的状态下检测到确定按钮被按下时,获取缩略图显示画面440c并显示。在这种情况下,也可以不同于图44(a),在操作方法画面1103中,显示对通过确定按钮转移到缩略图显示画面440c进行的说明。  As shown in FIG. 44( b ), when the television 1 detects that the OK button is pressed while the album history screen 440a is being displayed, it acquires and displays a thumbnail display screen 440c. In this case, unlike FIG. 44( a ), an explanation for transitioning to the thumbnail display screen 440 c by pressing the OK button may be displayed on the operation method screen 1103 . the

在这种情况下,不同于图44(a),在状态转移定义脚本中,将确定按钮与转移到缩略图显示画面440c用的转移目标信息相对应。  In this case, unlike FIG. 44( a ), in the state transition definition script, an OK button is associated with transition destination information for transitioning to the thumbnail display screen 440c. the

从而,即使按下同一按钮,也能够变更电视机1转移的显示画面。  Therefore, even if the same button is pressed, the display screen to which the television 1 transitions can be changed. the

而且,电视机1也能够描述状态转移定义脚本,使得在按下同一按钮的情况下,按照预定的条件改变转移目标。若按照图44(a)、(b)所示例子进行说明,则通过利用描述了条件的状态转移定义脚本,可以实现以下功能的电视机1:即,例如在相册历史画面440a中通过确定按钮选择相册的情况下,根据该选择的相册中包含的照片张数,确定是转移到该相册的幻灯片放映显示画面440b,还是转移到缩略图 显示画面440c。  Furthermore, the television 1 can also describe a state transition definition script so that when the same button is pressed, the transition target is changed according to a predetermined condition. According to the example shown in Fig. 44 (a), (b), by using the state transition definition script that describes the condition, the TV 1 with the following functions can be realized: that is, for example, in the album history screen 440a through the OK button In the case of selecting an album, it is determined whether to transfer to the slide show display screen 440b of the album or to the thumbnail display screen 440c according to the number of photos contained in the selected album. the

图45是表示描述条件时的状态转移定义脚本的具体示例图。设该状态转移定义脚本与确定按钮相对应。图45所示的状态转移定义脚本中,为了使电视机1的控制脚本执行部41进行条件判定,根据条件确定转移目标并显示该转移目标的显示画面,描述有以下所需信息。  Fig. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example of a state transition definition script when describing a condition. Let this state transition definition script correspond to the OK button. In the state transition definition script shown in FIG. 45 , in order to make the control script execution unit 41 of the television 1 perform condition determination, determine the transition target according to the condition and display the display screen of the transition target, the following necessary information is described. the

脚本451定义获取成为判定对象的信息(这里是所选择相册的照片张数)的方法。控制脚本执行部41按照脚本451,从预定的文件(top.svg)获取所选择相册的照片张数信息。此外,在本实施方式中,上述文件是这样生成的,即,若相册照片的张数为10张以下则表示“10”的值,若为11张以上则表示“11”的值,作为照片张数信息。上述文件只要与该状态转移定义脚本一起在同一控制脚本内描述即可,使其能以“top.svg”名识别。此外,上述文件由显示用数据生成装置2生成。具体而言,显示用数据生成装置2参照图20所示的相册信息表,根据所请求相册的照片张数,在上述文件中包含“10”或“11”的值而生成上述文件。  The script 451 defines a method for acquiring information to be judged (here, the number of photos in the selected album). The control script execution unit 41 acquires information on the number of photos in the selected album from a predetermined file (top.svg) according to the script 451 . In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned file is generated by displaying a value of "10" if the number of album photos is 10 or less, and a value of "11" if it is more than 11, as a photo sheet number information. The above-mentioned file only needs to be described in the same control script together with the state transition definition script so that it can be identified by the name "top.svg". In addition, the above-mentioned file is generated by the display data generating device 2 . Specifically, the display data generating device 2 refers to the album information table shown in FIG. 20 , and generates the file by including the value "10" or "11" in the file according to the number of photos in the requested album. the

脚本452定义判定成为上述判定对象的信息(这里是从上述文件获取的照片张数信息)的方法。控制脚本执行部41按照脚本452,判定照片张数信息是“10”还是“11”。  The script 452 defines a method for judging the information to be judged (here, information on the number of photographs acquired from the file). According to the script 452, the control script execution unit 41 judges whether the photo number information is "10" or "11". the

脚本453定义判定条件。在图45所示的例子中,将照片张数信息分成“10”的情况和“11”的情况,定义了对控制脚本执行部41要执行的功能进行定义的脚本的名称(“cpm_title”、“cpm_thumbnail”)。  Script 453 defines decision conditions. In the example shown in FIG. 45 , the case of the number of photographs information is divided into "10" and "11", and the name of the script defining the function to be executed by the control script execution unit 41 ("cpm_title", "cpm_thumbnail"). the

脚本454定义控制脚本执行部41根据各判定条件要执行的功能。即,控制脚本执行部41在(1)照片张数信息为“10”(10张以下)的情况下,按照脚本“cpm_title”,能够获取幻灯片放映显示画面440b并显示;以及在(2)照片张数信息为“11”(11张以上)的情况下,按照脚本“cpm_thumbnail”,能够获取缩略图显示画面440c并显示。  The script 454 defines functions to be executed by the control script execution unit 41 according to each determination condition. That is, the control script execution unit 41 can obtain and display the slide show display screen 440b according to the script "cpm_title" when (1) the photo number information is "10" (10 or less); and (2) When the photo number information is "11" (11 or more), according to the script "cpm_thumbnail", the thumbnail display screen 440c can be acquired and displayed. the

因而,通过定义条件和每一个条件的功能而描述状态转移定义脚本,在按下一个按钮的情况下,根据预定的条件,能够控制电视机1,使其从多个动作中选择适当的动作并执行。  Therefore, the state transition definition script is described by defining the conditions and the function of each condition. When a button is pressed, according to the predetermined condition, the TV 1 can be controlled to select an appropriate action from a plurality of actions and implement. the

如上所述,利用控制脚本,就能够容易地变更设置于操作部13的各个按钮与分配给该按钮的电视机1的功能的对应关系。  As described above, using the control script, it is possible to easily change the correspondence between each button provided on the operation unit 13 and the function of the television 1 assigned to the button. the

实施方式4  Implementation Mode 4

若利用控制脚本,则能够控制电视机1所执行的以下功能。  By using the control script, the following functions executed by the television 1 can be controlled. the

(1)显示用数据获取功能的控制  (1) Control of data acquisition function for display

电视机1将请求所希望的显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息发送到显示用数据生成装置2,从显示用数据生成装置2获取所请求的显示用数据。  The television 1 transmits a display data request message requesting desired display data to the display data generating device 2 , and acquires the requested display data from the display data generating device 2 . the

通过在控制脚本中对显示用数据生成装置2的一侧何时获取哪一个显示用数据进行定义,从而可以控制电视机1的显示用数据获取功能。  The display data acquisition function of the television 1 can be controlled by defining when and which display data to acquire on the side of the display data generation device 2 in the control script. the

例如,设存在如下情况:即,在显示了第一显示用数据的第一显示用数据之后,必定显示第二显示用数据的第二显示画面。这时,若第一显示用数据的控制脚本中描述有获取上述第二显示用数据的情况,则电视机1按照上述控制脚本,可以进行显示第一显示用数据的第一显示画面的处理,并且获取上述第二显示用数据。  For example, assume that there is a case where the second display screen of the second display data is always displayed after the first display data of the first display data is displayed. At this time, if the control script of the first display data describes the acquisition of the second display data, the television 1 can perform the process of displaying the first display screen of the first display data according to the above control script, And acquire the above-mentioned second display data. the

这里,电视机1通过通信网向显示用数据生成装置2请求显示用数据到获取所请求的显示用数据为止,需要一定的时间。因而,在从用户接收到对显示用数据进行显示的指示时,开始获取显示用数据的处理并进行显示,该动作无法对用户的指示作出迅速响应,从而有损用户的便利性。  Here, it takes a certain amount of time until the television 1 requests display data from the display data generating device 2 through the communication network until the requested display data is acquired. Therefore, when an instruction to display the display data is received from the user, the process of acquiring and displaying the display data is started, and this operation cannot respond quickly to the user's instruction, thereby impairing the user's convenience. the

因此,在可以预测下一个显示的显示画面(显示用数据)的情况下,电视机1按照上述控制脚本,在处理第一显示用数据的过程中,先行取得接下来的第二显示用数据。从而,在输入用户的指示时,能够根据先行取得并保存在本装置中的显示用数据,立即显示下一个显示画面。由此,能够提高显示用数据显示处理的响应速度,维持用户的便利性。  Therefore, when the display screen (display data) to be displayed next can be predicted, the television 1 acquires the next second display data in advance while processing the first display data according to the above-mentioned control script. Therefore, when a user's instruction is input, the next display screen can be displayed immediately based on the display data acquired in advance and stored in the device. Thereby, the response speed of the display data display process can be improved, and the user's convenience can be maintained. the

(2)显示用数据管理功能的控制  (2) Control of data management functions for display

电视机1利用显示用数据存储部51,对从显示用数据生成装置2获取的显示用数据进行管理。具体而言,对事件处理部11检测到的事件作出响应,将显示用数据保存在显示用数据存储部51中,或将其判断为不需要而从显示用数据存储部51删除。  The television 1 uses the display data storage unit 51 to manage the display data acquired from the display data generation device 2 . Specifically, in response to an event detected by the event processing unit 11 , the display data is stored in the display data storage unit 51 , or is determined to be unnecessary and deleted from the display data storage unit 51 . the

通过在控制脚本中定义如何管理该显示用数据,从而可以控制电视机1的显示用数据存储部51中的显示用数据管理功能。例如,定义以下情况:即,保存所获取的显示用数据,使其不会从显示用数据存储部51删除;在进行预定次数处理(显示)的时刻,将该显示用数据从显示用数据存储部51删除;以及将显示用数据存储部51中保存的预定的显示用数据删除等。  By defining how to manage the display data in the control script, it is possible to control the display data management function in the display data storage unit 51 of the television 1 . For example, the following cases are defined: that is, the acquired display data is saved so as not to be deleted from the display data storage unit 51; section 51; and the predetermined display data stored in the display data storage section 51 is deleted; and the like. the

如上所述,由于为了从显示用数据生成装置2获取显示用数据而需要一定的时间,因此最好是将常用(显示)的显示用数据保存在显示用数据存储部51中。  As described above, since it takes a certain amount of time to acquire display data from the display data generating device 2 , it is preferable to store frequently used (displayed) display data in the display data storage unit 51 . the

因此,显示用数据生成装置2将电视机1中常用的显示用数据发送给电视机1时,使其包含控制脚本而提供,该控制脚本定义了保存该显示用数据而使其不会从 显示用数据存储部51删除。  Therefore, when the display data generation device 2 transmits the display data commonly used in the television 1 to the television 1, it includes a control script that defines the storage of the display data so that it will not be displayed from It is deleted by the data storage unit 51 . the

电视机1按照上述控制脚本,可以始终将常用的显示用数据保存在显示用数据存储部51中,从而能够减少与显示用数据生成装置2的通信量,提高显示用数据显示处理的响应速度。  According to the above control script, the television 1 can always save frequently used display data in the display data storage unit 51, thereby reducing the communication amount with the display data generating device 2 and improving the response speed of display data display processing. the

显示用数据生成装置2对于每一个显示用数据,只要对电视机1中利用该显示用数据的利用频率进行计数,根据该利用频率确定显示用数据的保存方法,从而生成控制脚本即可。电视机1每利用(显示)一次显示用数据,就将显示用数据利用信息发送到显示用数据生成装置2。显示用数据生成装置2可以存储电视机1发送来的显示用数据利用信息,并对每一个显示用数据管理其利用频率。  For each piece of display data, the display data generating device 2 may count the frequency of use of the display data in the television 1, determine a storage method of the display data according to the frequency of use, and generate a control script. Every time the television 1 uses (displays) the display data, it transmits display data use information to the display data generating device 2 . The display data generating device 2 can store the display data usage information transmitted from the television 1, and manage the usage frequency for each display data. the

此外,由于显示用数据生成装置2根据利用频率而生成控制脚本的结构与上述实施方式1的“变形例1-变更操作选项的显示顺序”一项所述的结构相同,因此这里省略其说明。  In addition, since the configuration of the control script generated by the display data generation device 2 according to the frequency of use is the same as the configuration described in "Modification 1 - Changing the display order of operation options" of the first embodiment, its description is omitted here. the

实施方式5  Implementation Mode 5

变形例5-添加缩略图/幻灯片放映显示时的视觉和听觉效果  Modification 5 - Adding visual and auditory effects when displaying thumbnails/slideshows

在本发明的网络相册系统100中,显示用数据生成装置2通过提供控制脚本给电视机1,还可以对电视机1添加以下功能。即,根据电视机1正在显示的显示画面的内容(相册和照片)输出视觉效果和听觉效果的功能。  In the network album system 100 of the present invention, the display data generation device 2 can also add the following functions to the television 1 by providing the control script to the television 1 . That is, a function of outputting visual effects and auditory effects according to the contents of the display screen (albums and photos) being displayed on the television 1 . the

显示用数据生成装置2的控制脚本生成部80还能生成定义了输出效果或声音的动作的控制脚本,使得在电视机1显示相册时,按照显示的相册(或照片、动态图像)输出视觉(和听觉)的效果。所谓效果,是指显示(或不显示)目标物(例如幻灯片放映显示的相册的照片等)时对该目标物添加的视觉效果。具体而言,可考虑有淡入(淡出)、滑入(滑出)、放大、闪烁等各种效果。又,对于照片以外的目标物(人物等)添加转动画面等动画或人物变焦、全景拍摄、或者滚动等也包含在效果中。  The control script generating part 80 of the display data generating device 2 can also generate a control script defining an output effect or an action of a sound, so that when the TV 1 displays an album, visual ( and hearing) effects. The so-called effect refers to the visual effect added to the target when the target is displayed (or not displayed) (for example, a photo of an album displayed in a slide show, etc.). Specifically, various effects such as fade-in (fade-out), slide-in (slide-out), enlargement, and blinking are conceivable. In addition, effects such as adding animation such as a panning screen to objects (persons, etc.) other than photographs, or zooming, panning, or scrolling of people are also included in the effects. the

本实施方式中,例如图20所示,在相册信息表中对每一个相册管理声音文件的信息,对每一张照片管理效果的信息。  In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 , audio file information is managed for each album and effect information is managed for each photo in the album information table. the

“声音文件名”一栏表示与相册有关的声音文件的文件名。声音文件在电视机1缩略显示或幻灯片放映显示相册时,被用作声音(音乐或效果音等)而输出。  The column of "sound file name" indicates the file name of the sound file related to the album. The sound file is output as a sound (music, effect sound, etc.) when the TV 1 displays a photo album in thumbnail or slide show. the

“效果ID”一栏表示识别与相册中包含的各照片有关的效果用的效果ID。显示用数据生成装置2在控制脚本中描述与上述效果有关的电视机1的动作,以便电视机1执行由此效果ID确定的效果。  The "effect ID" column indicates an effect ID for identifying an effect associated with each photo included in the album. The display data generating device 2 describes the operation of the television 1 related to the above-mentioned effects in the control script so that the television 1 executes the effect specified by the effect ID. the

图46是表示生成添加了视觉和听觉效果的显示用数据的显示用数据生成装置 2的主要部分结构的框图。与图18的显示用数据生成装置2的不同点在于:控制脚本生成部80还包括声音确定脚本生成部(控制脚本生成单元)87和效果定义脚本生成部(控制脚本生成单元)88;以及存储部90中还包含声音文件存储部(效果信息存储部)95和效果信息存储部(效果信息存储部)96。  Fig. 46 is a block diagram showing the configuration of main parts of the display data generation device 2 for generating display data with added visual and auditory effects. The difference with the display data generation device 2 of FIG. 18 is that the control script generation part 80 also includes a sound determination script generation part (control script generation unit) 87 and an effect definition script generation part (control script generation unit) 88; The unit 90 further includes an audio file storage unit (effect information storage unit) 95 and an effect information storage unit (effect information storage unit) 96 . the

声音确定脚本生成部87生成声音确定脚本,该声音确定脚本包含应与相册的显示一起输出的声音文件的链接信息。效果定义脚本生成部88根据效果信息存储部96中存储的效果定义信息,生成电视机1可执行的效果定义脚本。  The audio specifying script generation unit 87 generates an audio specifying script including link information of an audio file to be output together with the display of the album. The effect definition script generation unit 88 generates an effect definition script executable by the television 1 based on the effect definition information stored in the effect information storage unit 96 . the

声音文件存储部95存储声音文件。声音文件以例如midi格式等电视机1可处理的文件格式存储。电视机1从显示用数据生成装置2获取上述声音文件,将其通过声音输出控制部25输出到声音输出部17(图1)。  The audio file storage unit 95 stores audio files. The sound files are stored in a file format that the television 1 can handle, such as midi format. The television 1 acquires the above-mentioned audio file from the display data generating device 2, and outputs it to the audio output section 17 ( FIG. 1 ) through the audio output control section 25 . the

或者,也可以是显示用数据生成部62在显示用数据7中包含声音文件,供给电视机1。  Alternatively, the display data generating unit 62 may include an audio file in the display data 7 and supply it to the television 1 . the

效果信息存储部96存储定义效果的效果定义信息。图47是表示效果信息存储部96中存储的效果定义脚本的示例图。  The effect information storage unit 96 stores effect definition information defining effects. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of an effect definition script stored in the effect information storage unit 96 . the

图47所示例子中,对每一种效果都准备六栏。  In the example shown in Fig. 47, six columns are prepared for each effect. the

栏C21的“effectID”表示上述效果ID。栏C22表示效果名称。例如,效果名称“Fill-opacity”表示改变对象物(这里是照片)的不透明度的效果。  "effectID" in the column C21 indicates the above-mentioned effect ID. Column C22 represents the effect name. For example, the effect name "Fill-opacity" indicates an effect of changing the opacity of an object (here, a photograph). the

栏C23的“dur”表示应用效果的时间(这里为秒)。例如,表示为3秒时,意味着施加该效果(不透明度的变化)3秒钟。  "dur" of the column C23 indicates the time (seconds here) to apply the effect. For example, when expressed as 3 seconds, it means that the effect (opacity change) is applied for 3 seconds. the

栏C24的“from”表示对象物的初始值。具体而言,表示应用效果前的照片的不透明度。“from”表示为0.8时,意味着以0.8的不透明度开始显示照片。再者,不透明度的值越小,则表示越透明。  "from" in the column C24 indicates the initial value of the object. Specifically, represents the opacity of the photo before the effect is applied. When "from" is expressed as 0.8, it means that the photo will start to be displayed at an opacity of 0.8. Furthermore, the smaller the opacity value, the more transparent it is. the

栏C25的“to”表示对象物的最终值。即,表示将效果应用了“dur”秒钟后的照片的不透明度。“to”表示为0时,意味着将照片变化到不透明度为0。  "to" in the column C25 indicates the final value of the object. That is, represents the opacity of the photo after the effect has been applied for "dur" seconds. When "to" is expressed as 0, it means to change the photo to an opacity of 0. the

栏C26的“end”表示电视机1中分配了使该效果的动作中断的功能的按键(按钮)。“end”的值对图1所示电视机1的操作部13中设置的一个按键进行确定。在电视机1执行效果的过程中按下“end”所确定的操作部13的按键时,电视机1就中断执行该效果。  "end" in the column C26 indicates a key (button) assigned a function of interrupting the operation of the effect in the television 1 . The value of "end" is determined for one key provided on the operation unit 13 of the television 1 shown in FIG. 1 . When the key of the operation part 13 determined by "end" is pressed while the TV 1 is executing the effect, the TV 1 stops executing the effect. the

例如,设将图47所示的效果ID“effect00”的效果应用于照片时,电视机1按照此效果定义脚本的内容进行幻灯片放映显示上述照片时,能使其不透明度在3秒钟内从0.8变化到0来进行显示。然后,到那种情况,当因用户操作而使得“y”按钮(黄 色按钮)被按下时,可以中断该效果。  For example, when the effect of the effect ID "effect00" shown in Figure 47 is applied to a photo, when TV 1 performs a slide show to display the above photo according to the content of the effect definition script, the opacity can be reduced within 3 seconds. Varies from 0.8 to 0 for display. Then, in that case, the effect can be interrupted when the "y" button (yellow button) is pressed due to user action. the

图47所示例子中表示了三种效果定义脚本,但不限于此,也可以存储各种效果定义脚本。  In the example shown in FIG. 47, three kinds of effect definition scripts are shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and various effect definition scripts may be stored. the

电视机1能按照操作内容定义脚本113(图3)中描述的操作功能定义脚本132执行上述动作。  The television 1 can execute the above-described actions in accordance with the operation function definition script 132 described in the operation content definition script 113 (FIG. 3). the

接着,详细说明生成添加了视觉和听觉效果的控制脚本的显示用数据生成装置2的动作。下面,举例说明显示用数据生成装置2根据电视机1的请求生成幻灯片放映显示用的显示用数据7的情况。然而,不限于此,也可在缩略显示的情况下生成添加了视觉和听觉效果的显示用数据7。  Next, the operation of the display data generating device 2 for generating a control script with added visual and auditory effects will be described in detail. Next, a case where the display data generating device 2 generates the display data 7 for slide show display in response to a request from the television 1 will be described as an example. However, it is not limited thereto, and the display data 7 with added visual and auditory effects may be generated in the case of thumbnail display. the

图48是表示本实施方式的显示用数据生成装置2生成显示用数据的处理流程的流程图。图48与图27的不同点在于:在脚本合成部86于S210进行合成之前,控制脚本生成部80的声音确定脚本生成部87生成声音确定脚本,效果定义脚本生成部88生成效果定义脚本;以及显示用数据生成部62除提取S211的显示对象物之外,还提取声音文件。此外,S201~S213中,由于除将提取出的声音文件也合成到显示用数据中这一点外,与图27的处理相同,所以这里不再重复说明。  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for generating display data by the display data generating device 2 according to the present embodiment. The difference between Fig. 48 and Fig. 27 is that: before the script synthesizing section 86 synthesizes in S210, the sound determination script generation section 87 of the control script generation section 80 generates a sound determination script, and the effect definition script generation section 88 generates an effect definition script; and The display data generating unit 62 extracts a sound file in addition to the object to be displayed in S211. In addition, in S201 to S213, except for the point that the extracted audio file is also synthesized into the display data, the processing is the same as that of FIG. 27 , so the description will not be repeated here. the

图49是表示本实施方式的模式数据存储部91中存储的模式数据171和控制脚本110中分别包含的布局定义脚本112′和布局定义脚本112的例子的示意图。  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a layout definition script 112 ′ and a layout definition script 112 respectively included in the pattern data 171 and the control script 110 stored in the pattern data storage unit 91 according to the present embodiment. the

本实施方式中,在显示用数据生成装置2的模式数据选择部61从模式数据存储部91获取的模式数据171中,布局定义脚本112’还包含图像确定脚本274、相册基本信息275、和声音确定脚本279。又,图像确定脚本274对应于幻灯照片而包含作为效果雏形的效果模式274a。  In this embodiment, in the pattern data 171 acquired by the pattern data selection unit 61 of the display data generation device 2 from the pattern data storage unit 91, the layout definition script 112' further includes an image determination script 274, album basic information 275, and sound OK script 279. Also, the image specifying script 274 includes an effect pattern 274a as a prototype of the effect corresponding to the slide show photo. the

此外,图像确定脚本274(284)和声音确定脚本279(289)是显示对象物确定脚本121的具体例子,相册基本信息275(285)是属性信息确定脚本123的具体例子。  Also, image specifying script 274 ( 284 ) and sound specifying script 279 ( 289 ) are specific examples of display object specifying script 121 , and album basic information 275 ( 285 ) is a specific example of attribute information specifying script 123 . the

控制脚本生成部80在S209(图48)后,接着在图49所示的声音确定脚本279中嵌入声音文件名(即该声音文件的链接信息),而生成声音确定脚本289(S209a)。根据已由显示对象ID获取部71获取的相册ID(和照片ID),从存储在网络相册DB8中的相册信息表提取应嵌入的声音文件名。例如,图20所示的例子中,确定对相册ID“0125478225142584”的相册的第一张照片作幻灯片放映显示时,控制脚本生成部80根据上述相册ID提取声音文件名“bgm1.midi”,将该声音文件的链接信息嵌入声音特定脚本279。电视机1根据由此生成的声音确定脚本289,能在执行幻灯片放映显示的过程中,从显示用数据生成装置2获取声音文件“bgm1.midi”并进 行再现。  After S209 (FIG. 48), the control script generating unit 80 embeds the sound file name (that is, the link information of the sound file) in the sound specifying script 279 shown in FIG. 49 to generate the sound specifying script 289 (S209a). Based on the album ID (and photo ID) acquired by the display object ID acquisition unit 71, the audio file name to be embedded is extracted from the album information table stored in the network album DB 8 . For example, in the example shown in FIG. 20 , when it is determined that the first photo in the album with the album ID "0125478225142584" is to be displayed as a slide show, the control script generator 80 extracts the sound file name "bgm1.midi" according to the album ID, The link information of the sound file is embedded in the sound specific script 279 . The television 1 can obtain and reproduce the audio file "bgm1.midi" from the display data generating device 2 during the slideshow display based on the audio definition script 289 thus generated. the

接着,控制脚本生成部80在效果模式274a中嵌入效果的属性信息,并生成效果定义脚本284a(S209b)。  Next, the control script generating unit 80 embeds the attribute information of the effect in the effect schema 274a, and generates the effect definition script 284a (S209b). the

图50是表示图49所示的效果模式274a和效果定义脚本284a的具体示例图。被“_”和“_”夹在中间的部分分别对应于图47所示的效果定义脚本表中的效果的属性信息(栏C21~C26)。即,控制脚本生成部80从各栏分别提取确定效果的六种属性信息,并嵌入“_***_”的部分,从而生成效果定义脚本284a。  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect schema 274a and the effect definition script 284a shown in FIG. 49 . Portions sandwiched by "_" and "_" respectively correspond to attribute information of effects in the effect definition script table shown in FIG. 47 (columns C21 to C26). That is, the control script generating unit 80 extracts six types of attribute information specifying effects from each column, and embeds them in the part of "_***_", thereby generating the effect definition script 284a. the

用上述图20的例子具体说明。根据电视机1的显示用数据请求消息6,确定对相册ID“0125478225142584”的相册的第一张照片(照片ID=No.1)进行幻灯片放映显示。控制脚本生成部80根据上述相册ID和照片ID,对效果进行确定。上述例子中,由于上述相册ID和照片ID与效果ID“effect00”关联,所以将效果ID“effect00”的效果确定作为对上述照片添加的效果。  It will be specifically described using the example of FIG. 20 described above. According to the display data request message 6 of the television 1, it is determined that the first photo (photo ID=No. 1) of the album of the album ID "0125478225142584" is to be displayed in a slide show. The control script generating unit 80 specifies effects based on the above-mentioned album ID and photo ID. In the above example, since the above-mentioned album ID and photo ID are associated with the effect ID "effect00", the effect of the effect ID "effect00" is determined as the effect added to the above-mentioned photo. the

接着,控制脚本生成部80根据所确定的效果ID,从效果信息存储部96的效果定义脚本表的各栏提取效果的属性信息。控制脚本生成部80将提取的各属性信息嵌入对应的位置,从而生成效果定义脚本284a。图50的效果定义脚本284a中,描述了将与对象物即照片重叠的白色四边形的不透明度在3秒钟内从0.8变更到0。然后,按下电视机1的操作部13的黄色按键(key(y))时,给黄色按键分配中断变更处理的功能,使其中断该变更处理。  Next, the control script generation unit 80 extracts the attribute information of the effect from each column of the effect definition script table in the effect information storage unit 96 based on the specified effect ID. The control script generating unit 80 embeds each piece of extracted attribute information in a corresponding position, thereby generating the effect definition script 284a. In the effect definition script 284 a of FIG. 50 , it is described that the opacity of the white rectangle overlapping with the photograph, which is the object, is changed from 0.8 to 0 within 3 seconds. Then, when the yellow key (key (y)) of the operation unit 13 of the television 1 is pressed, a function of interrupting the change process is assigned to the yellow key, and the change process is interrupted. the

最后,显示用数据生成部62将控制脚本生成部80生成的控制脚本110、显示对象物111(幻灯照片)、以及其它对象物(声音文件等)合成,生成显示用数据7。  Finally, the display data generation unit 62 synthesizes the control script 110 generated by the control script generation unit 80 , the display object 111 (slideshow photo), and other objects (sound files, etc.) to generate the display data 7 . the

由以上可知,如果电视机1获取上述显示用数据7,则能按照包含上述声音确定脚本289和/或效果定义脚本284a的控制脚本110,提示用户对缩略图或幻灯照片添加听觉和/或视觉效果。具体而言,图5的S11中,在幻灯片放映显示用数据内描述有效果定义脚本284a时,电视机1利用效果定义脚本284a中定义的方法显示照片。  As can be seen from the above, if the TV set 1 acquires the above-mentioned display data 7, it can prompt the user to add auditory and/or visual effects to thumbnails or slideshow photos according to the control script 110 including the above-mentioned sound determination script 289 and/or effect definition script 284a. Effect. Specifically, in S11 of FIG. 5 , when the effect definition script 284a is described in the slideshow display data, the television 1 displays the photo by the method defined in the effect definition script 284a. the

此外,在本实施方式中,控制脚本110能规定效果处理开始的定时。例如,在上述例子中,由于对照片的显示/不显示添加了效果,因此将照片切换时作为效果处理开始的定时而描述在控制脚本110中。或者,在缩略图显示画面中,在光标位于一个缩略图像期间想要对该缩略图像添加放大的动作时,控制脚本110中也可以将光标接触时定义为效果处理的开始定时。  In addition, in the present embodiment, the control script 110 can specify the timing at which the effect processing starts. For example, in the above example, since an effect is added to the display/non-display of the photo, the time when the photo is switched is described in the control script 110 as the timing at which the effect processing starts. Alternatively, in the thumbnail display screen, when the cursor is positioned on a thumbnail image and the thumbnail image needs to be zoomed in, the control script 110 may also define the time when the cursor is touched as the start timing of the effect processing. the

又,如上所述,若利用控制脚本110描述效果处理,则能够对每一个目标物指 定添加效果的对象。从而,可以将添加效果处理的范围仅限定于目标物的范围内,而不是整个画面。因而,与对整个画面进行效果处理的情况相比,能够大大减轻电视机1的效果处理的负荷。  Also, as described above, if the control script 110 is used to describe the effect processing, it is possible to specify the object to which the effect is added for each object. Therefore, the range of adding effect processing can be limited only to the range of the target object instead of the whole screen. Therefore, compared with the case of performing effect processing on the entire screen, the load of effect processing on the television 1 can be greatly reduced. the

此外,幻灯片放映显示用数据中,也可以不用使每一张照片的所有显示用数据都含有声音确定脚本289。例如,也可这样记载控制脚本110,使得仅在显示第一张照片用的显示用数据中包含声音确定脚本289,并且在显示后续的照片时也继续再现。  In addition, in the data for slide show display, it is not necessary to include the audio specifying script 289 in all the data for display of each photo. For example, the control script 110 may be written such that the audio specifying script 289 is included only in the display data for displaying the first picture, and playback is continued when the subsequent pictures are displayed. the

又,如上文所述,本实施方式中,显示用数据生成装置2在效果定义脚本284a中描述与按下黄色按键的事件相对应的中断效果应用(效果处理)的动作。由此,用户通过按键操作,就可以在任意定时进行中断效果处理。  Also, as described above, in the present embodiment, the display data generation device 2 describes in the effect definition script 284a the operation of interrupting the application of the effect (effect processing) corresponding to the event of pressing the yellow button. As a result, the user can interrupt effect processing at any timing by pressing a button. the

若在幻灯片放映显示用数据的处理过程中进行效果处理,就会增加电视机1的负荷,对用户的按键操作的响应变慢,存在操作性欠佳的问题。这是因为,通常效果处理的CPU负荷很大。  If the effect processing is performed during the processing of the data for slide show display, the load on the television 1 will be increased, and the response to the user's key operation will be slowed down, resulting in poor operability. This is because, usually, the CPU load of effect processing is large. the

然而,根据上述结构,一按压黄色按键就中断效果处理,电视机1立即显示对象照片。因此,可以省去用户不希望的效果处理,减轻电视机1的负荷,提高电视机1的处理效率。  However, according to the above configuration, when the yellow button is pressed, the effect processing is interrupted, and the television 1 immediately displays the target picture. Therefore, effect processing not desired by the user can be omitted, the load on the television 1 can be reduced, and the processing efficiency of the television 1 can be improved. the

再者,成为触发中断处理的事件不限于按压黄色按键。例如,控制脚本生成部80也可以这样描述脚本,使得将“调出操作菜单的GUI画面时”当作触发,而中断效果处理。  Furthermore, the event that triggers the interrupt processing is not limited to pressing the yellow button. For example, the control script generating unit 80 may describe the script so that "when the GUI screen of the operation menu is called" is used as a trigger to suspend the effect processing. the

又,在对黄色按键分配调出(显示)操作菜单的GUI画面的功能时,若将“按下黄色按键时”作为中断效果处理的条件(end=“accessKey(y)”),则其结果这样描述脚本,使得将“调出操作菜单的GUI画面时”作为触发,而中断效果处理。  Also, when assigning the function of calling (displaying) the GUI screen of the operation menu to the yellow key, if "when the yellow key is pressed" is used as the condition for interrupting the effect processing (end="accessKey(y)"), the result will be The script is described in such a way that "when the GUI screen of the operation menu is called" is used as a trigger, and the effect processing is interrupted. the

还可这样描述脚本,使得即使是在效果处理过程中,只要有指示转移到下一幻灯片或上一幻灯片的按键操作,就中断效果,并立即转移到指定的幻灯片。  It is also possible to describe the script so that even during the effect processing, as long as there is a key operation indicating to transfer to the next slide or the previous slide, the effect is interrupted and the designated slide is immediately transferred. the

而且,当用户不希望执行增加负荷的效果处理时,也可以显示能从上述操作菜单选择有无效果而构成的GUI画面。在这种情况下,这样描述脚本,使得用户选择无效果时,电视机1从一开始就不执行效果处理。  Furthermore, when the user does not wish to perform effect processing that increases the load, a GUI screen configured to enable selection of whether or not to have an effect may be displayed from the above-mentioned operation menu. In this case, the script is described such that when the user selects no effect, the television 1 does not execute effect processing from the beginning. the

或者,也可以这样描述控制脚本110,使得即使不调出上述操作菜单,利用按下设置于电视机1的操作部13的按键的简单操作,也可以切换有无效果。  Alternatively, the control script 110 may be described so that the presence or absence of the effect can be switched by a simple operation of pressing a button provided on the operation unit 13 of the television 1 without calling the above-mentioned operation menu. the

图51是表示控制脚本110的具体示例图,该控制脚本110包含为了根据用户的按键操作来切换有无效果而定义电视机1的动作的操作功能定义脚本132。  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific example of the control script 110 including an operation function definition script 132 that defines the operation of the television 1 in order to switch the presence or absence of an effect according to the user's key operation. the

在图51所示的例子中,控制脚本110包括:效果定义脚本284b;控制效果定义脚本284b的执行的操作功能定义脚本132e;以及定义了根据用户的操作切换操作功能定义脚本132e的内容的动作的操作功能定义脚本132f。  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the control script 110 includes: an effect definition script 284b; an operation function definition script 132e that controls the execution of the effect definition script 284b; The operation function definition script 132f. the

操作功能定义脚本132e中有如下定义:即,在显示用数据7的处理初始化时,该脚本内定义的效果标记表示为“1”的情况下,执行效果定义脚本284b定义的效果。  The operation function definition script 132e is defined to execute the effect defined by the effect definition script 284b when the effect flag defined in the script indicates "1" when the processing of the display data 7 is initialized. the

而且,在操作功能定义脚本132f中,定义了按下操作部13的蓝色按键(key(b))时切换上述效果标记的动作。  Furthermore, in the operation function definition script 132f, an operation of switching the above-mentioned effect flag when the blue key (key (b)) of the operation unit 13 is pressed is defined. the

若按照这样的控制脚本110,则电视机1根据用户按下蓝色按键,能够切换有无效果。  According to such a control script 110 , the television 1 can switch whether or not to have an effect when the user presses the blue button. the

此外,上述图51的例子中,采用了通过变更效果定义脚本284b的属性“visibility”来控制有无效果的结构,但控制脚本110的描述方法并不限于此。例如,电视机1按照描述了将效果定义脚本284b的属性“display”的值变为“none”的动作的脚本,能够使效果无效。这种情况与visibility属性有关的SVG整体的描绘处理相比,电视机1可以高速地进行描绘。  In addition, in the example of FIG. 51 mentioned above, the structure which controls presence or absence of an effect by changing the attribute "visibility" of the effect definition script 284b is adopted, but the description method of the control script 110 is not limited to this. For example, the TV 1 can disable the effect according to a script describing an action of changing the value of the attribute "display" of the effect definition script 284b to "none". In this case, the television 1 can perform rendering at a higher speed than the rendering process of the entire SVG related to the visibility attribute. the

此外,上述说明中,阐述了显示照片等静止图像时应用效果和声音的情况,但不限于此,也可在缩略显示或幻灯片放映显示动态图像时,对该动态图像应用效果和声音。  In addition, in the above description, the case where effects and sounds are applied when displaying still images such as photographs is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and effects and sounds may be applied to moving images when displaying moving images in thumbnail display or slide show. the

又,上述说明中,阐述了对一个目标物定义一个效果处理的情况,但不限于此。也可对一个目标物预先在控制脚本110内描述多种效果定义脚本。由此,用户不仅能够从菜单选择效果的有效/无效,还可以从上述多种效果选择打算添加到该目标物的希望效果。  Also, in the above description, a case where one effect processing is defined for one target object has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of effect definition scripts may be described in advance in the control script 110 for one object. In this way, the user can not only select whether to enable/disable the effect from the menu, but also can select a desired effect to be added to the object from the above-mentioned plurality of effects. the

例如,面向男性和面向女性准备两种以某一人物的春天为主题的动画(效果),并在控制脚本中预先定义。然后,电视机1按照该控制脚本,就可以对上述角色添加上述两种动画中用户所选择的动画并显示。  For example, two kinds of animations (effects) based on the spring theme of a certain character are prepared for males and females, and are defined in advance in the control script. Then, according to the control script, the television 1 can add and display the animation selected by the user among the above two animations to the above-mentioned character. the

又,本实施方式中采用了显示用数据生成装置2具有效果定义脚本表并将效果定义脚本包含在显示用数据7中提供给电视机1的结构,但不限于此。即使是电视机1具有效果定义脚本表的情况,也可以得到同样的效果。即,显示用数据生成装置2只要对应于照片描述效果ID作为表示对哪张照片添加哪种效果的脚本即可。  Also, in this embodiment, the display data generating device 2 has an effect definition script table and provides the TV 1 with the effect definition script included in the display data 7, but it is not limited to this. Even if the TV 1 has an effect definition script table, the same effect can be obtained. That is, the display data generating device 2 may be used as a script indicating which effect is added to which photo in correspondence with the photo description effect ID. the

电视机1根据显示用数据7中包含的效果ID,参照本身具有的效果定义脚本表,能够提示用户向适当的照片添加适当的效果。  Based on the effect ID included in the display data 7 , the television 1 can refer to its own effect definition script table, and can prompt the user to add an appropriate effect to an appropriate photo. the

由此,可以实现能够按照用户的喜好提供各个用户能更好地欣赏的多样化相册内容的网络相册系统。  As a result, a network album system capable of providing various album contents that can be better enjoyed by each user according to the user's preference can be realized. the

变形例6-效果有效时的字符显示处理  Modification 6 - Character display processing when the effect is valid

在电视机1利用上述方法添加效果并幻灯片放映显示相册的照片时,除添加效果处理并描绘照片的处理之外,有时还进行字符显示处理。所谓字符显示处理,是指将显示用数据7中包含的文本数据与照片重叠而显示的处理。  When the television 1 adds effects to display photos in an album in a slide show using the above-mentioned method, character display processing may be performed in addition to the processing of adding effects and drawing photos. The character display process refers to a process of superimposing and displaying text data included in the display data 7 on a photograph. the

图52是表示在电视机1的显示部15中显示的幻灯片放映显示画面的示例图。如图52所示,显示幻灯片放映显示画面时,除显示照片外,还显示了表示遥控器的操作指南的操作信息152、表示幻灯片放映的再现状态的再现状态显示153、照片标题154、以及对照片添加的备注155。这些字符在显示用数据7的布局定义信息中,作为文本数据进行描述,通过电视机1对显示用数据7进行处理而显示。此外,文本数据并不限于上述内容。  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a slide show display screen displayed on the display unit 15 of the television 1 . As shown in FIG. 52, when the slide show display screen is displayed, in addition to displaying photos, operation information 152 indicating the operation guide of the remote controller, playback status display 153 indicating the playback status of the slide show, photo titles 154, And a comment 155 added to the photo. These characters are described as text data in the layout definition information of the display data 7 , and the display data 7 is processed by the television 1 to be displayed. In addition, text data is not limited to the above. the

上述字符显示处理与效果处理一样,是增加比较大的负荷的处理。因此,电视机1进行效果为有效的幻灯片放映显示处理时,每次电视机1描绘幻灯片,就必须执行效果处理和字符显示处理的双方的处理。在这种情况下,由于字符显示处理的负荷,使得特意添加的效果处理无法顺利地进行,或者使得来自遥控器(操作部13)的按键操作的响应变差,从而有损用户的便利性。  The above-described character display processing is a processing that adds a relatively large load, similarly to the effect processing. Therefore, when the television 1 performs slide show display processing in which the effect is effective, both the effect processing and the character display processing must be executed every time the television 1 draws a slide show. In this case, due to the load of the character display processing, the intentionally added effect processing cannot be performed smoothly, or the response of the key operation from the remote controller (operation unit 13 ) is deteriorated, thereby impairing user convenience. the

因此,本实施方式中,对在效果有效时的幻灯片放映显示处理中分散带给电视机1的负荷使得电视机1的动作顺利而采用的办法进行说明。  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a method for distributing the load on the television 1 in the slide show display process when the effect is effective to smooth the operation of the television 1 will be described. the

使负荷在时间上分散用的控制脚本  Control script for distributing load over time

本实施方式中,在显示幻灯片放映时,电视机1利用控制脚本,控制电视机1中各处理的执行时间,使得不同时执行效果处理和字符显示处理。具体而言,在控制脚本中作如下描述:即,在效果为有效的情况下,使得效果处理结束后再开始字符显示处理。  In this embodiment, when displaying a slide show, the television 1 uses a control script to control the execution time of each processing in the television 1 so that the effect processing and the character display processing are not executed simultaneously. Specifically, the following description is made in the control script: that is, when the effect is valid, the character display process is started after the effect process is completed. the

图53是表示定义电视机1的动作的控制脚本110以使效果处理结束后再开始字符显示处理的具体示例图。  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of the control script 110 defining the operation of the television 1 so that the character display process starts after the effect process is completed. the

在图53所示的例子中,控制脚本110包括:操作功能定义脚本132g;效果定义脚本284b;以及显示对象物确定脚本121a。  In the example shown in FIG. 53 , the control script 110 includes: an operation function definition script 132g; an effect definition script 284b; and a display object determination script 121a. the

显示对象物确定脚本121a是对成为显示对象的文本数据进行确定的字符确定脚本。  The display object specifying script 121a is a character specifying script for specifying text data to be displayed. the

操作功能定义脚本132g中描述有命令执行字符显示处理的脚本以及定义其执 行定时的脚本。具体而言,操作功能定义脚本132g中定义了电视机1的动作,使得效果定义脚本284b的效果处理结束时,将显示对象物确定脚本121a的字符进行显示。  In the operation function definition script 132g, a script for command execution character display processing and a script for defining its execution timing are described. Specifically, the operations of the television 1 are defined in the operation function definition script 132g so that when the effect processing of the effect definition script 284b ends, the characters of the display object specifying script 121a are displayed. the

此外,由脚本定义的效果处理结束的时刻,可以是效果处理执行到最后的时刻,也可以是由于用户操作等而中断的时刻。  In addition, the time when the effect processing defined by the script ends may be the time when the effect processing is executed to the end, or may be the time when it is interrupted by user operation or the like. the

电视机1按照上述控制脚本110必须执行效果处理和字符显示处理的双方的处理时,可以先执行效果处理,结束之后再执行字符显示处理。即,可以使高负荷的处理在时间上分散。从而,由于一时负荷不再集中,因此能够消除添加的效果处理无法顺利地进行或者来自遥控器(操作部13)的按键操作的响应变差等问题。  When the television 1 needs to execute both the effect processing and the character display processing according to the above-mentioned control script 110, the effect processing can be executed first, and then the character display processing can be executed after completion. That is, high-load processing can be distributed temporally. Therefore, since the load is no longer concentrated for a while, it is possible to solve the problem that the added effect processing cannot be performed smoothly or the response of the key operation from the remote controller (the operation unit 13 ) is deteriorated. the

此外,虽然举例说明了效果处理和作为应在时间上分散的高负荷处理的字符显示处理,但并不限于此。显示用数据生成装置2可以在控制脚本110中描述最好是不与效果处理同时执行的任何高负荷的处理的执行定时。例如,显示用数据生成装置2也可以在控制脚本中作如下描述:即,使得作为实施方式1中说明的电视机1的功能的操作菜单显示处理开始后,中断执行效果处理。  Furthermore, although effect processing and character display processing as high-load processing that should be temporally distributed have been exemplified, it is not limited thereto. The display data generation device 2 can describe in the control script 110 the execution timing of any high-load processing that is preferably not executed simultaneously with the effect processing. For example, the display data generation device 2 may describe in the control script that after the operation menu display process as the function of the television 1 described in the first embodiment is started, the execution of the effect process is interrupted. the

显示用数据生成装置的结构  Display structure of data generation device

本实施方式中,显示用数据生成装置2(图46)根据来自电视机1的请求而生成包含效果处理的显示用数据7。  In this embodiment, the display data generating device 2 ( FIG. 46 ) generates display data 7 including effect processing in response to a request from the television 1 . the

在这种情况下,显示用数据生成装置2生成定义电视机1的动作(及其定时)的控制脚本110,使得不应在上述效果处理过程中执行的处理,在上述效果处理之后执行。对于不应在效果处理过程中执行的高负荷的处理,将描述有使其不与效果处理同时执行的定时的模式数据,预先存储于模式数据存储部91。具体而言,模式数据选择部61可以从模式数据存储部91选择模式数据,该模式数据包含描述了在效果处理之后执行字符显示处理的脚本以及描述了一旦操作菜单显示处理开始就中断正在执行的效果处理的脚本。控制脚本生成部80依据该模式数据生成控制脚本110。  In this case, the display data generating device 2 generates the control script 110 defining the operation (and its timing) of the television 1 so that the processing that should not be executed during the above-mentioned effect processing is executed after the above-mentioned effect processing. For high-load processing that should not be executed during the effect processing, pattern data describing a timing not to execute simultaneously with the effect processing is stored in the pattern data storage unit 91 in advance. Specifically, the pattern data selection section 61 can select from the pattern data storage section 91 pattern data including a script describing execution of character display processing after effect processing and a script describing interrupting execution once operation menu display processing starts. Script for effects processing. The control script generating unit 80 generates the control script 110 based on the pattern data. the

从而,可以控制电视机1,使得在时间上错开执行字符显示处理或操作菜单显示处理等高负荷的处理与效果处理。由此,能够避免电视机1的负荷的集中,使得用户顺利地操作电视机1。  Therefore, it is possible to control the television 1 so that high-load processing such as character display processing and operation menu display processing and effect processing are executed in a time-shifted manner. Thereby, concentration of load on the television 1 can be avoided, allowing the user to operate the television 1 smoothly. the

或者,也可以预先在存储部90中登录将高负荷的处理与该处理的开始和结束定时对应地记录的列表。控制脚本生成部80在生成包含上述列表中登录的处理的控制脚本时,根据上述列表生成所述控制脚本,使其在与该处理对应的定时执行(中 断)。  Alternatively, a list in which high-load processing is associated with the start and end timing of the processing may be registered in the storage unit 90 in advance. When generating a control script including a process registered in the list, the control script generation unit 80 generates the control script based on the list and executes (interrupts) at a timing corresponding to the process. the

此外,显示用数据生成装置2可以根据所受理的显示用数据请求消息6的内容,生成与效果处理有关的控制脚本。  In addition, the display data generation device 2 can generate a control script related to effect processing based on the content of the received display data request message 6 . the

例如,如图7所示,当接收到包含机型名称和软件版本信息的显示用数据请求消息6时,相关信息获取部73获取该消息。  For example, as shown in FIG. 7 , when a display data request message 6 including model name and software version information is received, the related information acquiring unit 73 acquires the message. the

关于与机型和软件版本对应的功能的信息预先存储在存储部90中,因而,显示用数据生成装置2(模式数据选择部61/控制脚本生成部80)根据机型名称和软件版本信息,可以确定电视机1的功能。具体而言,能够判定电视机1是否具有输出视觉效果(效果处理)和听觉效果(效果音和音乐等)的功能。  The information about the function corresponding to the model and the software version is prestored in the storage unit 90, therefore, the display data generation device 2 (pattern data selection unit 61/control script generation unit 80) based on the model name and software version information, The function of the television 1 can be determined. Specifically, it can be determined whether or not the television 1 has a function of outputting visual effects (effect processing) and auditory effects (sound effects, music, etc.). the

电视机1在幻灯片放映(缩略图)显示网络相册的照片时,仅在判定为是可进行效果处理或声音输出的类型的情况下,控制脚本生成部80才生成进行效果处理或声音输出用的控制脚本。或者,在判定为电视机1是可进行效果处理或声音输出的类型的情况下,模式数据选择部61选择包含有进行效果处理或声音输出用的脚本的模式数据。  When the television 1 is displaying the photos in the web album in a slide show (thumbnail), the control script generation unit 80 generates an image for effect processing or sound output only if it is determined that it is a type capable of effect processing or sound output. control script. Alternatively, when it is determined that the television 1 is of a type capable of effect processing or audio output, the pattern data selection unit 61 selects pattern data including a scenario for performing effect processing or audio output. the

反之,在判定为电视机1是无法执行声音输出或效果处理的类型的情况下,由于不需要效果处理或声音输出有关的描述,因此,控制脚本生成部80生成不包含这些描述的幻灯片放映(缩略图)显示照片用的控制脚本。  Conversely, when it is determined that the television 1 is of a type that cannot perform sound output or effect processing, since descriptions related to effect processing or sound output are unnecessary, the control script generation unit 80 generates a slide show that does not include these descriptions. (Thumbnail) Control script for displaying photos. the

由此,显示用数据生成装置2根据电视机1的规格,可以除去不需要的描述,能够始终生成并提供对于请求方的电视机1来说是最佳状态的控制脚本。  Thereby, the display data generation device 2 can remove unnecessary descriptions according to the specifications of the television 1, and can always generate and provide a control script that is optimal for the requesting television 1. the

实施方式6  Implementation mode 6

变形例7-电视机1中的控制脚本的变更功能  Modification 7 - Change function of control script in TV 1

上述各实施方式中说明了以下情况:即,在网络相册系统100中,位于提供显示用数据的服务器一侧的显示用数据生成装置2的控制脚本生成部80,根据上述模式数据生成控制脚本,电视机1按照该控制脚本进行动作。  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a case has been described in which, in the network album system 100, the control script generating unit 80 of the display data generating device 2 located on the side of the server providing the display data generates a control script based on the above-mentioned pattern data, The television 1 operates according to the control script. the

然而,本发明的网络相册系统100不限于上述结构。也可以采用如下结构:即,作为接收显示用数据7的客户端的电视机1,用本装置对显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本的一部分进行变更,按照变更后的控制脚本进行动作。  However, the web album system 100 of the present invention is not limited to the above structure. A configuration may also be employed in which the TV 1 as a client receiving the display data 7 uses its own device to change a part of the control script provided by the display data generating device 2 and operate according to the changed control script. the

具体而言,在显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本中包含定义电视机1的动作的操作内容定义脚本113,使得电视机1可以更改一部分该控制脚本,或者将其替换成其它值。  Specifically, the operation content definition script 113 defining the operation of the TV 1 is included in the control script provided by the display data generating device 2 so that the TV 1 can modify a part of the control script or replace it with other values. the

电视机1的显示用数据执行处理部40按照上述操作内容定义脚本113,根据 预存在本装置中的信息,能够更改显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本的一部分,或将其替换成其它值。  The display data execution processing unit 40 of the television 1 can modify a part of the control script provided by the display data generation device 2 or replace it with other values according to the above-mentioned operation content definition script 113, based on the information pre-stored in the device. . the

这时,显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本内的操作内容定义脚本113中,包含指示参照和获取作为客户端的电视机1的信息的参考脚本,使得替换成电视机1中保存的信息或根据该信息的内容进行适当的变更。电视机1的显示用数据执行处理部40按照上述参考脚本,获取指定的本装置的信息,将所获取的信息作为变量值传输到例如布局定义脚本112其结果,将从本装置内获取的信息嵌入到控制脚本中,从而完成显示用数据执行处理部40最终要执行(要显示)的控制脚本。  At this time, the operation content definition script 113 in the control script provided by the display data generation device 2 includes a reference script for instructing to refer to and acquire information of the TV 1 as the client, so that the information stored in the TV 1 or Make appropriate changes according to the content of this information. The display data execution processing unit 40 of the television 1 obtains the information of the specified device according to the above-mentioned reference script, and transfers the obtained information as a variable value to, for example, the layout definition script 112. As a result, the information obtained from the device Embedded in the control script, the control script to be finally executed (displayed) by the display data execution processing unit 40 is completed. the

由此,由于并不仅仅对从服务器一侧指定的显示用数据7进行处理,还对在客户端一侧变更的显示用数据7进行处理,并提供给用户,因此,可以向客户端一侧的各装置以及该装置的用户提供更加特性化的服务。从而,可以构建能够更加灵活地应对多样化的每一个用户的需求的网络相册系统100。  As a result, not only the display data 7 designated from the server side but also the display data 7 changed on the client side are processed and provided to the user. Each device and the user of the device provide more personalized services. Therefore, it is possible to construct the network album system 100 capable of more flexibly responding to various needs of each user. the

下面,以电视机1根据显示用数据7显示图44(a)所示的相册历史画面440a的情况为例,说明电视机1的动作。电视机1按照参考脚本对从显示用数据生成装置2接收的控制脚本的一部分进行变更,按照变更后的控制脚本显示相册历史画面。  Next, the operation of the television 1 will be described by taking the case where the television 1 displays the album history screen 440a shown in FIG. 44(a) based on the display data 7 as an example. The television 1 changes a part of the control script received from the display data generating device 2 according to the reference script, and displays the album history screen according to the changed control script. the

应用例1-变更历史的显示件数  Application example 1- Display number of change history

电视机1如图6所示,在相册ID存储部53中存储用户过去浏览过的相册的相册ID(从最近浏览过的相册起的最多三件)。电视机1向显示用数据生成装置2请求显示相册历史画面的显示用数据7时,将相册ID存储部53中存储的相册ID传输到显示用数据生成装置2(显示用数据请求消息6)。  As shown in FIG. 6 , the television 1 stores album IDs of albums that the user has browsed in the past (up to three albums from the most recent album) in the album ID storage unit 53 . When requesting the display data 7 for displaying the album history screen from the display data generator 2, the television 1 transmits the album ID stored in the album ID storage unit 53 to the display data generator 2 (display data request message 6). the

显示用数据生成装置2根据上述显示用数据请求消息6,生成相册历史画面的显示用数据7并提供给电视机1,该相册历史画面显示电视机1中过去浏览过的最近三件与相册相关的历史信息。对于该显示用数据7,在控制脚本中定义有相册历史画面的布局、显示该画面所需的电视机1的动作等。  The display data generation device 2 generates the display data 7 of the album history screen according to the above display data request message 6 and provides it to the TV 1. The photo album history screen displays the last three items browsed in the TV 1 in the past related to the album. historical information. As for the display data 7 , the layout of the album history screen, the operation of the television 1 necessary for displaying the screen, and the like are defined in the control script. the

本实施方式中,若接收到的控制脚本中包含具有参考脚本的操作内容定义脚本113,则电视机1按照操作内容定义脚本113,利用本装置中保存的数据而对上述控制脚本的一部分进行变更。图54是表示包含参考脚本的控制脚本的具体示例图。参考脚本160定义了获取设定信息“历史显示件数”的值并将该值作为变量值“h_max”。电视机1获取存储在图8的相关信息表中的“历史显示件数”的信息。  In this embodiment, if the received control script includes the operation content definition script 113 including the reference script, the TV 1 changes a part of the above control script according to the operation content definition script 113 using the data stored in the device. . Fig. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script including a reference script. The reference script 160 defines the acquisition of the value of the setting information "historical display number" and takes this value as the variable value "h_max". The television 1 acquires the information of the "number of historical displays" stored in the related information table of FIG. 8 . the

然后,在图8所示的例子中,电视机1检测到历史显示件数为两件,变更控制脚本使得只显示上述两件量的相册历史。具体而言,将相册历史信息的visibility 属性变为“hidden”。  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 8 , the television 1 detects that the number of history display items is two, and changes the control script so that only the album history of the above-mentioned two items is displayed. Specifically, change the visibility attribute of the album history information to "hidden". the

而且,电视机1也能变更控制脚本,使得为了从相册历史画面选择相册而分配给数字按键的相册选择功能无效。即,由于显示的相册历史为两件,因此变更控制脚本,使得只有数字按键“1”和“2”有效。即,电视机1可以根据历史显示件数来变更控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了如实施方式3所述的按下的按钮和该按钮被按下时要执行的动作。  Furthermore, the television 1 can also change the control script so that the album selection function assigned to the number keys for selecting an album from the album history screen is disabled. That is, since there are two displayed album histories, the control script is changed so that only the numeric keys "1" and "2" are valid. That is, the television 1 can change the control script that defines the button to be pressed and the action to be executed when the button is pressed as described in the third embodiment, according to the number of historical displays. the

图55是表示电视机1将从显示用数据生成装置2接收的控制脚本的一部分变更后的控制脚本的具体示例图。虚线框所示的visibility属性161在变更前是以“visible”的状态提供给电视机1,但根据设定信息“历史显示件数”(=两件),电视机1成为改成“hidden”的状态。  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script obtained by changing a part of the control script received from the display data generating device 2 by the television 1 . The visibility attribute 161 shown in the dotted line box is provided to the television 1 in the state of "visible" before the change, but according to the setting information "historical display number" (= two), the television 1 becomes "hidden". state. the

然后,按照变更后控制脚本,显示用数据执行处理部40执行相册历史画面的显示用数据7时,根据上述设定信息,输出仅显示两件相册历史信息的状态的相册历史画面(图56)。接着,在图56所示的显示相册历史画面的状态下,变更一部分控制脚本,使得“3”的数字按键无效,从而第三段无法选择。  Then, according to the changed control script, when the display data execution processing unit 40 executes the display data 7 of the album history screen, an album history screen in which only two pieces of album history information are displayed is output based on the above-mentioned setting information ( FIG. 56 ). . Next, in the state where the album history screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 56, a part of the control script is changed so that the number keys of "3" are invalid, so that the third segment cannot be selected. the

如上所述,电视机1根据本装置中保存的设定信息,可以对显示相册历史画面时的控制脚本的一部分进行变更,改变显示用数据生成装置2提供显示件数时的状态。  As described above, the TV 1 can change a part of the control script when displaying the album history screen based on the setting information stored in the TV 1, and change the state when the display data generation device 2 provides the number of displays. the

应用例2:始终显示用户指定的相册  Application example 2: Always display the album specified by the user

本实施方式中,在电视机1的相册ID存储部53中,除存储有最近浏览的相册的相册ID外,还可以存储与浏览时间无关始终显示相册历史画面的相册的相册ID。因此,设定该相册的始终显示设定为有效。该设定也可以存储在图8所示的相关信息表中。由此,与过去浏览的时期无关,用户都可以选择始终想要显示的其它相册来代替第三件相册,始终显示在相册历史画面。  In this embodiment, the album ID storage unit 53 of the television 1 may store, in addition to the album IDs of the most recently browsed albums, the album IDs of the albums whose album history screen is always displayed regardless of the browsing time. Therefore, set the always-on display setting of this album to be valid. This setting can also be stored in the related information table shown in FIG. 8 . In this way, regardless of the period of past browsing, the user can select another album that he always wants to display instead of the third album, and always display it on the album history screen. the

电视机1先接收从最近浏览的相册开始依次显示的显示用数据。如图57所示,该显示用数据7中包含有存储在电视机1中的指示参照始终显示的相册ID的参考脚本162。电视机1按照参考脚本162,获取始终显示的相册ID,在始终显示设定为有效时,对当前的相册历史画面的控制脚本的一部分进行更改。具体而言,例如,将当前的第三件相册历史信息替换成所获取的始终显示相册的历史信息。  The television 1 first receives display data to be displayed sequentially from the most recently browsed album. As shown in FIG. 57 , the display data 7 includes a reference script 162 stored in the television 1 that instructs to refer to an album ID that is always displayed. The television 1 obtains the album ID that is always displayed according to the reference script 162, and changes a part of the control script of the current album history screen when the always display setting is enabled. Specifically, for example, the current historical information of the third album is replaced with the acquired historical information of the always-displayed album. the

图58是表示电视机1替换前的控制脚本和替换后的控制脚本的具体示例图。  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a specific example of a control script before replacement of the TV 1 and a control script after replacement. the

电视机1按照图57的参考脚本162获取始终显示的相册ID后,按照后续的控制脚本,将第三件的相册历史信息163a替换成始终显示的相册的相册历史信息 163b。  After television 1 acquires the album ID displayed all the time according to the reference script 162 of Figure 57, according to the follow-up control script, the album history information 163a of the third piece is replaced with the album history information 163b of the album displayed all the time. the

由于显示用数据执行处理部40按照替换后的控制脚本执行相册历史画面显示处理,因此输出在第三段显示始终显示设定为有效的相册的历史信息来代替原来显示内容的状态的相册历史画面。  Since the display data execution processing unit 40 executes the display process of the album history screen according to the replaced control script, it outputs the album history screen in which the history information of the album that is set to be valid is always displayed in the third stage instead of the original display content. . the

如上所述,电视机1根据本装置中保存的始终显示设定的信息,可以对控制脚本的一部分进行变更(替换),使得在相册历史画面中始终显示设定为有效的相册,从而变更显示的内容。  As described above, the TV 1 can change (replace) a part of the control script based on the information of the always-display setting stored in the device, so that the album that is set to be valid is always displayed on the album history screen, thereby changing the display. Content. the

此外,替换几件始终显示的相册等没有特别限定。只要在显示用数据生成装置2发送来的变更(替换)前的控制脚本中预先指定即可。  In addition, there is no particular limitation on replacing several photo albums that are always displayed. What is necessary is just to designate in advance in the control script before a change (replacement) sent from the data generating apparatus 2 for display. the

上述说明中,以相册历史画面为例说明了电视机1变更(替换)一部分控制脚本的结构,但不限于此。电视机1变更(替换)一部分控制脚本的结构可以与上述各实施方式的结构组合。  In the above description, the structure of changing (replacing) a part of the control script of the television 1 is described by taking the album history screen as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The structure in which the television 1 changes (replaces) a part of the control script may be combined with the structures in the above-described embodiments. the

电视机1在各实施方式中,根据可从本装置获取的各种信息,对从显示用数据生成装置2获取的控制脚本的一部分进行变更。  In each embodiment, the television 1 changes a part of the control script acquired from the display data generation device 2 based on various information that can be acquired from the television 1 . the

例如,在实施方式1中,电视机1根据显示内容接收显示操作菜单用的显示用数据7。根据本实施方式,电视机1能够根据电视机1获取的本装置的各种信息(例如图8的相关信息表),对其中包含的控制脚本的一部分进行变更。例如,若包含定义有不适合本装置规格的动作的操作菜单选项时,可以删除该选项。从而,电视机1能够显示适合电视机1的规格信息的操作菜单选项。  For example, in Embodiment 1, the television 1 receives display data 7 for displaying an operation menu based on display contents. According to the present embodiment, the TV 1 can change a part of the control script contained therein based on various information of the device acquired by the TV 1 (for example, the related information table in FIG. 8 ). For example, if there is an operation menu option that defines an action that does not meet the specifications of this device, you can delete that option. Thereby, the television 1 can display operation menu items suitable for the specification information of the television 1 . the

此外,电视机1按照参考脚本获取的存储在本装置内的信息的例子,并不限于上述各应用例所列举的信息。电视机1可以获取本装置内保存的一切信息,将其作为变量值而传递给布局定义脚本112。例如,作为所获取的信息,不仅有相册ID或相册标题等文本数据,还可以列举有各相册的索引图等而且,在显示相册历史画面时,可以将显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本的一部分替换成从本装置获取的标题、索引图,从而显示新的相册历史画面。  In addition, examples of the information stored in the device acquired by the television 1 according to the reference script are not limited to the information listed in the above-mentioned application examples. The television 1 can obtain all information stored in the device, and pass it to the layout definition script 112 as a variable value. For example, the acquired information includes not only text data such as album IDs and album titles, but also index images of each album, etc. When displaying the album history screen, the control script provided by the data generation device 2 may be displayed. Part of is replaced with the title and index image acquired from this device, and a new album history screen is displayed. the

还能用电视机1中保存的信息,对与相册(照片)一起输出的效果或声音的控制脚本进行变更。  It is also possible to change the control script of the effect or sound output together with the album (photograph) using the information stored in the television 1 . the

应用例3:始终输出确定的视觉和听觉效果  Application example 3: Always output certain visual and auditory effects

本实施方式中,客户端一侧的电视机1采用在本装置内保存图20所示的相册信息表的结构。即,电视机1根据本装置保存的相册信息表,可以确定与想要显示的相册或照片相关的效果和声音。这里,电视机1保存的相册信息表并不需要与显 示用数据生成装置2生成控制脚本时所参照的网络相册DB8内存储的信息一致。例如,在本装置中,与确定的相册(或照片)相关联地存储用户特别喜欢的效果或声音。从而,对于应与该相册(照片)一起输出的效果,电视机1能够适当地选择用户喜欢的声音和效果。  In the present embodiment, the television 1 on the client side adopts a configuration in which the album information table shown in FIG. 20 is stored in the device. That is, the TV 1 can determine the effect and sound related to the album or photo to be displayed according to the album information table stored in the device. Here, the album information table stored in the television 1 does not need to be consistent with the information stored in the network album DB 8 referred to when the display data generating device 2 generates the control script. For example, in this device, effects or sounds that the user particularly likes are stored in association with a certain album (or photo). Therefore, the television 1 can appropriately select the user's favorite sound and effect for the effect to be output together with the album (photograph). the

电视机1先从显示用数据生成装置2接收所请求的显示用数据7。这里,作为显示用数据7的一个例子,是显示幻灯片放映显示画面用的显示用数据,在显示用数据7包含的控制脚本中,定义有照片与对应于该照片输出声音和效果(第一声音和效果)的动作。而且,控制脚本中包含的操作内容定义脚本113包括参考脚本,且定义了将成为输出对象的声音和效果替换成在本装置内进行管理的声音和效果的动作。  The television 1 first receives the requested display data 7 from the display data generating device 2 . Here, as an example of the display data 7, it is the display data for displaying a slide show display screen, and in the control script included in the display data 7, a photo and corresponding output sound and effect (first) are defined. sounds and effects). Furthermore, the operation content definition script 113 contained in the control script includes a reference script, and defines an operation of replacing the sound and effect to be output with the sound and effect managed in the device. the

显示用数据执行处理部40按照上述参考脚本,从本装置保存的相册信息表中,获取与想要显示的照片有关的声音和效果(第二声音和效果),并与上述第一声音和效果的描述进行替换。  The display data execution processing unit 40 obtains the sound and effect (second sound and effect) related to the photo to be displayed from the album information table stored in the device according to the above-mentioned reference script, and compares it with the above-mentioned first sound and effect. to replace the description. the

由此,显示用数据执行处理部40按照替换后的控制脚本,可以与上述照片一起输出作为用户中意而在电视机1中登录的第二声音和效果,而不是输出显示用数据生成装置2指定的第一声音和效果。  Thus, the display data execution processing unit 40 can output the second sound and effect registered in the TV 1 as the user's preference, instead of outputting the second sound and effect specified by the display data generation device 2, together with the above-mentioned photo according to the replaced control script. first sounds and effects. the

或者,也可以如下构成电视机1。即,采用电视机1将图47所示的效果定义脚本表保存在本装置中的结构。  Alternatively, the television 1 may be configured as follows. That is, the television 1 is configured to store the effect definition script table shown in FIG. 47 in its own device. the

本实施方式中,在显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本中,仅描述与照片对应的“效果ID”,在与效果有关的详细动作的定义位置描述参考脚本。  In the present embodiment, in the control script provided by the display data generating device 2, only the "effect ID" corresponding to the photo is described, and a reference script is described at the definition position of the detailed operation related to the effect. the

电视机1按照上述参考脚本,根据与上述照片对应的效果ID,从本装置保存的效果定义脚本表,获取所需的信息,完成与上述效果有关的详细动作的定义。  According to the above-mentioned reference script and the effect ID corresponding to the above-mentioned photo, the TV set 1 obtains the required information from the effect definition script table saved by the device, and completes the definition of detailed actions related to the above-mentioned effect. the

由此,可以构成电视机1,使其始终与照片一起输出本装置保存的效果。  In this way, the television 1 can be configured to always output the effects stored in the device together with the photos. the

此外,无论控制脚本中定义的效果ID是什么(或无论是否有定义),都可以将其替换成确定效果动作的描述以输出该效果,或者在每次进行照片再现时对本装置保存的多个效果中随机选择的效果进行替换。  In addition, regardless of the effect ID defined in the control script (or whether it is defined or not), it can be replaced with a description of the action to determine the effect to output the effect, or multiple A randomly selected effect among effects is replaced. the

或者,也可以采用如下结构:即,电视机1不保存上述相册信息表和上述效果定义脚本表,而仅预存(例如用户中意的)声音和效果。  Alternatively, the following structure may also be adopted: that is, the television 1 does not store the above-mentioned album information table and the above-mentioned effect definition script table, but only pre-stores (for example, user's favorite) sounds and effects. the

本实施方式中,即使在显示用数据生成装置2提供的控制脚本中包含确定声音和效果的描述的情况下,电视机1按照参考脚本,也可以对控制脚本的一部分进行替换,使得始终输出电视机1中预存的声音和效果。或者,电视机1中保存有多个 声音和效果时,电视机1也可以在每次进行照片再现时,替换成从所保存的多个声音和效果中随机选择的声音和效果并输出。  In this embodiment, even if the control script provided by the display data generation device 2 includes a description of certain sounds and effects, the TV 1 can replace a part of the control script according to the reference script, so that the TV output is always output. Sounds and effects pre-stored in Unit 1. Or, when a plurality of sounds and effects are stored in the television set 1, the television set 1 can also replace and output the sound and effects randomly selected from the stored plurality of sounds and effects when the photo is reproduced. the

由此,能够这样构成电视机1,使得无论指定显示用数据生成装置2输出怎样的声音和效果,始终输出登录在电视机1中的声音和效果。从而,能够根据客户端一侧的每一个电视机1中的设定内容,提供符合用户喜好的服务。  Accordingly, the television 1 can be configured such that the sound and effect registered in the television 1 are always output regardless of the sound and effect output by the specified display data generating device 2 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a service that suits the user's preference according to the setting content in each television 1 on the client side. the

本发明不限于上述各实施方式,可在权利要求书所示的范围内进行各种变换,适当组合不同实施方式分别揭示的技术手段而得到的实施方式也包含在本发明的技术范围内。  The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and various changes can be made within the scope of the claims. Embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in different embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. the

又,上述说明中,说明了本发明的图像显示装置即电视机1按照本发明的图像数据提供装置即显示用数据生成装置2生成的显示用数据显示图像的情况。然而,本发明的图像显示装置、图像数据提供装置不限于此。  In addition, in the above description, the case where the television 1 which is the image display device of the present invention displays an image according to the display data generated by the display data generating device 2 which is the image data providing device of the present invention is described. However, the image display device and the image data providing device of the present invention are not limited thereto. the

如上所述,显示用数据7也可以包含图像数据以外的各种媒体数据(视频数据、声音数据、文本数据)。下面,将显示对象物111与成为显示处理以外的再现处理的对象的声音数据等各种媒体数据一起称为再现对象物,将包括这种再现对象物与规定对该再现对象物进行的动作的控制脚本的显示用数据称为内容。  As described above, the display data 7 may include various media data (video data, audio data, text data) other than image data. Hereinafter, the display target object 111 is referred to as a playback target object together with various media data such as audio data that is the target of playback processing other than the display processing, and includes such a playback target object and information that specifies actions to be performed on the playback target object. The data for displaying the control script is called content. the

即,显示用数据生成装置2可以构成为内容提供装置,该内容提供装置根据电视机1的请求,生成内容并提供给电视机1,该内容包含动态图像数据或声音数据等再现对象物以及定义电视机1对该再现对象物的动作的控制脚本。上述内容提供装置也包含在本发明的技术范围内。  That is, the display data generating device 2 can be configured as a content providing device that generates and provides content to the TV 1 in response to a request from the TV 1. A control script for the motion of the television 1 to the object to be reproduced. The above-mentioned content providing device is also included in the technical scope of the present invention. the

又,电视机1还可以构成作为内容再现装置,该内容再现装置按照内容中包含的控制脚本对该内容中包含的动态图像数据或声音数据等再现对象物进行再现,并且按照控制脚本,对再现中的上述再现对象物执行各种处理。上述内容再现装置也包含在本发明的技术范围内。  In addition, the television 1 can also be configured as a content reproduction device that reproduces objects to be reproduced such as moving image data or audio data contained in the content according to the control script contained in the content, and according to the control script, reproduces Various processing is performed on the above-mentioned reproduction object in . The content playback device described above is also included in the technical scope of the present invention. the

最后,电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2的各组件,尤其是显示用数据执行处理部40和控制脚本生成部80,可利用硬件逻辑构成,也可如下文那样用CPU借助软件实现。  Finally, each component of the TV 1 and the display data generating device 2, especially the display data execution processing unit 40 and the control script generating unit 80, can be configured by hardware logic, or can be realized by CPU and software as follows. the

即,电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2具有:执行实现各功能的控制程序的指令的CPU(中央处理器);存放上述程序的ROM(只读存储器);展开上述程序的RAM(随机存取存储器);以及存放上述程序和各种数据的存储器等存储装置(记录介质)等。因此,本发明的目的也可以通过向上述电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2提供记录介质、由计算机(或CPU或MPU)读出记录介质中记录的程序代码加以 执行而实现,上述记录介质以该计算机可读取的形式记录作为实现上述功能的软件的电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2的控制程序的程序代码(可执行程序、中间代码程序、源程序)。  That is, the television 1 and the display data generating device 2 have: a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that executes instructions of a control program that realizes each function; a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores the above program; memory); and a storage device (recording medium) such as a memory for storing the above-mentioned program and various data. Therefore, the purpose of the present invention can also be realized by providing a recording medium to the above-mentioned TV set 1 and display data generating device 2, and reading the program code recorded in the recording medium by a computer (or CPU or MPU). The program code (executable program, intermediate code program, source program) of the control program of the television 1 and the display data generating device 2 as software for realizing the above functions is recorded in a computer-readable form. the

作为上述记录介质,例如能用磁带或盒带等带类、包含软盘(floppy(注册商标))/硬盘等磁盘和CD-ROM/MO/MD/DVD/CD-R等光盘的盘类、IC卡(包括存储器卡)/光卡等卡类、或者掩模ROM/EPROM/EEPROM/闪存ROM等半导体存储器类等。  As the above-mentioned recording medium, for example, tapes such as magnetic tapes or cassettes, disks including magnetic disks such as floppy disks (floppy (registered trademark))/hard disks, and optical disks such as CD-ROM/MO/MD/DVD/CD-R, and IC cards can be used. Cards such as (including memory cards)/optical cards, or semiconductor memories such as mask ROM/EPROM/EEPROM/flash ROM, etc. the

又,也可以将电视机1和显示用数据生成装置2形成能与通信网连接的结构,通过通信网供给上述程序代码。作为此通信网,没有特别限定,例如可利用互联网、内联网、外联网、LAN、ISDN、VAN、CATV通信网、虚拟个人网(virtual privatenetwork)、电话线路网、移动通信网、卫星通信网等。作为构成通信网的传输介质,无特别限定,例如可用IEEE1394、USB、电力线载波、有线电视线路、电话线、ADSL线路等有线方式,也可用IrDA或遥控器那样的红外线、蓝牙(Bluetooth注册商标)、802.11无线、HDR、移动电话网、卫星线路、地面波数字网等无线方式。另外,本发明也能以上述程序代码用电子方式而具体化的、嵌入载波中的计算机数据信号的形态实现。  Also, the television 1 and the display data generating device 2 may be configured to be connectable to a communication network, and the above-mentioned program code may be supplied through the communication network. The communication network is not particularly limited, and for example, the Internet, intranet, extranet, LAN, ISDN, VAN, CATV communication network, virtual private network (virtual private network), telephone line network, mobile communication network, satellite communication network, etc. can be used. . As the transmission medium constituting the communication network, there is no particular limitation. For example, wired methods such as IEEE1394, USB, power line carrier, cable TV line, telephone line, and ADSL line can be used, and infrared rays such as IrDA or remote controllers, Bluetooth (registered trademark) can also be used. , 802.11 wireless, HDR, mobile phone network, satellite line, ground wave digital network and other wireless methods. In addition, the present invention can also be realized in the form of a computer data signal in which the above-mentioned program code is electronically embodied and embedded in a carrier wave. the

补充事项1  Supplement 1

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示装置对从外部获取的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像,该图像显示装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和至少定义显示该图像的第一功能的控制脚本,该图像显示装置包括:执行存放于基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部(基本功能执行单元)42;以及按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42、执行上述控制脚本定义的上述第一功能的控制脚本执行部(控制脚本执行单元)41,上述控制脚本中,还定义有利用上述第一功能显示上述图像时的本装置的动作作为第二功能,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行上述第二功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display device of the present invention processes display data acquired from the outside to display an image, and the image display device is characterized in that the display data includes an image and at least information defining a first function for displaying the image. A control script, the image display device includes: a basic function execution unit (basic function execution unit) 42 that executes the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit and called out from the above control script; and controls the above basic function according to the above control script Execution unit 42, a control script execution unit (control script execution unit) 41 that executes the above-mentioned first function defined by the above-mentioned control script. The second function is that the control script executing unit 41 controls the basic function executing unit 42 according to the control script to execute the second function. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置获取包括图像和至少定义显示该图像的功能的控制脚本的显示用数据,对该显示用数据进行处理,从而显示上述图像。具体而言,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本,控制执行从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42,执行控制脚本中定义的功能(显示图像的第一功能),从而显示图像。即,根据控制脚本对一个以上的上述基本功能进行组合,从而实现图像显示装置的一个功能(上述第一功能等)。  According to the above configuration, the image display device acquires display data including an image and a control script defining at least a function for displaying the image, processes the display data, and displays the image. Specifically, the control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 that executes the basic function program called from the control script according to the control script, and executes the function defined in the control script (the first function of displaying an image), thereby displaying image. That is, one or more basic functions described above are combined based on the control script to realize one function (the first function described above, etc.) of the image display device. the

而且,在上述控制脚本中,除了定义显示图像的第一功能外,还定义有利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对上述基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  Furthermore, in the control script, in addition to defining the first function of displaying an image, an operation of the image display device when the image is displayed using the first function is defined as a second function. The above-mentioned second function is also a function of the image display device realized by combining the above-mentioned basic functions. the

上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行上述第二功能。  The control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 to execute the second function according to the control script. the

从而,利用控制脚本,在图像显示装置中不仅能够实现显示图像的功能,还能够实现多种第二功能。  Therefore, by using the control script, not only the function of displaying images but also various second functions can be realized in the image display device. the

如上所述,控制脚本是包含在显示用数据中,从外部提供给图像显示装置。  As described above, the control script is included in the display data and provided to the image display device from the outside. the

因而,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  Therefore, even after the image display device is launched, the second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the image display can be easily performed without updating the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit. Changes in the functionality of the device. the

此外,即使上述基本功能程序存放部由ROM等非易失性存储装置实现、不可能容易改写所存放的基本功能程序的情况下,也可以如上所述,容易地变更图像显示装置的功能。因此,若对组合型设备应用本发明的图像显示装置,则效果特别大。  In addition, even when the basic function program storage unit is realized by a nonvolatile storage device such as ROM and the stored basic function program cannot be easily rewritten, the functions of the image display device can be easily changed as described above. Therefore, when the image display device of the present invention is applied to a combination device, the effect is particularly large. the

又,由于能够这样容易地进行功能变更,因此对于预先装入的功能,能够省去了在出售之前考虑所有需求并为了网罗这些需求而事先安装大量功能的麻烦。其结果,能够减轻图像显示装置开发的负担。  Also, since functions can be changed easily in this way, it is possible to save the trouble of considering all requirements before selling and installing a large number of functions in advance to cover these requirements for pre-installed functions. As a result, the burden of image display device development can be reduced. the

而且,定义上述第一功能和第二功能的控制脚本与图像显示装置显示的图像一起,包含在显示用数据中而提供给图像显示装置。因此,能够将所显示的图像与第二功能对应地进行管理,不管是在生成并发送显示用数据的一侧,还是在接收并处理显示用数据的一侧(图像显示装置),都容易进行管理。  Then, the control script defining the first function and the second function described above is included in the display data together with the image displayed by the image display device and supplied to the image display device. Therefore, it is possible to manage the displayed image in association with the second function, and it is easy to perform both on the side that generates and transmits the display data and on the side (image display device) that receives and processes the display data. manage. the

而且,由于对每一个显示用数据(以及其中包含的图像)都生成控制脚本,因此图像显示装置能够根据显示用数据(图像),高效率地仅获取自身处理的显示用数据(图像)所需的第二功能。  Moreover, since the control script is generated for each display data (and the image contained therein), the image display device can efficiently acquire only the display data (image) required for its own processing based on the display data (image). the second function. the

由以上可知,能够高效率地开发图像显示装置,并且能够容易地变更已上市的图像显示装置的功能。  From the above, it is possible to efficiently develop an image display device and to easily change the functions of an already-marketed image display device. the

此外,作为上述第二功能的具体例子,可以列举有例如:旋转图像的功能;变更图像的显示尺寸的功能;使得和正在显示的图像有关的属性信息(图像作者的备注或图像的标题等)与该图像一起显示的功能;印刷图像的功能;连续自动显示多个图像的功能(幻灯片放映功能);变更幻灯片放映的进片间隔的设定的功能;变更幻灯片放映的进片的自动/手动的设定的功能;以及显示用户选择上述各功能用的 表示各功能的操作选项的功能等。然而,本发明的图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能不限于此。  In addition, as specific examples of the above-mentioned second function, for example: the function of rotating the image; the function of changing the display size of the image; Function to display with the image; function to print images; function to automatically display multiple images in succession (slide show function); function to change the setting of the advance interval of the slide show; function to change the advance of the slide show The function of automatic/manual setting; and the function of displaying the operation options of each function for the user to select the above-mentioned functions, etc. However, the above-mentioned second function performed by the image display device of the present invention is not limited thereto. the

此外,上述图像显示装置中,还在上述控制脚本中定义了操作选项显示功能,该操作选项显示功能显示用于由用户选择本装置可执行的上述第二功能的操作选项,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,可以执行上述操作选项显示功能。  In addition, in the above-mentioned image display device, an operation option display function is defined in the above-mentioned control script, and the operation option display function displays an operation option for the user to select the above-mentioned second function that can be executed by the device, and the above-mentioned control script execution unit 41 According to the above control script, the above operation option display function can be executed. the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本执行部41根据上述控制脚本,执行操作选项显示功能,该操作选项显示功能显示用于由用户选择该图像显示装置可执行的上述第二功能的操作选项。  According to the above configuration, the control script execution unit 41 executes an operation option display function for displaying operation options for the user to select the second function executable by the image display device based on the control script. the

由此,在图像显示装置利用第一功能显示图像时,用户可以从所显示的操作选项了解该图像显示装置可执行的第二功能,并且能够选择想要使正在显示上述图像的图像显示装置执行的第二功能。  Thus, when the image display device displays an image using the first function, the user can know the second function executable by the image display device from the displayed operation options, and can select the image display device that is displaying the above-mentioned image to perform the second function. the second function. the

而且,在上述控制脚本中,对应于上述操作选项,定义用户选择上述操作选项时本装置要执行的第二功能,上述控制脚本执行部41能够执行上述控制脚本中与用户所选择的操作选项对应的第二功能。  Moreover, in the above-mentioned control script, corresponding to the above-mentioned operation option, the second function to be executed by the device when the user selects the above-mentioned operation option is defined, and the above-mentioned control script execution unit 41 can execute the above-mentioned control script corresponding to the operation option selected by the user. the second function. the

根据上述结构,在用户选择上述操作选项时,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,执行与所选择的操作选项对应的第二功能。  According to the above configuration, when the user selects the operation option, the control script execution unit 41 executes the second function corresponding to the selected operation option according to the control script. the

由此,用户能够从图像显示装置显示的操作选项中,选择想要使正在显示上述图像的图像显示装置执行的第二功能,并使图像显示装置执行。  Thereby, the user can select the second function to be executed by the image display device displaying the image from the operation options displayed on the image display device, and cause the image display device to execute it. the

也可以是在上述控制脚本中,定义有可应用于通过上述第一功能显示的图像的图像编辑功能作为第二功能,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,显示与上述图像编辑功能对应的操作选项,以使用户可选择,并且将用户选择的操作选项所对应的图像编辑功能,应用于通过上述第一功能显示的图像。  An image editing function applicable to an image displayed by the first function may be defined in the control script as the second function, and the control script execution unit 41 may display an image corresponding to the image editing function according to the control script. The operation options are selectable by the user, and the image editing function corresponding to the operation option selected by the user is applied to the image displayed through the above-mentioned first function. the

根据上述结构,这样显示操作选项,使得用户只能选择可应用于图像显示装置中显示的图像的图像编辑功能。当用户从所显示的一个以上的操作选项中选择一个图像编辑功能时,控制脚本执行部41就对利用第一功能而正在显示的图像执行用户所选择的图像编辑功能。  According to the above structure, the operation options are displayed such that the user can only select the image editing functions applicable to the image displayed in the image display device. When the user selects one image editing function from one or more displayed operation options, the control script execution unit 41 executes the image editing function selected by the user on the image being displayed by the first function. the

由以上可知,能够利用控制脚本,根据显示的图像,对图像显示装置中可提供给用户的图像编辑功能进行动态变更。  As can be seen from the above, it is possible to use the control script to dynamically change the image editing functions that can be provided to the user in the image display device according to the displayed image. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像数据提供装置生成图像显示装置显示图像用的显示用数据,该图像数据提供装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和至少定义显示该图像的第一功能的控制脚本,该图像数据提供装置包括:根据从上述图 像显示装置发送来的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息、获取所请求的请求图像的识别信息的显示对象ID获取部(识别信息获取单元)71;生成控制脚本的控制脚本生成部(控制脚本生成单元)80,该控制脚本定义显示由上述显示对象ID获取部71获取的识别信息所确定的请求图像的第一功能,并且根据上述显示用数据请求消息,定义利用上述第一功能显示上述请求图像时的上述图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能;以及生成显示用数据的显示用数据生成部(显示用数据生成单元)62,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本。  In order to achieve the above object, the image data providing device of the present invention generates display data for displaying an image by the image display device, and the image data providing device is characterized in that the display data includes an image and at least information defining a first function for displaying the image. The control script, the image data providing device includes: a display object ID acquiring unit (identification information acquisition unit) 71; a control script generation unit (control script generation unit) 80 that generates a control script that defines a first function for displaying a request image determined by the identification information acquired by the above-mentioned display object ID acquisition unit 71, and according to The display data request message defines, as a second function, the operation of the image display device when displaying the requested image by the first function; and a display data generation unit (display data generation unit) 62 that generates display data, The display data includes the request image and the control script generated by the control script generating unit 80 . the

根据上述结构,图像数据提供装置根据上述图像显示装置所生成的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息,生成显示请求图像用的显示用数据。显示用数据包括请求图像和至少定义显示该请求图像的功能的控制脚本。  According to the above configuration, the image data providing device generates the display data for displaying the requested image based on the display data request message generated by the image display device requesting the display data. The data for display includes a request image and a control script defining at least a function for displaying the request image. the

具体而言,上述显示对象ID获取部71从上述显示用数据请求消息,获取所请求的请求图像的识别信息。根据该识别信息,对显示用数据中应包含的请求图像进行确定。  Specifically, the display object ID acquiring unit 71 acquires identification information of the requested request image from the display data request message. Based on this identification information, the requested image to be included in the display data is specified. the

然后,上述控制脚本生成部80生成定义了显示上述请求图像的第一功能的控制脚本。而且,在该控制脚本中还添加以下定义。即,是利用上述第一功能显示上述请求图像时的上述图像显示装置的作为第二功能的动作的定义。上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述显示用数据请求消息的内容,生成定义了该第二功能的控制脚本。  Then, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining a first function for displaying the requested image. Also, add the following definitions to this control script. That is, it is a definition of an operation as the second function of the image display device when the requested image is displayed by the first function. The control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function based on the content of the display data request message. the

最后,上述显示用数据生成部62生成包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本的显示用数据。  Finally, the display data generation unit 62 generates display data including the request image and the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 . the

由此,根据图像显示装置所请求的显示用数据(图像),可以生成定义了第一和第二功能的控制脚本,可以提供包含这样的控制脚本的显示用数据,作为对图像显示装置请求的响应。  Thus, based on the display data (image) requested by the image display device, a control script defining the first and second functions can be generated, and the display data including such a control script can be provided as a request to the image display device. response. the

上述控制脚本生成部80生成上述控制脚本,除了定义图像显示装置显示请求图像的第一功能外,还定义利用该第一功能显示上述请求图像时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对图像显示装置的基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  The control script generation unit 80 generates the control script to define, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when displaying the requested image by the first function in addition to the first function of the image display device to display the requested image. The second function described above is also a function of the image display device realized by combining basic functions of the image display device. the

从而,通过根据显示用数据的内容生成控制脚本并提供给图像显示装置,不仅能够提供显示请求图像的功能,还能够提供多种第二功能给图像显示装置。  Therefore, by generating a control script based on the content of the display data and providing it to the image display device, not only the function of displaying the requested image but also various second functions can be provided to the image display device. the

因而,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对图像显示装置的基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功 能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  Therefore, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit of the image display device can be easily updated without updating the basic function program. Change the function of the image display device accordingly. the

此外,即使图像显示装置的上述基本功能程序存放部由ROM等非易失性存储装置实现、不可能容易改写所存放的基本功能程序的情况下,也可以如上所述,容易地变更图像显示装置的功能。因此,若对具有上述图像显示装置的基本功能执行部42的组合型设备提供上述控制脚本生成部80生成的控制脚本,则效果特别大。  In addition, even if the above-mentioned basic function program storage unit of the image display device is realized by a nonvolatile storage device such as ROM, and it is impossible to easily rewrite the stored basic function program, the image display device can be easily changed as described above. function. Therefore, when the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 is provided to a combined device having the basic function execution unit 42 of the image display device, the effect is particularly large. the

又,由于能够这样容易地变更图像显示装置的功能,因此对于预先装入图像显示装置的功能,能够省去了在出售之前考虑所有需求并为了网罗这些需求而事先安装大量功能的麻烦。其结果,能够减轻图像显示装置开发的负担。  In addition, since the functions of the image display device can be easily changed in this way, it is possible to save the trouble of considering all needs before selling the functions preinstalled in the image display device and installing a large number of functions in order to meet these needs. As a result, the burden of image display device development can be reduced. the

而且,定义上述第一功能和第二功能的控制脚本与图像显示装置显示的图像一起,包含在显示用数据中而提供给图像显示装置。因此,能够将所显示的图像与第二功能对应地进行管理,不管是在生成并发送显示用数据的一侧(图像数据提供装置),还是在接收并处理显示用数据的一侧(图像显示装置),都容易进行管理。  Then, the control script defining the first function and the second function described above is included in the display data together with the image displayed by the image display device and supplied to the image display device. Therefore, the displayed image can be managed in association with the second function, regardless of whether it is on the side that generates and transmits display data (image data providing device) or on the side that receives and processes display data (image display device). device), are easy to manage. the

而且,由于上述控制脚本生成部80对每一个显示用数据(以及其中包含的图像)都生成控制脚本,因此,图像显示装置能够根据显示用数据(图像),高效率地将图像显示装置处理的显示用数据(图像)所需的第二功能提供给图像显示装置。  In addition, since the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script for each display data (and image contained therein), the image display device can efficiently process the image display device according to the display data (image). A second function necessary for displaying data (image) is provided to the image display device. the

由以上可知,能够高效率地开发图像显示装置,并且能够容易地变更已上市的图像显示装置的功能。  From the above, it is possible to efficiently develop an image display device and to easily change the functions of an already-marketed image display device. the

还可以是上述图像数据提供装置具有获取图像信息存储部中存储的上述请求图像的属性信息的显示对象属性判定部(属性信息获取单元)81/图像分析部(属性信息获取单元)82,上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述显示对象属性判定部81获取的上述请求图像的属性信息,而生成上述控制脚本。  It is also possible that the above-mentioned image data providing device has a display object attribute determination section (attribute information acquisition unit) 81/image analysis section (attribute information acquisition unit) 82 that acquires the attribute information of the above-mentioned request image stored in the image information storage section, and the above-mentioned control The script generation unit 80 generates the control script based on the attribute information of the requested image acquired by the display object attribute determination unit 81 . the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述请求图像的属性信息,生成定义了该第二功能的控制脚本。  According to the above configuration, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function based on the attribute information of the request image. the

由此,能够根据请求图像的属性信息,将图像显示装置显示的请求图像所需的第二功能高效率地提供给图像显示装置。  Thereby, the second function necessary for the requested image displayed by the image display device can be efficiently provided to the image display device based on the attribute information of the requested image. the

例如,作为上述图像的属性信息,可以列举有:图像的上下是否与实际的上下一致的判定结果;表示需不需要图像附带的旋转处理的信息;图像的像素数;有无图像附带的图像持有者的备注;以及图像附带的著作权保护信息等,但不限于此。  For example, the above-mentioned attribute information of the image may include: the result of judging whether the top and bottom of the image match the actual top and bottom; information indicating whether rotation processing attached to the image is necessary; the number of pixels of the image; Remarks of the owner; and copyright protection information attached to the image, etc., but not limited thereto. the

而且,也可以是在上述显示用数据请求消息中包含与上述图像显示装置有关的相关信息,上述图像数据提供装置具有从上述显示用数据请求消息获取上述相关信息的相关信息获取部(相关信息获取单元)73,上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述相 关信息获取部73获取的相关信息,而生成上述控制脚本。  Furthermore, the related information about the image display device may be included in the display data request message, and the image data providing device may include a related information acquisition unit (related information acquisition unit) that acquires the related information from the display data request message. unit) 73, the above-mentioned control script generation unit 80 generates the above-mentioned control script according to the relevant information acquired by the above-mentioned relevant information acquisition unit 73. the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本生成部80根据与上述图像显示装置有关的相关信息,生成定义了该第二功能的控制脚本。  According to the above configuration, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function based on the relevant information on the image display device. the

由此,能够根据与上述图像显示装置有关的相关信息,将图像显示装置显示的请求图像所需的第二功能高效率地提供给图像显示装置。  Thereby, the second function necessary for the requested image displayed by the image display device can be efficiently provided to the image display device based on the related information about the image display device. the

例如,作为与上述图像显示装置有关的相关信息,首先可以举出图像显示装置的机型名称、装置ID、画面尺寸、画面像素数、还有所安装软件的版本信息等,作为请求方的图像显示装置的与图像显示有关的规格信息。其次,可以举出设定(图像的)备注显示/不显示的信息、设定图像显示装置的操作方法的显示/不显示的信息、设定是否循环再现幻灯片放映的信息、以及设定幻灯片放映的进片间隔的信息等,作为请求方的图像显示装置中设定的设定信息。还可以举出用户的年龄、住址等,作为登录在请求方的图像显示装置中的用户信息。但上述相关信息不限于上述内容。  For example, as relevant information related to the above-mentioned image display device, firstly, the model name, device ID, screen size, screen pixel count, and version information of installed software of the image display device can be cited as the image display device of the requesting party. Specification information related to image display of the display device. Next, information for setting (image) remarks display/non-display, information for setting the display/non-display of the operation method of the image display device, information for setting whether to loop a slide show, and setting a slideshow Information such as the film advance interval of the film show is used as the setting information set in the image display device of the requesting party. The user's age, address, etc. can also be mentioned as the user information registered in the image display device on the requesting side. But the above relevant information is not limited to the above content. the

此外,例如也可以根据上述图像的像素数与上述图像显示装置的画面像素数的比较结果,生成定义了第二功能的控制脚本等那样,根据上述图像的属性信息和图像显示装置提供的相关信息的双方内容,生成定义了第二功能的控制脚本。  In addition, for example, based on the comparison result of the number of pixels of the above-mentioned image and the number of screen pixels of the image display device, a control script defining the second function, etc. may be generated based on the attribute information of the above-mentioned image and related information provided by the image display device. content of both sides, a control script defining the second function is generated. the

上述图像数据提供装置也可以包括:获取图像信息存储部中存储的上述请求图像的属性信息的显示对象属性判定部81;从包含与上述图像显示装置有关的相关信息的上述显示用数据请求消息、获取上述相关信息的相关信息获取部73;以及操作选项选择部(功能确定单元)83,该操作选项选择部83根据上述属性信息和上述相关信息中的至少一个信息,在可提供给上述图像显示装置的功能中确定要提供给上述图像显示装置的上述第二功能,上述控制脚本生成部80生成定义了上述操作选项选择部83所确定的第二功能的控制脚本。  The image data providing device may include: a display object attribute determination unit 81 that acquires attribute information of the requested image stored in the image information storage unit; A related information acquisition part 73 that acquires the above-mentioned related information; and an operation option selection part (function determination unit) 83, which can provide the above-mentioned image display function according to at least one of the above-mentioned attribute information and the above-mentioned related information. The second function to be provided to the image display device is specified among the functions of the device, and the control script generation unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function specified by the operation option selection unit 83 . the

根据上述结构,上述显示对象属性判定部81从存储图像的属性信息的图像信息存储部,获取所请求的请求图像的属性信息。又,相关信息获取部73从显示用数据请求消息获取相关信息,该显示用数据请求消息是从上述图像显示装置接收到的。属性信息是表示图像属性的信息,相关信息是与图像显示装置有关的信息。  According to the above configuration, the display object attribute determination unit 81 acquires the attribute information of the requested image from the image information storage unit that stores the attribute information of the image. Also, the related information acquiring unit 73 acquires related information from the display data request message received from the above-mentioned image display device. The attribute information is information indicating the attribute of the image, and the related information is information related to the image display device. the

上述操作选项选择部83根据上述属性信息和上述相关信息中的至少一个信息,在可提供给上述图像显示装置的功能中确定要提供给上述图像显示装置的上述第二功能。然后,上述控制脚本生成部80生成定义了上述操作选项选择部83所确定的第二功能的控制脚本。  The operation option selection unit 83 determines the second function to be provided to the image display device among functions available to the image display device based on at least one of the attribute information and the related information. Then, the control script generation unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function specified by the operation option selection unit 83 . the

由此,根据请求图像的属性信息、或上述图像显示装置的相关信息、或者它们双方的信息,能够仅使图像显示装置显示的请求图像所需的第二功能具有个性化,并高效率地提供给图像显示装置。  Thus, based on the attribute information of the requested image, or the information related to the above-mentioned image display device, or both of them, only the second function necessary for the requested image displayed on the image display device can be personalized and efficiently provided. to the image display device. the

上述操作选项选择部83也可以确定图像编辑功能作为上述第二功能,该图像编辑功能可应用于通过上述第一功能而在上述图像显示装置中显示的上述请求图像。  The operation option selection unit 83 may specify, as the second function, an image editing function applicable to the requested image displayed on the image display device by the first function. the

由此,可以仅提供图像编辑功能给图像显示装置,该图像编辑功能能够应用于从图像显示装置接收到的显示用数据请求消息所请求的请求图像。由以上可知,根据所请求的图像,能够对图像显示装置的图像编辑功能进行动态变更。  Thereby, only the image editing function applicable to the requested image requested by the display data request message received from the image display device can be provided to the image display device. As can be seen from the above, it is possible to dynamically change the image editing function of the image display device according to the requested image. the

例如,上述操作选项选择部83对于图像上下不正确的图像,也可以确定图像旋转功能作为第二功能,或者对于没有从图像提供着获得编辑许可的图像,也可以确定不执行任何图像编辑功能。  For example, the above-mentioned operation option selection unit 83 may determine the image rotation function as the second function for an image whose top and bottom are incorrect, or may determine not to execute any image editing function for an image for which no editing permission has been obtained from the image provider. the

而且,上述控制脚本生成部80最好是生成定义了操作选项显示功能的控制脚本,该操作选项显示功能显示用于由用户选择上述操作选项选择部83所确定的第二功能的操作选项。  Furthermore, the control script generation unit 80 preferably generates a control script defining an operation option display function for displaying an operation option for the user to select the second function specified by the operation option selection unit 83 . the

根据上述结构,在上述控制脚本生成部80生成的控制脚本中,定义操作选项显示功能,使得图像显示装置可以显示与上述操作选项选择部83所确定的第二功能对应的操作选项。  According to the above configuration, in the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 , an operation option display function is defined so that the image display device can display operation options corresponding to the second function specified by the operation option selection unit 83 . the

由此,用户能够仅选择根据请求图像的属性信息或上述图像显示装置的相关信息或它们双方的信息而选择的图像显示装置显示的请求图像所需的第二功能,作为可执行的功能。  Thus, the user can select only the second function necessary for the requested image displayed by the image display device selected based on the attribute information of the requested image, the information related to the image display device, or both of them as executable functions. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置;以及上述图像数据提供装置,上述图像数据提供装置根据从上述图像显示装置接收的显示用数据请求消息,生成上述控制脚本,将包含请求图像和上述控制脚本的显示用数据发送到上述图像显示装置,上述图像显示装置按照从上述图像数据提供装置接收到的上述控制脚本,执行上述第一功能,显示上述请求图像,并且执行上述第二功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display system of the present invention is characterized by comprising: the above-mentioned image display device; and the above-mentioned image data providing device, wherein the above-mentioned image data providing device generates the above-mentioned a control script for transmitting display data including a request image and the control script to the image display device, and the image display device executes the first function according to the control script received from the image data providing device to display the request image , and perform the above-mentioned second function. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的控制方法是包括图像数据提供装置和对该图像数据提供装置生成的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像的图像显示装置的图像显示系统的控制方法,它的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置将请求显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息发送到上述图像数据提供装置的第一步骤,该显 示用数据包括图像和至少定义显示该图像的第一功能的控制脚本;上述图像数据提供装置从上述图像显示装置发送的上述显示用数据请求消息获取所请求的请求图像识别信息的第二步骤;生成控制脚本的第三步骤,该控制脚本定义显示由上述第二步骤中获取的识别信息所确定的请求图像的第一功能;根据上述显示用数据请求消息将利用上述第一功能显示上述请求图像时的上述图像显示装置的动作定义为第二功能并添加到在上述第三步骤生成的控制脚本中的第四步骤;生成显示用数据并发送到上述图像显示装置的第五步骤,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和在上述第三和第四步骤生成的控制脚本;上述图像显示装置根据从上述图像数据提供装置接收的上述控制脚本来执行基本功能程序存放部中存放的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序从而执行上述第一功能并显示上述请求图像的第六步骤;以及按照上述控制脚本执行上述基本功能程序从而执行上述第二功能的第七步骤。  In order to achieve the above object, the method for controlling an image display system of the present invention is a method for controlling an image display system including an image data providing device and an image display device that processes display data generated by the image data providing device to display an image. is characterized in that it includes: a first step in which the above-mentioned image display device sends a display data request message requesting display data to the above-mentioned image data providing device, the display data includes an image and at least defines a first function for displaying the image a control script; a second step in which the above-mentioned image data providing device obtains the requested image identification information from the above-mentioned display data request message sent by the above-mentioned image display device; a third step in generating a control script, which defines the display by the above-mentioned The first function of the requested image determined by the identification information acquired in the second step; according to the above-mentioned display data request message, the action of the above-mentioned image display device when the above-mentioned first function is used to display the above-mentioned requested image is defined as the second function and added Go to the fourth step in the control script generated in the above-mentioned third step; the fifth step of generating and sending to the above-mentioned image display device data for display, the data for display including the above-mentioned request image and generated in the above-mentioned third and fourth steps control script; the image display device executes the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit based on the control script received from the image data provider to execute the first function and display the request The sixth step of the image; and the seventh step of executing the above-mentioned basic function program according to the above-mentioned control script to execute the above-mentioned second function. the

根据上述结构和方法,图像数据提供装置根据图像显示装置所请求的显示用数据的内容,生成定义了第二功能的控制脚本,与请求图像一起作为显示用数据而提供。从图像数据提供装置获取上述显示用数据的图像显示装置,根据包含在该显示用数据中的控制脚本,执行第二功能。  According to the above configuration and method, the image data providing device generates a control script defining the second function based on the content of the display data requested by the image display device, and provides the requested image as display data. The image display device that has acquired the display data from the image data provider executes the second function based on the control script included in the display data. the

从而,能够构建可以容易地进行作为组合型设备的图像显示装置的功能变更的图像显示系统。  Therefore, it is possible to construct an image display system that can easily change the function of the image display device as a combination device. the

补充事项2  Supplement 2

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示装置对从外部获取的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像,该图像显示装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的该图像显示装置的动作即第二功能,该图像显示装置包括:执行存放于基本功能程序存储部29(基本功能程序存放部)的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42(基本功能执行单元);以及按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42执行上述控制脚本中定义的上述第一功能和上述第二功能中的至少一种功能的控制脚本执行部41(控制脚本执行单元),上述控制脚本中,将用户对该图像显示装置的操作与受理该操作时该图像显示装置要执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能对应地进行定义,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行与所受理的用户操作对应的上述第一功能或上述第二功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display device of the present invention processes display data acquired from the outside to display an image, and the image display device is characterized in that the display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines the The first function of the image and the second function, which is the operation of the image display device when the image is displayed using the first function, the image display device includes: executing the program stored in the basic function program storage unit 29 (basic function program storage unit) The basic function executing part 42 (basic function executing unit) of the basic function program called from the above-mentioned control script; A control script execution unit 41 (control script execution unit) for at least one of the functions. In the control script, the user's operation on the image display device is combined with the above-mentioned first function to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted. Or the second function is correspondingly defined, and the control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 according to the control script to execute the first function or the second function corresponding to the accepted user operation. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置获取包括图像和控制脚本的显示用数据,对该显示用数据进行处理,显示上述图像并执行第二功能,而该控制脚本定义了显示该图 像的第一功能以及显示该图像时的该图像显示装置的动作即第二功能。具体而言,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本,控制执行从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42,执行控制脚本中定义的功能(显示图像的第一功能以及图像显示过程中的动作即第二功能)。即,按照控制脚本对一个以上的上述基本功能进行组合,从而实现图像显示装置的一个功能(上述第一功能和第二功能)。  According to the above structure, the image display device acquires data for display including an image and a control script, processes the data for display, displays the image and executes the second function, and the control script defines the first function for displaying the image and The operation of the image display device when displaying the image is the second function. Specifically, the control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 that executes the basic function program called from the above-mentioned control script according to the control script, and executes the functions defined in the control script (the first function of displaying an image and the image display process). The action in is the second function). That is, one or more basic functions described above are combined according to the control script to realize one function (the first function and the second function described above) of the image display device. the

而且,上述控制脚本中,将用户对该图像显示装置的操作与受理该操作时该图像显示装置要执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能相对应地进行定义。即,控制脚本中描述有控制脚本执行部41执行各功能时的触发条件。  Furthermore, in the control script, an operation of the image display device by the user is defined in association with the first function or the second function to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted. That is, trigger conditions when the control script execution unit 41 executes each function are described in the control script. the

上述控制脚本执行部41按照这样的控制脚本,在图像显示装置受理用户的操作时,可以执行上述控制脚本中与上述操作对应的功能。  According to such a control script, the control script execution unit 41 may execute a function corresponding to the operation in the control script when the image display device accepts a user's operation. the

由此,图像显示装置能够执行控制脚本中所描述的根据用户的操作而预先用控制脚本确定的功能。  Thereby, the image display device can execute the functions described in the control script and determined in advance by the control script according to the user's operation. the

从而,由于上述用户操作与上述功能的对应关系由上述控制脚本定义,因此可以容易地变更该对应关系。由此,对于同一用户操作,能够容易地分配不同的功能,或者对于同一功能,能够容易地通过不同的用户操作来执行。  Therefore, since the correspondence between the user operations and the functions is defined by the control script, the correspondence can be easily changed. Thereby, different functions can be easily assigned to the same user operation, or the same function can be easily executed by different user operations. the

如上所述,控制脚本是包含在显示用数据中,从外部提供给图像显示装置。  As described above, the control script is included in the display data and provided to the image display device from the outside. the

因而,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  Therefore, even after the image display device is launched, the second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the image display can be easily performed without updating the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit. Changes in the functionality of the device. the

而且,其特征在于,在上述控制脚本中,将上述用户操作与受理该操作时该图像显示装置要执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能多个对应,并且描述了对上述每一个功能的执行其功能的条件,上述控制脚本执行单元按照上述控制脚本,执行与从用户受理的操作对应的多个功能中满足上述条件的功能。  Furthermore, it is characterized in that, in the control script, a plurality of the above-mentioned user operation is associated with the above-mentioned first function or the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted, and descriptions are given for each of the above-mentioned functions. As a condition for executing the function, the control script executing unit executes a function that satisfies the above condition among a plurality of functions corresponding to the operation received from the user according to the control script. the

根据上述结构,在提供给图像显示装置的控制脚本中,将从用户受理的一个操作(触发)与多个功能(第一或第二功能)对应进行描述,并且对每一个功能都描述条件。这样描述上述条件,使得仅在满足该条件的情况下才执行与该条件对应的功能。  According to the above configuration, in the control script provided to the image display device, one operation (trigger) received from the user is described in association with a plurality of functions (first or second function), and conditions are described for each function. The above-mentioned condition is described such that the function corresponding to the condition is executed only when the condition is satisfied. the

控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,仅执行与所受理的操作对应的多个功能中满足条件的功能。由此,图像显示装置对于同一用户操作,能够根据条件执行不同的功能。  The control script execution unit 41 executes only a function satisfying a condition among a plurality of functions corresponding to the accepted operation according to the above-mentioned control script. Accordingly, the image display device can execute different functions according to conditions for the same user operation. the

作为具体例子,假设有幻灯片放映显示相册中包含的多张照片的功能(第一功能A)和缩略图显示相册中包含的多张照片的功能(第一功能B)。这两种功能对应于 一个用户操作(触发)而定义在控制脚本中。而且,在控制脚本中,将相册所包含的照片张数作为条件,当该张数为10张以下时(条件A)执行上述第一功能A,或者当上述张数为11张以上时(条件B)执行上述第一功能B,是上述那样对应于各功能而描述条件。  As a specific example, assume that there is a function of displaying a plurality of photos included in an album in a slideshow (first function A) and a function of displaying a plurality of photos included in an album in thumbnails (a first function B). These two functions correspond to a user action (trigger) and are defined in the control script. Moreover, in the control script, the number of photos contained in the album is used as a condition, and the above-mentioned first function A is executed when the number of photos is less than 10 (condition A), or when the number of photos is more than 11 (condition B) Executing the above-mentioned first function B is to describe conditions corresponding to each function as described above. the

进行上述用户操作时,控制脚本执行部41可以判定想要执行第一功能的相册的照片张数,选择满足条件的功能并执行。  When the above user operation is performed, the control script execution unit 41 may determine the number of photos in the album for which the first function is to be executed, select and execute a function satisfying the condition. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像数据提供装置生成图像显示装置显示图像用的显示用数据,该图像数据提供装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的该图像显示装置的动作即第二功能,该图像数据提供装置包括:根据从上述图像显示装置发送来的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息获取所请求的请求图像的识别信息的显示对象ID获取部71;根据上述显示用数据请求消息生成控制脚本的控制脚本生成部80,该控制脚本定义显示由上述识别信息获取单元获取的识别信息所确定的请求图像的第一功能以及作为显示上述请求图像时的上述图像显示装置的动作的第二功能;以及生成显示用数据的显示用数据生成部62,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本,上述控制脚本生成部80在上述控制脚本中,将用户对上述图像显示装置的操作与受理该操作时上述图像显示装置要执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能相对应地进行定义。  In order to achieve the above object, the image data providing device of the present invention generates display data for displaying an image by the image display device, and the image data providing device is characterized in that the above-mentioned display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines how to display the image. The first function of the image and the second function of the operation of the image display device when the image is displayed by the first function, the image data providing device includes: displaying the display data according to a request sent from the image display device The display object ID acquiring part 71 that acquires the identification information of the requested image with the data request message; the control script generating part 80 that generates the control script according to the above-mentioned display data request message, and the control script definition display is acquired by the above-mentioned identification information acquiring unit The first function of the request image determined by the identification information of the above-mentioned request image and the second function of the operation of the above-mentioned image display device when displaying the above-mentioned request image; The request image and the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80. In the control script, the control script generation unit 80 combines the user's operation on the image display device with the first operation to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted. A function or the above-mentioned second function is defined correspondingly. the

根据上述结构,图像数据提供装置根据上述显示用数据请求消息,生成显示请求图像用的显示用数据。显示用数据包括请求图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本至少定义显示该请求图像的第一功能以及正在显示图像的上述图像显示装置的动作即第二功能。  According to the above configuration, the image data providing device generates display data for displaying the requested image based on the display data request message. The display data includes a request image and a control script that defines at least a first function for displaying the request image and a second function that is an operation of the image display device that is displaying the image. the

具体而言,上述显示对象ID获取部71从上述显示用数据请求消息,获取所请求的请求图像的识别信息。根据该识别信息,对显示用数据中应包含的请求图像进行确定。  Specifically, the display object ID acquiring unit 71 acquires identification information of the requested request image from the display data request message. Based on this identification information, the requested image to be included in the display data is specified. the

然后,上述控制脚本生成部80生成定义了显示上述请求图像的第一功能和第二功能的控制脚本。而且,在该控制脚本中还添加以下定义。即,上述第一功能或上述第二功能与用户操作的对应关系的定义。上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述显示用数据请求消息的内容,生成定义了第一或第二功能的触发(用户操作)的控制脚本。  Then, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining a first function and a second function for displaying the requested image. Also, add the following definitions to this control script. That is, the definition of the corresponding relationship between the above-mentioned first function or the above-mentioned second function and user operations. The control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining a trigger (user operation) of the first or second function based on the content of the display data request message. the

最后,上述显示用数据生成部62生成包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本的显示用数据。  Finally, the display data generation unit 62 generates display data including the request image and the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 . the

由此,根据图像显示装置所请求的显示用数据(图像),可以生成定义了第一和第二功能并且定义了各功能的触发(用户操作)的控制脚本,可以提供包含这样的控制脚本的显示用数据,作为对图像显示装置请求的响应。  Thus, based on the display data (image) requested by the image display device, a control script defining the first and second functions and triggering (user operation) of each function can be generated, and a control script including such a control script can be provided. Data for display as a response to a request from an image display device. the

上述控制脚本生成部80生成上述控制脚本,除了定义图像显示装置显示请求图像的第一功能外,还定义利用该第一功能显示上述请求图像时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对图像显示装置的基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。而且,可以在控制脚本中描述上述各功能与成为其触发的用户操作的对应关系。  The control script generating unit 80 generates the control script to define, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when displaying the requested image by the first function in addition to the first function of the image display device to display the requested image. The second function described above is also a function of the image display device realized by combining basic functions of the image display device. Furthermore, the corresponding relationship between each of the above-mentioned functions and user operations that trigger them may be described in the control script. the

从而,通过根据显示用数据的内容生成控制脚本并提供给图像显示装置,不仅能够提供显示请求图像的功能,还能够提供多种第二功能给图像显示装置。还能够指定成为其触发的用户操作。  Therefore, by generating a control script based on the content of the display data and providing it to the image display device, not only the function of displaying the requested image but also various second functions can be provided to the image display device. It is also possible to specify a user action to be triggered by. the

因而,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对图像显示装置的基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  Therefore, even after the image display device is put on the market, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage part of the image display device can be easily updated without updating the basic function program. Change the function of the image display device accordingly. the

而且,控制脚本生成部80按照上述图像显示装置发送来的指定上述用户操作与上述图像显示装置功能的组合的指示信号,也可以将上述用户操作与上述第一功能或上述第二功能对应,从而生成控制脚本。  Furthermore, the control script generator 80 may associate the user operation with the first function or the second function according to an instruction signal sent from the image display device specifying a combination of the user operation and the function of the image display device, so that Generate a control script. the

根据上述结构,控制脚本生成部80按照上述图像显示装置发送来的指示信号,生成定义了第一或第二功能与触发(用户操作)的对应关系的控制脚本。此外,上述指示信号也可以包含在上述显示用数据请求消息中。  According to the above configuration, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the correspondence relationship between the first or second function and the trigger (user operation) according to the instruction signal sent from the image display device. In addition, the instruction signal may be included in the display data request message. the

从而,根据图像显示装置的指示,向该图像显示装置提供用户操作与功能相对应的控制脚本。即,由于可以提供具有个性化的控制脚本,以提高图像显示装置用户的操作性,因此能够容易地使图像显示装置的动作面向用户而具有个性化。  Therefore, according to the instruction of the image display device, the control script corresponding to the user's operation and function is provided to the image display device. That is, since a personalized control script can be provided to improve operability for the user of the image display device, it is possible to easily personalize the operation of the image display device for the user. the

或者,上述控制脚本生成部80也可以将上述用户操作与受理该操作时上述图像显示装置要执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能多个对应,并且对上述每一个功能都描述执行其功能的条件,从而生成上述控制脚本。  Alternatively, the control script generation unit 80 may associate the user operation with a plurality of the first function or the second function to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted, and describe and execute the function for each of the functions. conditions to generate the above control script. the

根据上述结构,控制脚本生成部80将上述图像显示装置从用户受理的一个操作(触发)与多个功能(第一或第二功能)对应进行描述,并且对每一个功能都描述条件,从而生成控制脚本。这样描述上述条件,使得仅在满足该条件的情况下才执行 与该条件对应的功能。  According to the above configuration, the control script generation unit 80 describes one operation (trigger) received by the image display device from the user in association with a plurality of functions (first or second function), and describes conditions for each function, thereby generating Control script. The above-mentioned condition is described in such a way that the function corresponding to the condition is executed only when the condition is met. the

由于将由此生成的控制脚本提供给图像显示装置,因此,图像显示装置按照上述控制脚本,仅执行与所受理的操作对应的多个功能中满足条件的功能。由此,图像显示装置对于同一用户操作,能够根据条件执行不同的功能。  Since the control script thus generated is provided to the image display device, the image display device executes only a function satisfying a condition among a plurality of functions corresponding to the accepted operation according to the control script. Accordingly, the image display device can execute different functions according to conditions for the same user operation. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统包括上述图像显示装置和上述图像数据提供装置,它的特征在于,上述图像数据提供装置根据从上述图像显示装置接收的显示用数据请求消息,生成上述控制脚本,将包含请求图像和上述控制脚本的显示用数据发送到上述图像显示装置,上述图像显示装置按照从上述图像数据提供装置接收到的上述控制脚本,执行与从用户受理的操作对应的上述第一功能或上述第二功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display system of the present invention includes the above-mentioned image display device and the above-mentioned image data providing device, and it is characterized in that the above-mentioned image data providing device generates the above-mentioned control a script for transmitting display data including a request image and the control script to the image display device, and the image display device executes the first operation corresponding to the operation received from the user according to the control script received from the image data providing device. A function or the above-mentioned second function. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的控制方法是包括图像数据提供装置和对该图像数据提供装置生成的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像的图像显示装置的图像显示系统的控制方法,它的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置将请求显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息发送到上述图像数据提供装置的请求步骤,该显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,所述控制脚本定义显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的该图像显示装置的动作即第二功能;上述图像数据提供装置从上述图像显示装置发送的上述显示用数据请求消息获取所请求的请求图像识别信息的识别信息获取步骤;生成控制脚本的控制脚本生成步骤,该控制脚本定义显示由上述识别信息获取步骤中获取的识别信息所确定的请求图像的第一功能以及显示上述请求图像时作为上述图像显示装置的动作的第二功能,并且将用户对上述图像显示装置的操作与受理该操作时上述图像显示装置要执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能相对应进行定义;生成显示用数据并发送到上述图像显示装置的发送步骤,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和在上述控制脚本生成步骤中生成的控制脚本;以及上述图像显示装置根据从上述图像数据提供装置接收的上述控制脚本来执行基本功能程序存放部中存放的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序从而执行上述第一功能和上述第二功能中的某一个功能的控制脚本执行步骤,上述控制脚本执行步骤是按照上述控制脚本执行与从用户受理的操作对应的上述第一功能或上述第二功能的步骤。  In order to achieve the above object, the method for controlling an image display system of the present invention is a method for controlling an image display system including an image data providing device and an image display device that processes display data generated by the image data providing device to display an image. The present invention is characterized in that it includes: a requesting step in which the image display device sends a display data request message requesting display data to the image data providing device, the display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines displaying the image. The first function of the first function and the operation of the image display device when displaying the image using the first function, that is, the second function; the image data providing device acquires the requested image from the display data request message transmitted from the image display device an identification information acquisition step of identification information; a control script generation step of generating a control script defining a first function for displaying a request image specified by the identification information acquired in the above identification information acquisition step and displaying the above request image as the above-mentioned The second function of the operation of the image display device, and defines the operation of the user on the image display device corresponding to the first function or the second function to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted; generating display data And the sending step of sending to the above-mentioned image display device, the display data includes the above-mentioned request image and the control script generated in the above-mentioned control script generating step; and the above-mentioned image display device generates Executing the basic function program called from the above-mentioned control script stored in the basic function program storage unit to execute the control script execution step of one of the above-mentioned first function and the above-mentioned second function. The above-mentioned control script execution step is according to the above-mentioned control script. The script executes the steps of the above-mentioned first function or the above-mentioned second function corresponding to the operation accepted from the user. the

根据上述结构和方法,图像数据提供装置根据图像显示装置所请求的显示用数据的内容,生成定义了第二功能的控制脚本,与请求图像一起作为显示用数据而提供。而且,在上述控制脚本中,描述了图像显示装置受理的用户操作与受理该操作 时图像显示装置要执行的功能的对应关系。从图像数据提供装置获取上述显示用数据的图像显示装置,根据包含在该显示用数据中的控制脚本,在受理用户操作时,执行对应于该操作的第一或第二功能。  According to the above configuration and method, the image data providing device generates a control script defining the second function based on the content of the display data requested by the image display device, and provides the requested image as display data. Moreover, in the above control script, the corresponding relationship between the user operation accepted by the image display device and the function to be executed by the image display device when the operation is accepted is described. The image display device that has acquired the display data from the image data providing device executes the first or second function corresponding to the operation when receiving a user operation based on the control script included in the display data. the

从而,能够构建可以容易地进行作为组合型设备的图像显示装置的功能变更的图像显示系统。  Therefore, it is possible to construct an image display system that can easily change the function of the image display device as a combination device. the

补充事项3  Supplement 3

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示装置对显示目标物用的显示用数据进行处理,从而显示目标物,该图像显示装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括目标物和至少定义显示该目标物的第一功能的控制脚本,该图像显示装置包括:执行存放于基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42;以及控制脚本执行部41,该控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行上述控制脚本定义的上述第一功能,并且执行上述控制脚本作为第二功能而定义的利用上述第一功能显示上述目标物时的本装置的动作,上述控制脚本中还定义有再描绘区域,该再描绘区域是当上述第一功能或上述第二功能为跟随显示画面变更的变更附带功能时应进行再描绘的显示画面的区域,上述控制脚本执行部41执行上述变更附带功能时,按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42,对再描绘区域进行确定,执行该再描绘区域的再描绘。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display device of the present invention processes the display data for displaying the target, thereby displaying the target. The control script of the first function, the image display device includes: the basic function execution part 42 that executes the basic function program called from the above-mentioned control script stored in the basic function program storage part; and the control script execution part 41, the control script The execution part 41 controls the above-mentioned basic function execution part 42 according to the above-mentioned control script, executes the above-mentioned first function defined by the above-mentioned control script, and executes the basic function when the above-mentioned object is displayed using the above-mentioned first function defined by the above-mentioned control script as the second function. In the operation of the device, a re-rendering area is further defined in the control script, and the re-rendering area is an area of the display screen that should be re-rendered when the first function or the second function is an additional function following the change of the display screen, The control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 according to the control script to determine a re-rendering area, and executes re-rendering of the re-rendering area when executing the modified additional function. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置获取包括目标物和至少定义显示该目标物的功能的控制脚本的显示用数据,对该显示用数据进行处理,从而显示上述目标物。具体而言,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本,控制执行从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42,执行控制脚本中定义的功能(显示目标物的第一功能),从而显示目标物。即,根据控制脚本对一个以上的上述基本功能进行组合,从而实现图像显示装置的一个功能(上述第一功能等)。所谓目标物,是指显示于图像显示装置的对象物,是指图像、动态图像、图形、文本、照片、插图等一切显示对象物。  According to the above configuration, the image display device acquires display data including an object and a control script defining at least a function for displaying the object, and processes the display data to display the object. Specifically, the control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 that executes the basic function program called from the above-mentioned control script according to the control script, and executes the function (the first function of displaying the object) defined in the control script, thereby Display the target. That is, one or more basic functions described above are combined based on the control script to realize one function (the first function described above, etc.) of the image display device. The so-called object refers to an object displayed on an image display device, and refers to all display objects such as images, moving images, graphics, texts, photographs, and illustrations. the

而且,在上述控制脚本中,除了定义显示目标物的第一功能外,还定义有利用该第一功能显示上述目标物时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对上述基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  Furthermore, in the control script, in addition to defining the first function of displaying the object, an operation of the image display device when the object is displayed using the first function is defined as a second function. The above-mentioned second function is also a function of the image display device realized by combining the above-mentioned basic functions. the

上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行上述第二功能。  The control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 to execute the second function according to the control script. the

从而,利用控制脚本,在图像显示装置中不仅能够实现显示目标物的功能,还 能够实现多种第二功能。  Therefore, using the control script, not only the function of displaying the object but also various second functions can be realized in the image display device. the

而且,上述控制脚本中除定义上述第一和第二功能之外,还定义有再描绘区域。所谓再描绘区域,是指图像显示装置伴随执行第一或第二功能而需要变更显示内容时应进行再描绘的显示画面的区域。将上述第一和第二功能中伴随显示内容变更的功能称之为变更附带功能。  Furthermore, in addition to defining the above-mentioned first and second functions, a re-rendering area is also defined in the above-mentioned control script. The so-called re-rendering area refers to the area of the display screen that should be re-rendered when the image display device needs to change the display content due to the execution of the first or second function. Among the above-mentioned first and second functions, the functions accompanied by the change of the displayed content are referred to as functions accompanying the change. the

上述控制脚本执行部41执行上述变更附带功能时,按照上述控制脚本中描述的再描绘区域的定义,控制上述基本功能执行部42,对再描绘区域进行确定,从而执行该再描绘区域的再描绘。  When the above-mentioned control script execution unit 41 executes the above-mentioned modified supplementary functions, it controls the above-mentioned basic function execution unit 42 according to the definition of the re-rendering area described in the above-mentioned control script, determines the re-rendering area, and executes the re-rendering of the re-rendering area. . the

由此,利用控制脚本,在对图像显示装置执行第一或第二功能时,可以改变该控制脚本定义的再描绘区域内的显示内容。  Thus, by using the control script, when the first or second function is executed on the image display device, the display content in the re-rendering area defined by the control script can be changed. the

控制脚本是可以根据要显示的内容、每次都包含在显示用数据内而提供给图像显示装置的脚本。从而,根据显示何种目标物、或执行何种功能等情况,可以任意动态地定义再描绘区域,对图像显示装置进行再描绘。  The control script is a script that can be included in the display data every time according to the content to be displayed, and can be provided to the image display device. Therefore, according to what kind of object is displayed, what kind of function is executed, etc., the re-rendering area can be arbitrarily and dynamically defined, and the image display device can be re-rendered. the

由以上可知,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。而且,可以根据情况动态地定义再描绘区域,容易地对图像显示装置进行再描绘。  As can be seen from the above, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit can be easily implemented without updating the basic function program. Functional change of the image display device. Furthermore, the re-rendering area can be dynamically defined according to the situation, and the image display device can be re-rendered easily. the

此外,即使上述基本功能程序存放部由ROM等非易失性存储装置实现、不可能容易改写所存放的基本功能程序的情况下,也可以如上所述,容易地变更图像显示装置的功能。因此,若对组合型设备应用本发明的图像显示装置,则效果特别大。  In addition, even when the basic function program storage unit is realized by a nonvolatile storage device such as ROM and the stored basic function program cannot be easily rewritten, the functions of the image display device can be easily changed as described above. Therefore, when the image display device of the present invention is applied to a combination device, the effect is particularly large. the

又,由于能够这样容易地进行功能变更,因此对于预先装入的功能,能够省去了在出售之前考虑所有需求并为了网罗这些需求而事先安装大量功能的麻烦。其结果,能够减轻图像显示装置开发的负担。  Also, since functions can be changed easily in this way, it is possible to save the trouble of considering all requirements before selling and installing a large number of functions in advance to cover these requirements for pre-installed functions. As a result, the burden of image display device development can be reduced. the

而且,定义上述第一功能和第二功能的控制脚本与图像显示装置显示的图像一起,包含在显示用数据中而提供给图像显示装置。因此,能够将所显示的图像与第二功能对应地进行管理,不管是在生成并发送显示用数据的一侧,还是在接收并处理显示用数据的一侧(图像显示装置),都容易进行管理。  Then, the control script defining the first function and the second function described above is included in the display data together with the image displayed by the image display device and supplied to the image display device. Therefore, it is possible to manage the displayed image in association with the second function, and it is easy to perform both on the side that generates and transmits the display data and on the side (image display device) that receives and processes the display data. manage. the

而且,由于对每一个显示用数据(以及其中包含的图像)都生成控制脚本,因此图像显示装置能够根据显示用数据(目标物),高效率地仅获取自身处理的显示用数据(目标物)所需的第二功能,或者在这些功能是变更附带功能的情况下,获取定义了适当再描绘区域的控制脚本。  Furthermore, since the control script is generated for each display data (and the image contained therein), the image display device can efficiently acquire only the display data (object) processed by itself based on the display data (object). Secondary functions required, or in the case of these functions incidental to changes, obtain control scripts that define appropriate rerendering regions. the

由以上可知,能够高效率地开发图像显示装置,并且能够容易地变更已上市的图像显示装置的功能。  From the above, it is possible to efficiently develop an image display device and to easily change the functions of an already-marketed image display device. the

而且,上述控制脚本中最好作如下定义,使得上述再描绘区域完全包含上述目标物的显示区域或完全不包含上述目标物的显示区域。  Furthermore, it is preferable that the above-mentioned control script is defined so that the above-mentioned redrawing area completely includes the display area of the above-mentioned object or does not include the display area of the above-mentioned object at all. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置按照上述控制脚本,对执行变更附带功能时所需的再描绘区域进行确定时,确定再描绘区域,使其完全包含或者完全不包含目标物。即,使得再描绘区域不会仅包含一部分目标物。  According to the above configuration, the image display device determines the redrawing region so as to completely include or not include the target object when specifying the redrawing region necessary for executing the changed incidental function according to the above-mentioned control script. That is, the re-rendering area does not include only a part of the object. the

从而,利用控制脚本,能够控制图像显示装置,使其仅对完全包含在再描绘区域中的目标物执行再描绘处理。  Therefore, using the control script, the image display device can be controlled so as to execute the re-rendering process only on objects completely included in the re-rendering area. the

如上所述,利用控制脚本,由于可以任意地指定图像显示装置执行再描绘的再描绘区域,因此,在以下的情况中会起到特别大的效果。  As described above, the control script can arbitrarily designate the redrawing area where the image display device performs redrawing, and therefore, it is particularly effective in the following cases. the

例如,假设上述显示画面中包含重叠的目标物。  For example, assume that the above-mentioned display screen contains overlapping objects. the

若在目标物(以下为变更对象目标物)显示过程中执行变更附带功能,则将完全包含该变更对象目标物的区域(例如,外接矩形)确定为再描绘区域。然而,只要该再描绘区域中包含一部分其它的重叠目标物,那么仅对上述再描绘区域中包含的上述变更对象目标物进行再描绘,是无法进行正确再描绘的。需要对上述再描绘区域中包含的所有目标物进行再描绘。  When the change incidental function is executed while an object (hereinafter referred to as a change target object) is displayed, an area (for example, a circumscribing rectangle) completely including the change target object is determined as a redrawing area. However, as long as some other overlapping objects are included in the re-rendering area, correct re-rendering cannot be performed only by re-rendering the object to be changed included in the re-rendering area. It is necessary to re-render all objects contained in the above-mentioned re-rendering area. the

这里,当上述再描绘区域中部分地包含其它目标物时,为了进行再描绘,需要进行处理,即仅对该目标物中包含在上述再描绘区域内的部分(剪辑区域)进行确定。这样,将求出剪辑区域的处理称为剪辑处理。上述目标物的形状越复杂,该剪辑处理对于图像显示装置来说就是负荷越高的处理。因而,希望将再描绘区域确定为使其完全包含或完全不包含目标物。又,为了减轻再描绘处理的负荷,还希望将再描绘区域限定在所需的最低限度内。  Here, when another object is partly included in the redrawing area, it is necessary to perform a process of specifying only a part (clipping area) of the object included in the redrawing area in order to perform redrawing. In this way, the processing of finding the clipping area is called clipping processing. The more complicated the shape of the object, the higher the processing load on the image display device. Therefore, it is desirable to determine the redrawing area so as to completely include or not include the target object. Also, in order to reduce the load of the re-rendering process, it is also desirable to limit the re-rendering area to the necessary minimum. the

这里,若利用上述控制脚本,则根据显示用数据的内容,可以指定再描绘区域,使其不会部分地包含目标物(特别是使得剪辑处理的负荷变大的具有复杂形状的目标物),并将其限制在所需最低限度的区域内。  Here, if the above-mentioned control script is used, according to the content of the display data, it is possible to designate the redrawing area so that objects (particularly objects with complex shapes that increase the load of clipping processing) are not partially included, and limit it to the minimum required area. the

由此,按照这种控制脚本进行再描绘时,图像显示装置既避免了剪辑处理,又仅将所需最低限度的区域确定为再描绘区域,从而能够高效率地执行再描绘处理。  Therefore, when re-rendering is performed according to such a control script, the image display device avoids the clipping process and only determines the minimum necessary area as the re-rendering area, so that the re-rendering process can be performed efficiently. the

或者,上述控制脚本中也可以这样定义上述再描绘区域,使其为本装置的整个显示画面。  Alternatively, the above-mentioned re-rendering area may also be defined in the above-mentioned control script in such a way that it is the entire display screen of the device. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置执行变更附带功能时,按照上述控制脚本,将整 个显示区域确定作为再描绘区域而执行再描绘。  According to the above configuration, when the image display device executes the additional function of changing, the entire display area is determined as the re-rendering area according to the above-mentioned control script, and the re-rendering is executed. the

从而,可以对整个显示画面进行所希望的再描绘,正确地切换显示画面。  Therefore, desired redrawing can be performed on the entire display screen, and the display screen can be switched accurately. the

此外,上述控制脚本中指定再描绘区域的方法是其中一例,并不限于此。例如,在工作存储区域不足的图像显示装置中,为了顺利地进行显示画面的切换,也可以通过指定再描绘区域使得对预定的显示装置始终进行再描绘或者指定目标物使得对确定目标物始终进行再描绘,从而使图像显示装置对再描绘区域进行确定。  In addition, the method of specifying the re-rendering area in the above-mentioned control script is an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, in an image display device with insufficient work storage area, in order to switch the display screen smoothly, it is also possible to designate a re-rendering area so that a predetermined display device is always re-rendered or designate an object so that a certain target object is always re-rendered. re-rendering, so that the image display device determines the re-rendering area. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像数据提供装置生成图像显示装置显示目标物用的显示用数据,该图像数据提供装置的特征在于,包括:生成至少定义了显示上述目标物的第一功能的控制脚本的控制脚本生成部80;以及生成显示用数据的显示用数据生成部62,该显示用数据包括上述目标物和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本,上述控制脚本生成部80生成控制脚本,该控制脚本还定义了利用上述第一功能显示上述目标物时的上述图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能,并且还定义了再描绘区域,该再描绘区域是指当上述第一功能或上述第二功能为上述图像显示装置中伴随显示画面变更的变更附带功能时上述图像显示装置应进行再描绘的显示画面的区域。  In order to achieve the above object, the image data providing device of the present invention generates display data for the image display device to display the object, and the image data providing device is characterized in that it includes: generating a control device that defines at least the first function of displaying the above-mentioned object and a display data generating part 62 for generating display data, the display data including the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned control script generated by the control script generating part 80, the control script generating part 80 generating control A script, the control script also defines the action of the image display device when the first function is used to display the object as the second function, and also defines a re-rendering area, and the re-rendering area refers to when the first function or The second function is an area of the display screen to be redrawn by the image display device when the additional function is changed accompanying a change of the display screen in the image display device. the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本生成部80生成控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了第一功能和第二功能,并且还将上述各功能为变更附带功能时需要进行再描绘的区域定义为再描绘区域。  According to the above configuration, the control script generation unit 80 generates a control script that defines the first function and the second function, and defines an area where re-rendering is required when each function is changed as a re-rendering area. the

由此,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。而且,可以根据情况动态地定义再描绘区域,容易地对图像显示装置进行再描绘。  Thus, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the image display can be easily performed without updating the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit. Functional changes of the display device. Furthermore, the re-rendering area can be dynamically defined according to the situation, and the image display device can be re-rendered easily. the

上述控制脚本生成部80最好生成如下那样定义的控制脚本,即,使得上述再描绘区域完全包含上述目标物的显示区域或完全不包含上述目标物的显示区域。  Preferably, the control script generation unit 80 generates a control script defined such that the redrawing area completely includes the display area of the object or does not include the display area of the object at all. the

由此,能够控制图像显示装置,使得既避免了高负荷的剪辑处理,又将所需最低限度的区域确定作为再描绘区域,从而能够执行高效率的再描绘处理。  In this way, the image display device can be controlled so that high-load clipping processing can be avoided, and the minimum required area can be specified as the re-rendering area, so that efficient re-rendering processing can be performed. the

或者,上述控制脚本生成部80也可以生成控制脚本,该控制脚本定义上述再描绘区域,使其为上述图像显示装置的整个显示画面。  Alternatively, the control script generation unit 80 may generate a control script that defines the redrawing area so as to be the entire display screen of the image display device. the

从而,在图像显示装置中,可以对整个显示画面进行所希望的再描绘,正确地切换显示画面。  Therefore, in the image display device, desired redrawing can be performed on the entire display screen, and the display screen can be switched accurately. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示 装置;以及上述图像数据提供装置,上述图像数据提供装置生成显示用数据,该显示用数据包含上述图像显示装置所请求的目标物和上述控制脚本,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述显示用数据中包含的上述控制脚本执行动作。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display system of the present invention is characterized in that it includes: the above-mentioned image display device; and the above-mentioned image data providing device, the above-mentioned image data providing device generates display data, and the display data includes The target object and the control script, the control script execution unit 41 executes the operation according to the control script included in the display data. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的控制方法是包括图像数据提供装置和对该图像数据提供装置生成的显示用数据进行处理从而显示目标物的图像显示装置的图像显示系统的控制方法,它的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置向上述图像数据提供装置请求显示用数据的请求步骤,该显示用数据包括目标物和至少定义了显示该目标物的第一功能的控制脚本;上述图像数据提供装置生成控制脚本的生成步骤,该控制脚本定义显示由上述图像显示装置所请求的目标物的第一功能,并且定义利用上述第一功能显示上述目标物时的上述图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能;再定义再描绘区域并对上述生成步骤中生成的控制脚本进行添加的添加步骤,该再描绘区域是指当上述控制脚本中定义的上述第一功能或上述第二功能是上述图像显示装置中伴随显示画面变更的变更附带功能时上述图像显示装置应进行再描绘的显示画面的区域;将显示用数据发送到上述图像显示装置的发送步骤,该显示用数据包括上述请求的目标物和在上述生成步骤以及添加步骤中生成的控制脚本;第一功能执行步骤,该第一功能执行步骤是上述图像显示装置按照从上述图像数据提供装置接收的上述控制脚本,执行存放在基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序,从而执行上述第一功能并显示上述请求目标物;第二功能执行步骤,该第二功能执行步骤是按照上述控制脚本执行上述基本功能程序,从而执行上述第二功能;确定步骤,该确定步骤是当上述第一功能执行步骤执行的上述第一功能或上述第二功能执行步骤执行的上述第二功能是伴随显示画面变更的变更附带功能时,按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部41,对上述再描绘区域进行确定;以及对上述确定步骤中确定的再描绘区域进行再描绘的再描绘步骤。  In order to achieve the above object, the control method of the image display system of the present invention is a control method of the image display system including an image data providing device and an image display device that processes the display data generated by the image data providing device to display an object, It is characterized in that it includes: a requesting step in which the above-mentioned image display device requests the above-mentioned image data providing device for data for display, the data for display includes an object and a control script defining at least a first function for displaying the object; A step in which the data providing device generates a control script defining a first function for displaying an object requested by the image display device, and defining an operation of the image display device when displaying the object using the first function as The second function; the step of adding to the control script generated in the above-mentioned generation step by redefining the re-drawing area, and the re-drawing area refers to when the above-mentioned first function or the above-mentioned second function defined in the above-mentioned control script is the above-mentioned image An area of the display screen that the above-mentioned image display device should re-render when there is a change in the display device accompanied by a change of the display screen; a step of sending display data to the above-mentioned image display device, the display data including the object of the above-mentioned request and the control script generated in the above generating step and adding step; the first function executing step, the first function executing step is that the above image display device executes the basic function stored in the basic function program according to the above control script received from the above image data providing device The basic function program called out from the above-mentioned control script in the storage unit, so as to execute the above-mentioned first function and display the above-mentioned requested object; the second function execution step, the second function execution step is to execute the above-mentioned basic function program according to the above-mentioned control script, Thereby executing the above-mentioned second function; a determining step, the determining step is when the above-mentioned first function executed by the above-mentioned first function executing step or the above-mentioned second function executed by the above-mentioned second function executing step is a change incidental function accompanied by a display screen change , controlling the basic function execution unit 41 according to the control script to determine the re-rendering area; and a re-rendering step of re-rendering the re-rendering area determined in the determining step. the

根据上述方法,上述图像显示装置向上述图像数据提供装置请求显示用数据,该显示用数据包括目标物和至少定义显示该目标物的第一功能的控制脚本,上述图像数据提供装置根据该请求,生成包含所请求目标物的显示用数据。然后,上述图像数据提供装置按如下所述那样生成包含在上述显示用数据中的控制脚本。  According to the above-mentioned method, the above-mentioned image display device requests display data from the above-mentioned image data providing device, the display data includes an object and a control script defining at least a first function for displaying the object, and the above-mentioned image data providing device, according to the request, Generate display data including the requested object. Then, the image data providing device generates a control script included in the display data as follows. the

即,首先生成控制脚本,该控制脚本定义显示所请求目标物的第一功能,并且定义利用该第一功能显示上述目标物时的上述图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。然后,再定义再描绘区域并将其包含在上述控制脚本中,该再描绘区域是指当上述 第一功能或上述第二功能是上述图像显示装置中伴随显示画面变更的变更附带功能时上述图像显示装置应进行再描绘的显示画面的区域。  That is, first, a control script is generated which defines a first function for displaying a requested object, and defines, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when the object is displayed using the first function. Then, redefine the re-rendering area and include it in the above-mentioned control script. The re-rendering area refers to the above-mentioned image when the above-mentioned first function or the above-mentioned second function is a function accompanying the change of the display screen in the above-mentioned image display device. The area of the display screen where the display device should perform re-rendering. the

上述图像显示装置从上述图像数据提供装置接收包含上述那样生成的控制脚本的显示用数据,控制脚本执行部41根据上述控制脚本进行动作。具体而言,按照控制脚本执行第一功能和第二功能,当该各功能是变更附带功能时,对再描绘区域进行确定,执行再描绘。  The image display device receives display data including the control script generated as described above from the image data providing device, and the control script execution unit 41 operates according to the control script. Specifically, the first function and the second function are executed in accordance with the control script, and when the functions are functions incidental to the change, the re-rendering area is determined and the re-rendering is executed. the

由此,利用控制脚本,可以实现这样的图像显示系统,该图像显示系统不仅能够使图像显示装置执行显示目标物的第一功能,还能够使其执行多种第二功能,并且能够对图像显示装置指定执行第一或第二功能时应进行再描绘的区域。  Thus, by using the control script, it is possible to realize an image display system that not only enables the image display device to perform the first function of displaying an object, but also enables it to perform various second functions, and can display The device specifies an area that should be redrawn when performing the first or second function. the

由以上可知,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。而且,可以根据情况动态地定义再描绘区域,容易地对图像显示装置进行再描绘。  As can be seen from the above, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit can be easily implemented without updating the basic function program. Functional change of the image display device. Furthermore, the re-rendering area can be dynamically defined according to the situation, and the image display device can be re-rendered easily. the

补充事项4  Supplement 4

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示装置对从外部获取的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像,该图像显示装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的本装置的动作即第二功能,该图像显示装置包括:执行存放于基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42;以及按照上述控制脚本控制上述基本功能执行部42、执行上述控制脚本中定义的上述第一功能和上述第二功能的控制脚本执行部41,上述控制脚本中,至少定义伴随动作显示利用上述第一功能显示的图像的视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本显示上述图像,并且对该图像执行视觉效果输出功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display device of the present invention processes display data acquired from the outside to display an image, and the image display device is characterized in that the display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines the The first function of the image and the operation of the device when the image is displayed using the first function, that is, the second function, the image display device includes: executing the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit called from the above control script and the control script execution unit 41 that controls the above-mentioned basic function execution unit 42 according to the above-mentioned control script, and executes the above-mentioned first function and the above-mentioned second function defined in the above-mentioned control script. In the above-mentioned control script, at least As the second function, the control script execution unit 41 displays the image according to the control script and executes the visual effect output function on the image. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置获取包括图像和至少定义显示该图像的第一功能的控制脚本的显示用数据,对该显示用数据进行处理,从而显示上述图像。具体而言,控制脚本执行部41按照控制脚本,控制执行从包含在显示用数据中的控制脚本调出的基本功能程序的基本功能执行部42,执行控制脚本中定义的功能(第一功能),从而显示图像。即,根据控制脚本对一个以上的上述基本功能进行组合,从而实现图像显示装置的一个功能(上述第一功能等)。  According to the above configuration, the image display device acquires display data including an image and a control script defining at least a first function for displaying the image, processes the display data, and displays the image. Specifically, the control script execution unit 41 controls and executes the basic function execution unit 42 that executes the basic function program called from the control script included in the display data according to the control script, and executes the function (first function) defined in the control script. , displaying the image. That is, one or more basic functions described above are combined based on the control script to realize one function (the first function described above, etc.) of the image display device. the

而且,在上述控制脚本中,除了定义显示图像的第一功能外,还定义有利用该第一功能显示上述目标物时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能 也是对上述基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  Furthermore, in the control script, in addition to defining the first function of displaying an image, an operation of the image display device when the object is displayed by the first function is defined as a second function. The above-mentioned second function is also a function of the image display device realized by combining the above-mentioned basic functions. the

上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,控制上述基本功能执行部42,执行上述第二功能。  The control script execution unit 41 controls the basic function execution unit 42 to execute the second function according to the control script. the

从而,利用控制脚本,在图像显示装置中不仅能够实现显示图像的功能,还能够实现多种第二功能。  Therefore, by using the control script, not only the function of displaying images but also various second functions can be realized in the image display device. the

具体而言,是在控制脚本中定义伴随动作显示利用上述第一功能显示的图像的视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能。  Specifically, a visual effect output function for displaying an image displayed by the first function accompanying an action is defined in the control script as the second function. the

因而,上述控制脚本执行部41利用第一功能显示上述图像,并且对该图像执行视觉效果输出功能。即,使上述图像带有动作而显示该图像。  Therefore, the control script execution unit 41 displays the image using the first function, and executes the visual effect output function on the image. That is, the above-mentioned image is displayed with motion. the

这样,若利用控制脚本,则可以根据要显示的内容,将上述视觉效果输出功能每次都包含在显示用数据内而提供给图像显示装置。从而,根据显示何种图像,可以使图像显示装置执行视觉效果输出功能。利用第二功能即视觉效果输出功能,可以结合显示内容向用户提供十分有趣的内容。  Thus, by using the control script, the above-mentioned visual effect output function can be included in the display data every time according to the content to be displayed, and can be provided to the image display device. Thus, depending on what kind of image is displayed, the image display device can be made to perform a visual effect output function. Utilizing the second function, that is, the visual effect output function, very interesting content can be provided to the user in combination with the displayed content. the

由以上可知,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  As can be seen from the above, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit can be easily implemented without updating the basic function program. Functional change of the image display device. the

此外,即使上述基本功能程序存放部由ROM等非易失性存储装置实现、不可能容易改写所存放的基本功能程序的情况下,也可以如上所述,容易地变更图像显示装置的功能。因此,若对组合型设备应用本发明的图像显示装置,则效果特别大。  In addition, even when the basic function program storage unit is realized by a nonvolatile storage device such as ROM and the stored basic function program cannot be easily rewritten, the functions of the image display device can be easily changed as described above. Therefore, when the image display device of the present invention is applied to a combination device, the effect is particularly large. the

又,由于能够这样容易地进行功能变更,因此对于预先装入的功能,能够省去了在出售之前考虑所有需求并为了网罗这些需求而事先安装大量功能的麻烦。其结果,能够减轻图像显示装置开发的负担。  Also, since functions can be changed easily in this way, it is possible to save the trouble of considering all requirements before selling and installing a large number of functions in advance to cover these requirements for pre-installed functions. As a result, the burden of image display device development can be reduced. the

而且,定义上述第一功能和第二功能的控制脚本与图像显示装置显示的图像一起,包含在显示用数据中而提供给图像显示装置。因此,能够将所显示的图像与第二功能对应地进行管理,不管是在生成并发送显示用数据的一侧,还是在接收并处理显示用数据的一侧(图像显示装置),都容易进行管理。  Furthermore, the control script defining the above-mentioned first function and second function is included in the display data together with the image displayed by the image display device and supplied to the image display device. Therefore, the displayed image can be managed in association with the second function, and it is easy to perform both on the side that generates and transmits the display data and on the side (image display device) that receives and processes the display data. manage. the

而且,由于对每一个显示用数据(以及其中包含的图像)都生成控制脚本,因此图像显示装置能够根据显示用数据(图像),高效率地仅获取自身处理的显示用数据(图像)所需的第二功能(视觉效果输出功能)。  Moreover, since the control script is generated for each display data (and the image contained therein), the image display device can efficiently acquire only the display data (image) required for its own processing based on the display data (image). The second function (visual effect output function). the

由以上可知,能够高效率地开发图像显示装置,并且能够容易地变更已上市的图像显示装置的功能。  From the above, it is possible to efficiently develop an image display device and to easily change the functions of an already-marketed image display device. the

较好的是,在上述控制脚本中,还定义有在利用上述第一功能显示的图像上重叠显示目标物的目标物显示功能作为上述第二功能,并且定义上述各第二功能的定时,使得本装置在执行上述视觉效果输出功能过程中不执行上述目标物显示功能,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本所定义的上述定时,执行上述各第二功能。  Preferably, in the above-mentioned control script, an object display function of superimposing and displaying an object on the image displayed by the above-mentioned first function is defined as the above-mentioned second function, and the timing of each of the above-mentioned second functions is defined such that The device does not execute the object display function during the execution of the visual effect output function, and the control script execution unit 41 executes each of the second functions according to the timing defined by the control script. the

在上述控制脚本中,还可以定义目标物显示功能作为上述第二功能。上述面板显示功能是指在利用上述第一功能显示的图像上重叠显示目标物的功能。所谓目标物,是指显示于图像显示装置的对象物,是指图像、动态图像、图形、文本、照片、插图等一切显示对象物。  In the above-mentioned control script, an object display function may also be defined as the above-mentioned second function. The above-mentioned panel display function is a function of superimposing and displaying an object on the image displayed by the above-mentioned first function. The so-called object refers to an object displayed on an image display device, and refers to all display objects such as images, moving images, graphics, texts, photographs, and illustrations. the

并且,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,对利用第一功能显示的图像执行视觉效果输出功能和目标物显示功能。这里,由于上述控制脚本中定义有各功能的定时,使得执行上述视觉效果输出功能的过程中不执行上述目标物显示功能,因此,上述控制脚本执行部41以不同时执行视觉效果输出功能和目标物显示功能那样执行各功能。  In addition, the control script execution unit 41 executes a visual effect output function and an object display function on the image displayed by the first function according to the control script. Here, since the timing of each function is defined in the above-mentioned control script, the above-mentioned object display function is not executed during the execution of the above-mentioned visual effect output function. Each function is performed like an object display function. the

若同时执行上述视觉效果输出功能和上述目标物显示功能,则图像显示装置就不得不在伴随动作显示的图像上重叠显示目标物。这样,与添加了动画的图像重叠而对其它字符或图形进行描绘的处理,就成为高负荷的处理。因而,产生负荷集中在图像显示装置、不能顺利地执行各功能的问题。  If the above-mentioned visual effect output function and the above-mentioned object display function are executed at the same time, the image display device has to superimpose and display the object on the image displayed along with the motion. In this way, the process of drawing other characters or graphics while superimposing on the animation-added image becomes a high-load process. Therefore, there is a problem that the load is concentrated on the image display device, and each function cannot be smoothly executed. the

根据上述结构,由于上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本执行各功能,使其不同时执行视觉效果输出功能和目标物显示功能,因此能够避免负荷集中到图像显示装置的情况。  According to the above configuration, since the control script execution unit 41 executes each function according to the control script so as not to execute the visual effect output function and the object display function at the same time, concentration of load on the image display device can be avoided. the

作为目标物显示功能的具体例子,可列举有字符显示功能(显示照片(图像)的备注或标题等的功能)或操作菜单显示功能(显示用户可对照片执行的操作一览表的功能)等。  Specific examples of the object display function include a character display function (a function to display comments or titles of photos (images), etc.) and an operation menu display function (a function to display a list of operations that a user can perform on photos). the

在上述控制脚本中,也可以将上述目标物显示功能的开始定义为上述视觉效果输出功能的结束条件,上述控制脚本执行部41开始执行上述目标物显示功能时,按照上述结束条件,结束执行上述视觉效果输出功能。  In the above-mentioned control script, the start of the above-mentioned object display function may also be defined as the end condition of the above-mentioned visual effect output function, and when the above-mentioned control script execution unit 41 starts to execute the above-mentioned object display function, it will end the execution of the above-mentioned object display function according to the above-mentioned end condition. Visual effect output function. the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本执行部41在执行上述视觉效果输出功能过程中,一旦插入上述目标物显示功能的开始指令(例如,通过用户操作,命令执行上述目标物显示功能等),就按照上述结束条件,结束正在执行的视觉效果输出功能。  According to the above structure, the control script executing unit 41 executes the above-mentioned visual effect output function, once an instruction to start the above-mentioned object display function is inserted (for example, an instruction to execute the above-mentioned object display function through user operation, etc.), End condition, end the visual effect output function being executed. the

从而,由于可以在视觉效果输出功能结束(中断)后执行目标物显示功能,因此, 能够避免负荷集中到图像显示装置的情况。  Therefore, since the object display function can be executed after the visual effect output function is terminated (interrupted), it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on the image display device. the

或者,在上述控制脚本中,也可以将上述视觉效果输出功能的结束定义为上述目标物显示功能的开始条件,上述控制脚本执行部41结束执行上述视觉效果输出功能时,按照上述开始条件,开始执行上述目标物显示功能。  Alternatively, in the above-mentioned control script, the end of the above-mentioned visual effect output function may also be defined as the start condition of the above-mentioned object display function. Execute the object display function described above. the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本执行部41在执行上述视觉效果输出功能过程中,一旦插入上述目标物显示功能的开始指令或命令同时(或几乎同时)执行视觉效果输出功能和目标物显示功能时,就按照上述开始条件,先执行视觉效果输出功能,然后开始执行上述目标物显示功能。  According to the above structure, when the above-mentioned control script execution unit 41 executes the above-mentioned visual effect output function, once an instruction or command to start the above-mentioned object display function is inserted to simultaneously (or almost simultaneously) execute the visual effect output function and the object display function, According to the above starting conditions, the visual effect output function is executed first, and then the above object display function is started to be executed. the

从而,由于可以在视觉效果输出功能执行结束后执行目标物显示功能,因此,能够避免负荷集中到图像显示装置的情况。  Therefore, since the object display function can be executed after the execution of the visual effect output function is completed, concentration of load on the image display device can be avoided. the

在上述控制脚本中,还可以定义听觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,该听觉效果输出功能输出与利用上述第一功能显示的图像有关的声音数据,上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述控制脚本,执行与利用上述第一功能显示的图像有关的上述视觉效果输出功能和上述听觉效果输出功能中的至少一种功能。  In the above-mentioned control script, an auditory effect output function may also be defined as the above-mentioned second function, and the auditory effect output function outputs sound data related to the image displayed by the above-mentioned first function, and the above-mentioned control script execution unit 41 follows the above-mentioned control script, At least one of the above-mentioned visual effect output function and the above-mentioned auditory effect output function related to the image displayed by the above-mentioned first function is executed. the

从而,由于图像显示装置可以利用第一功能和视觉效果输出功能显示图像,并且输出与该图像有关的声音数据,因此,能够提供更丰富的内容给用户。  Therefore, since the image display device can use the first function and the visual effect output function to display an image and output sound data related to the image, it can provide richer content to the user. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像数据提供装置生成图像显示装置显示图像用的显示用数据,该图像数据提供装置的特征在于,上述显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义了显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的该图像显示装置的动作即第二功能,该图像数据提供装置包括:根据从上述图像显示装置发送来的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息获取所请求的请求图像的识别信息的显示对象ID获取部71;生成控制脚本的控制脚本生成部80,该控制脚本定义显示由上述显示对象ID获取部71获取的识别信息所确定的请求图像的第一功能,并且至少定义伴随动作显示该请求图像的视觉效果输出功能作为第二功能;以及生成显示用数据的显示用数据生成部62,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本。  In order to achieve the above object, the image data providing device of the present invention generates display data for displaying an image by the image display device, and the image data providing device is characterized in that the above-mentioned display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines how to display the image. The first function of the image and the second function of the operation of the image display device when the image is displayed by the first function, the image data providing device includes: displaying the display data according to a request sent from the image display device The display object ID acquisition part 71 that acquires the identification information of the requested image with the data request message; the control script generation part 80 that generates the control script, and the control script defines the display determined by the identification information acquired by the above-mentioned display object ID acquisition part 71. The first function of the request image, and at least define the visual effect output function of displaying the request image accompanying the action as the second function; The above-mentioned control script generated by the control script generating unit 80 . the

根据上述结构,图像数据提供装置根据上述图像显示装置所生成的请求上述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息,生成显示所请求的图像即请求图像用的显示用数据。显示用数据包括请求图像和控制脚本,该控制脚本定义显示该请求图像的第一功能以及与该请求图像有关的上述第二功能。这里,至少定义视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,该视觉效果输出功能使得显示上述请求图像时,向该请求图像添 加动作而显示。  According to the above configuration, the image data providing device generates display data for displaying a requested image, that is, a requested image, based on a display data request message generated by the image display device for requesting the display data. The display data includes a request image and a control script defining a first function for displaying the request image and the aforementioned second function related to the request image. Here, at least a visual effect output function for displaying the requested image by adding an action to the requested image is defined as the second function. the

具体而言,上述显示对象ID获取部71从上述显示用数据请求消息,获取请求图像的识别信息。根据该识别信息,对显示用数据中应包含的请求图像进行确定。  Specifically, the display object ID acquisition unit 71 acquires identification information of a requested image from the display data request message. Based on this identification information, the requested image to be included in the display data is specified. the

然后,上述控制脚本生成部80生成定义了显示上述请求图像的第一功能的控制脚本。而且,在该控制脚本中还添加以下定义。即,是利用上述第一功能显示上述请求图像时的上述图像显示装置的作为第二功能的动作的定义。上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述显示用数据请求消息的内容,生成定义了该第二功能(至少是上述视觉效果输出功能)的控制脚本。  Then, the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining a first function for displaying the requested image. Also, add the following definitions to this control script. That is, it is a definition of an operation as the second function of the image display device when the requested image is displayed by the first function. The control script generating unit 80 generates a control script defining the second function (at least the visual effect output function) based on the content of the display data request message. the

最后,上述显示用数据生成部62生成包括上述请求图像和上述控制脚本生成部80生成的上述控制脚本的显示用数据。  Finally, the display data generation unit 62 generates display data including the request image and the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 . the

由此,根据图像显示装置所请求的显示用数据(图像),可以生成定义了第一和第二功能的控制脚本,可以提供包含这样的控制脚本的显示用数据,作为对图像显示装置请求的响应。  Thus, based on the display data (image) requested by the image display device, a control script defining the first and second functions can be generated, and the display data including such a control script can be provided as a request to the image display device. response. the

上述控制脚本生成部80生成上述控制脚本,除了定义图像显示装置显示请求图像的第一功能外,还定义利用该第一功能显示上述请求图像时的该图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。上述第二功能也是对图像显示装置的基本功能进行组合而实现的图像显示装置的功能。  The control script generating unit 80 generates the control script to define, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when displaying the requested image by the first function in addition to the first function of the image display device to display the requested image. The second function described above is also a function of the image display device realized by combining basic functions of the image display device. the

从而,通过根据显示用数据的内容生成控制脚本并提供给图像显示装置,不仅能够提供显示请求图像的功能,还能够提供多种第二功能给图像显示装置。而且,作为第二功能,由于至少定义了上述视觉效果输出功能,因此,上述图像显示装置能够对利用第一功能显示的图像添加动作而显示,利用该视觉效果输出功能,可以结合显示内容向用户提供更加有趣的内容。  Therefore, by generating a control script based on the content of the display data and providing it to the image display device, not only the function of displaying the requested image but also various second functions can be provided to the image display device. Moreover, as the second function, since at least the above-mentioned visual effect output function is defined, the above-mentioned image display device can add actions to the image displayed by the first function and display it. Using this visual effect output function, it is possible to combine the displayed content to the user. Provide more interesting content. the

如上所述,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对图像显示装置的基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。  As described above, even after the image display device is launched, the second function executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed without updating the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit of the image display device. Functional changes of the image display device can be easily performed. the

此外,即使图像显示装置的上述基本功能程序存放部由ROM等非易失性存储装置实现、不可能容易改写所存放的基本功能程序的情况下,也可以如上所述,容易地变更图像显示装置的功能。因此,若对具有上述图像显示装置的基本功能执行部42的组合型设备提供上述控制脚本生成部80生成的控制脚本,则效果特别大。  In addition, even if the above-mentioned basic function program storage unit of the image display device is realized by a nonvolatile storage device such as ROM, and it is impossible to easily rewrite the stored basic function program, the image display device can be easily changed as described above. function. Therefore, when the control script generated by the control script generation unit 80 is provided to a combined device having the basic function execution unit 42 of the image display device, the effect is particularly large. the

又,由于能够这样容易地变更图像显示装置的功能,因此对于预先装入图像显示装置的功能,能够省去了在出售之前考虑所有需求并为了网罗这些需求而事先安 装大量功能的麻烦。其结果,能够减轻图像显示装置开发的负担。  Also, since the functions of the image display device can be easily changed in this way, it is possible to save the trouble of considering all needs before selling the functions preinstalled in the image display device and installing a large number of functions in advance to cover these needs. As a result, the burden of image display device development can be reduced. the

而且,定义上述第一功能和第二功能的控制脚本与图像显示装置显示的图像一起,包含在显示用数据中而提供给图像显示装置。因此,能够将所显示的图像与第二功能对应地进行管理,不管是在生成并发送显示用数据的一侧(图像数据提供装置),还是在接收并处理显示用数据的一侧(图像显示装置),都容易进行管理。  Then, the control script defining the first function and the second function described above is included in the display data together with the image displayed by the image display device and supplied to the image display device. Therefore, the displayed image can be managed in association with the second function, regardless of whether it is on the side that generates and transmits display data (image data providing device) or on the side that receives and processes display data (image display device). device), are easy to manage. the

而且,由于上述控制脚本生成部80对每一个显示用数据(以及其中包含的图像)都生成控制脚本,因此,图像显示装置能够根据显示用数据(图像),高效率地将图像显示装置处理的显示用数据(图像)所需的第二功能提供给图像显示装置。  In addition, since the control script generating unit 80 generates a control script for each display data (and image contained therein), the image display device can efficiently process the image display device according to the display data (image). A second function necessary for displaying data (image) is provided to the image display device. the

由以上可知,能够高效率地开发图像显示装置,并且能够容易地变更已上市的图像显示装置的功能。  From the above, it is possible to efficiently develop an image display device and to easily change the functions of an already-marketed image display device. the

还可以将可应用于提供给上述图像显示装置的图像的视觉效果,与该图像相关联地存储于效果信息存储部,上述控制脚本生成部80从上述效果信息存储部确定与上述请求图像相关联的视觉效果,生成定义了输出该视觉效果用的视觉效果输出功能的控制脚本。  The visual effect applicable to the image provided to the image display device may be stored in the effect information storage unit in association with the image, and the control script generation unit 80 determines from the effect information storage unit that the image is associated with the requested image. a visual effect, and a control script defining a visual effect output function for outputting the visual effect is generated. the

根据上述结构,控制脚本生成部80从上述效果信息存储部,确定可应用于显示用数据请求消息所请求的请求图像的视觉效果,在控制脚本中定义对上述请求图像执行上述视觉效果用的视觉效果输出功能。  According to the above configuration, the control script generating unit 80 specifies the visual effect applicable to the request image requested by the display data request message from the effect information storage unit, and defines in the control script the visual effect for executing the above visual effect on the request image. Effect output function. the

从而,能够生成并提供控制脚本,使得图像显示装置可以执行适用于图像显示装置所请求的图像的视觉效果。  Thus, a control script can be generated and provided so that the image display device can execute a visual effect suitable for an image requested by the image display device. the

较好的是,上述显示用数据请求消息中,包含表示上述图像显示装置的基本功能的规格信息,上述控制脚本生成部80根据上述规格信息,确定上述控制脚本中是否包含上述视觉效果输出功能的定义。  Preferably, the display data request message includes specification information indicating basic functions of the image display device, and the control script generator 80 determines whether the control script includes the visual effect output function based on the specification information. definition. the

根据上述结构,图像显示装置发送的显示用数据请求消息中,包含表示该图像显示装置具有哪种基本功能的规格信息。根据该规格信息,上述控制脚本生成部80判断上述图像显示装置是否具有执行视觉效果输出功能用的基本功能。然后,根据该判断,确定提供给上述图像显示装置的控制脚本中是否包含视觉效果输出功能。  According to the above configuration, the display data request message transmitted from the image display device includes specification information indicating which basic functions the image display device has. Based on the specification information, the control script generation unit 80 determines whether or not the image display device has a basic function for executing a visual effect output function. Then, based on the determination, it is determined whether the visual effect output function is included in the control script provided to the image display device. the

从而,根据上述图像显示装置的基本功能,能够提供更加合适的控制脚本。  Therefore, it is possible to provide a more suitable control scenario based on the basic functions of the image display device described above. the

具体而言,上述控制脚本生成部80在判断为上述图像显示装置是可执行视觉效果输出功能的机型的情况下,可以确定在提供给该图像显示装置的控制脚本中包含视觉效果输出功能的定义。另一方面,在判断为图像显示装置是不能执行视觉效 果输出功能的机型的情况下,可以确定不包含视觉效果输出功能的定义。  Specifically, when the control script generation unit 80 determines that the image display device is a model that can execute the visual effect output function, it may determine that the visual effect output function is included in the control script provided to the image display device. definition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the image display device is a model that cannot execute the visual effect output function, it may be determined that the definition of the visual effect output function is not included. the

对于原本就没有执行第二功能用的基本功能的图像显示装置,即使定义该第二功能也是无用的。因此,在这种情况下,通过使得控制脚本中不包含该第二功能的定义,可以减少控制脚本的数据量,减轻收发信息的处理、控制脚本的解析处理等的负荷。  For an image display device that does not originally have a basic function for executing the second function, it is useless even if the second function is defined. Therefore, in this case, by not including the definition of the second function in the control script, the data volume of the control script can be reduced, and the load of the processing of sending and receiving information, the analysis processing of the control script, and the like can be reduced. the

上述控制脚本生成部80也可以生成控制脚本,该控制脚本还定义在利用上述第一功能显示的图像上重叠显示目标物的目标物显示功能作为第二功能,并且定义上述各第二功能的定时,使得上述图像显示装置在执行上述视觉效果输出功能的过程中不执行上述目标物显示功能。  The control script generation unit 80 may generate a control script that further defines, as a second function, an object display function for superimposing and displaying an object on an image displayed by the first function, and defines the timing of each of the second functions. so that the above-mentioned image display device does not execute the above-mentioned object display function during the process of executing the above-mentioned visual effect output function. the

根据上述结构,上述控制脚本生成部80生成控制脚本,该控制脚本定义在利用上述第一功能显示的图像上重叠显示目标物的目标物显示功能作为第二功能时,并且还定义上述各功能的定时,使得不同时执行该目标物显示功能和上述视觉效果输出功能。  According to the above configuration, the control script generation unit 80 generates a control script that defines an object display function that superimposes and displays an object on an image displayed by the first function as the second function, and further defines the functions of each of the above functions. Timing, so that the object display function and the above-mentioned visual effect output function are not executed at the same time. the

从而,在图像显示装置中,可以不同时执行目标物显示功能和上述视觉效果输出功能。  Therefore, in the image display device, the object display function and the above-mentioned visual effect output function may not be executed simultaneously. the

若同时执行上述视觉效果输出功能和上述目标物显示功能,则图像显示装置就不得不在伴随动作显示的图像上重叠显示目标物。这样,与添加了动画的图像重叠而对其它字符或图形进行描绘的处理,就成为高负荷的处理。因而,产生负荷集中在图像显示装置、不能顺利地执行各功能的问题。  If the above-mentioned visual effect output function and the above-mentioned object display function are executed at the same time, the image display device has to superimpose and display the object on the image displayed along with the motion. In this way, the process of drawing other characters or graphics while superimposing on the animation-added image becomes a high-load process. Therefore, there is a problem that the load is concentrated on the image display device, and each function cannot be smoothly executed. the

根据上述控制脚本,由于可以使图像显示装置不同时执行视觉效果输出功能和目标物显示功能,因此,能够避免负荷集中到图像显示装置的情况。  According to the above control script, since the image display device does not execute the visual effect output function and the object display function at the same time, it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on the image display device. the

此外,上述各第二功能的定时的具体例如下所述。  In addition, the specific example of the timing of each said 2nd function is as follows. the

在上述图像数据提供装置中,上述控制脚本生成单元也可以这样生成控制脚本,使得该控制脚本将上述目标物显示功能的开始定义为上述视觉效果输出功能的结束条件。  In the above image data providing device, the control script generation unit may generate a control script such that the control script defines start of the object display function as an end condition of the visual effect output function. the

或者,上述控制脚本生成单元也可以这样生成控制脚本,使得该控制脚本将上述视觉效果输出功能的结束定义为上述目标物显示功能的开始条件。  Alternatively, the control script generation unit may also generate the control script such that the control script defines the end of the visual effect output function as a start condition of the object display function. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置;以及上述图像数据提供装置,上述图像显示装置的上述控制脚本执行部41按照上述图像数据提供装置提供的显示用数据中包含的上述控制脚本,执行与上述请求图像有关的视觉效果输出功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the image display system of the present invention is characterized in that it includes: the above-mentioned image display device; The above-mentioned control script included in the data executes the visual effect output function related to the above-mentioned requested image. the

为了达到上述目的,本发明的图像显示系统的控制方法是包括图像数据提供装置和对该图像数据提供装置生成的显示用数据进行处理从而显示图像的图像显示装置的图像显示系统的控制方法,它的特征在于,包括:上述图像显示装置向上述图像数据提供装置请求显示用数据的请求步骤,该显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,所述控制脚本定义显示该图像的第一功能以及利用该第一功能显示上述图像时的本装置的动作即第二功能;上述图像数据提供装置生成控制脚本的生成步骤,该控制脚本定义显示由上述图像显示装置所请求的请求图像的第一功能,并且定义使该请求图像伴随动作显示的视觉效果输出功能作为第二功能;将显示用数据发送到上述图像显示装置的发送步骤,该显示用数据包括上述请求图像和在上述生成步骤中生成的控制脚本;第一功能执行步骤,该第一功能执行步骤是上述图像显示装置按照从上述图像数据提供装置接收的上述控制脚本,执行存放在基本功能程序存放部的从上述控制脚本调出的基本功能程序,从而执行上述第一功能并显示上述请求图像;以及第二功能执行步骤,该第二功能执行步骤是按照上述控制脚本执行上述基本功能程序,从而执行与上述图像有关的视觉效果输出功能作为第二功能。  In order to achieve the above object, the method for controlling an image display system of the present invention is a method for controlling an image display system including an image data providing device and an image display device that processes display data generated by the image data providing device to display an image. The present invention is characterized by comprising: a request step in which the image display device requests display data from the image data providing device, the display data includes an image and a control script, and the control script defines a first function for displaying the image and uses the second function to display the image. The second function is the operation of the device when the first function displays the above-mentioned image; the step of generating a control script by the above-mentioned image data providing device. The control script defines the first function of displaying the requested image requested by the above-mentioned image display device, and defines A visual effect output function for displaying the request image accompanying the action as a second function; a sending step of sending display data to the above-mentioned image display device, the display data including the above-mentioned request image and the control script generated in the above-mentioned generating step; A first function executing step, wherein the image display device executes a basic function program stored in a basic function program storage unit called from the control script according to the control script received from the image data providing device, Thereby executing the above-mentioned first function and displaying the above-mentioned request image; and a second function execution step, the second function execution step is to execute the above-mentioned basic function program according to the above-mentioned control script, thereby executing the visual effect output function related to the above-mentioned image as the second Function. the

根据上述方法,上述图像显示装置向上述图像数据提供装置请求显示用数据,该显示用数据包括图像和控制脚本,所述控制脚本定义显示该图像的第一功能以及显示该图像时的图像显示装置的动作即第二功能,上述图像数据提供装置根据该请求,生成包含所请求图像的显示用数据。然后,上述图像数据提供装置按如下所述那样生成包含在上述显示用数据中的控制脚本。  According to the above method, the image display device requests display data from the image data providing device, the display data includes an image and a control script, the control script defines a first function for displaying the image and the image display device when displaying the image The operation of the second function is that the image data providing device generates display data including the requested image in response to the request. Then, the image data providing device generates a control script included in the display data as follows. the

即,首先生成控制脚本,该控制脚本定义显示所请求图像的第一功能,并且定义利用该第一功能显示上述目标物时的上述图像显示装置的动作作为第二功能。这里,至少定义视觉效果输出功能作为上述第二功能,该视觉效果输出功能使得上述图像伴随动作显示。  That is, first, a control script is generated which defines a first function for displaying a requested image, and defines, as a second function, an operation of the image display device when the object is displayed using the first function. Here, at least a visual effect output function that causes the above-mentioned image to be displayed with an action is defined as the above-mentioned second function. the

上述图像显示装置从上述图像数据提供装置接收包含上述那样生成的控制脚本的显示用数据,控制脚本执行部41根据上述控制脚本进行动作。具体而言,按照控制脚本,执行第一功能和第二功能(至少是视觉效果输出功能)。从而,可以对利用第一功能显示的图像添加对应的视觉效果,并进行显示。  The image display device receives display data including the control script generated as described above from the image data provider, and the control script execution unit 41 operates according to the control script. Specifically, the first function and the second function (at least the visual effect output function) are executed according to the control script. Therefore, a corresponding visual effect can be added to the image displayed by the first function and displayed. the

由此,利用控制脚本,可以实现这样的图像显示系统,该图像显示系统不仅能够使图像显示装置执行显示图像的第一功能,还能够使其执行多种第二功能,并且在第二功能是视觉效果输出功能的情况下,在该图像显示装置中,能够对上述图像添加动作并进行显示。  Thus, by using the control script, it is possible to realize an image display system that not only causes the image display device to perform the first function of displaying images, but also enables it to perform various second functions, and when the second function is In the case of the visual effect output function, the image display device can add motion to the image and display it. the

由以上可知,即使图像显示装置上市后,也能够灵活地添加、变更使图像显示装置执行的上述第二功能,即便不对基本功能程序存放部中存放的基本功能程序进行更新,也能够容易地进行图像显示装置的功能变更。而且,由于可以对显示图像添加相应的视觉效果而显示图像,因此能够提供更加有趣的内容给用户。  As can be seen from the above, even after the image display device is launched, the above-mentioned second function to be executed by the image display device can be flexibly added or changed, and the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit can be easily implemented without updating the basic function program. Functional change of the image display device. Moreover, since the image can be displayed by adding corresponding visual effects to the displayed image, more interesting content can be provided to the user. the

再者,上述图像显示装置和上述图像数据提供装置可由计算机实现,在这种情况下,通过使计算机当作上述各部分工作,从而用计算机实现上述图像显示装置和上述图像数据提供装置中的至少一个装置,这样的图像显示装置的控制程序、图像数据提供装置的控制程序和分别记录这些程序的计算机可读取记录介质也归入本发明的范畴。  Furthermore, the above-mentioned image display device and the above-mentioned image data providing device can be realized by a computer. In this case, by making the computer operate as the above-mentioned parts, at least one of the above-mentioned image display device and the above-mentioned image data providing device can be realized by the computer. A device, a control program of such an image display device, a control program of an image data supply device, and a computer-readable recording medium respectively recording these programs are also included in the category of the present invention. the

发明的详细说明内容中叙述的具体实施方式或实施例都只是本发明的技术内容,但不能够狭义地理解为只限于这样的具体例子,在本发明的精神和后文记载的权利要求书的范围内,可以进行各种变更而实施。  The specific implementation modes or examples described in the detailed description of the invention are only the technical contents of the present invention, but should not be construed in a narrow sense as being limited to such specific examples. In the spirit of the present invention and the following claims Various modifications can be made within the scope. the

工业上的实用性  Industrial Applicability

本发明的图像显示装置按照从图像数据提供装置与图像一起提供的控制脚本,可以执行控制脚本定义的功能。又,本发明的图像数据提供装置可以根据图像显示装置的请求内容生成控制脚本,与图像一起提供给图像显示装置。因而,可以用于图像数据提供装置提供与图像显示装置的请求相应的图像的图像显示系统。本发明的图像显示装置特别能适用于无法容易改写程序的组合型图像显示装置。  The image display device of the present invention can execute the functions defined by the control script according to the control script provided together with the image from the image data providing device. Furthermore, the image data providing device of the present invention can generate a control script based on the content of the request from the image display device, and provide the image data together with the image to the image display device. Therefore, it can be used in an image display system in which an image data providing device provides an image corresponding to a request from an image display device. The image display device of the present invention is particularly applicable to a combined image display device whose program cannot be easily rewritten. the

Claims (13)

1.一种显示装置,是对从外部获取的显示用数据进行处理从而显示静止图像或动态图像的显示装置,其特征在于,1. A display device that processes display data acquired from outside to display a still image or a moving image, characterized in that, 所述显示用数据包括静止图像或动态图像和控制信息,所述控制信息定义了显示该静止图像或动态图像的功能即第一功能、以及利用该第一功能显示所述静止图像或动态图像时的本装置的动作即第二功能,The display data includes a still image or a moving image and control information defining a function for displaying the still image or moving image, that is, a first function, and when the still image or moving image is displayed using the first function. The action of this device is the second function, 所述显示装置包括:The display device includes: 通过执行存放于基本功能程序存放部的从所述控制信息调出的基本功能程序,从而实现基本功能的基本功能执行单元,其中,所述基本功能为,通过被组合从而实现所述第一功能和所述第二功能的一个单纯的功能;以及A basic function execution unit that realizes a basic function by executing a basic function program called from the control information stored in a basic function program storage unit, wherein the basic functions are combined to realize the first function and a mere function of said second function; and 通过按照所述控制信息控制所述基本功能执行单元、并组合所述基本功能,从而执行所述控制信息中定义的所述第一功能和所述第二功能的控制信息执行单元,a control information executing unit that executes the first function and the second function defined in the control information by controlling the basic function executing unit according to the control information and combining the basic functions, 所述控制信息中所定义的所述第二功能至少包括视觉效果输出功能,所述视觉效果输出功能使得利用所述第一功能显示的静止图像或动态图像伴随动作显示,The second function defined in the control information includes at least a visual effect output function, the visual effect output function causes the still image or the dynamic image displayed by the first function to be displayed with an action, 所述控制信息执行单元按照所述控制信息来组合所述基本功能,从而实现所述第一功能、即显示所述静止图像或动态图像,并且按照所述控制信息来组合所述基本功能,从而实现对显示中的该静止图像或动态图像执行所述第二功能中的所述视觉效果输出功能。The control information execution unit combines the basic functions according to the control information, thereby realizing the first function, that is, displaying the still image or the dynamic image, and combines the basic functions according to the control information, thereby Implementing the visual effect output function in the second function on the still image or dynamic image being displayed. 2.如权利要求1所述的显示装置,其特征在于,2. The display device according to claim 1, wherein 在所述控制信息中所定义的所述第二功能除了所述视觉效果输出功能以外,还包括目标物显示功能,所述目标物显示功能在利用所述第一功能显示的静止图像或动态图像上重叠显示目标物,In addition to the visual effect output function, the second function defined in the control information also includes an object display function, and the object display function is based on a still image or a dynamic image displayed by the first function. The target object is superimposed on the top, 并且所述控制信息中分别定义有所述视觉效果输出功能的定时、以及所述目标物显示功能的定时,使得本装置在执行所述视觉效果输出功能过程中不执行所述目标物显示功能,And the timing of the visual effect output function and the timing of the target display function are respectively defined in the control information, so that the device does not execute the target display function during the execution of the visual effect output function, 所述控制信息执行单元按照所述控制信息所定义的所述视觉效果输出功能的定时、以及所述目标物显示功能的定时,分别执行所述视觉效果输出功能、以及所述目标物显示功能。The control information execution unit respectively executes the visual effect output function and the object display function according to the timing of the visual effect output function and the timing of the object display function defined by the control information. 3.如权利要求2所述的显示装置,其特征在于,3. The display device according to claim 2, wherein: 在所述控制信息中,将所述目标物显示功能的开始定义为所述视觉效果输出功能的结束条件,In the control information, the start of the object display function is defined as the end condition of the visual effect output function, 所述控制信息执行单元开始执行所述目标物显示功能时,按照所述结束条件,结束执行所述视觉效果输出功能。When the control information execution unit starts to execute the object display function, it ends the execution of the visual effect output function according to the end condition. 4.如权利要求2所述的显示装置,其特征在于,4. The display device according to claim 2, wherein 在所述控制信息中,将所述视觉效果输出功能的结束定义为所述目标物显示功能的开始条件,In the control information, the end of the visual effect output function is defined as the start condition of the object display function, 所述控制信息执行单元结束执行所述视觉效果输出功能时,按照所述开始条件,开始执行所述目标物显示功能。When the control information execution unit finishes executing the visual effect output function, it starts to execute the object display function according to the start condition. 5.如权利要求1~4中的任一项所述的显示装置,其特征在于,5. The display device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein: 在所述控制信息中,还定义听觉效果输出功能作为所述第二功能,所述听觉效果输出功能输出与利用所述第一功能显示的静止图像或动态图像有关的声音数据,In the control information, an auditory effect output function that outputs sound data related to a still image or a moving image displayed using the first function is also defined as the second function, 所述控制信息执行单元按照所述控制信息,执行与利用所述第一功能显示的静止图像或动态图像有关的所述视觉效果输出功能和所述听觉效果输出功能中的至少一种功能。The control information execution unit executes at least one of the visual effect output function and the auditory effect output function related to the still image or the moving image displayed by the first function according to the control information. 6.一种数据提供装置,是生成用于显示装置显示静止图像或动态图像的显示用数据的数据提供装置,其特征在于,6. A data providing device for generating display data for a display device to display a still image or a moving image, characterized in that, 所述显示用数据包括静止图像或动态图像和控制信息,所述控制信息定义了显示该静止图像或动态图像的功能即第一功能、以及利用该第一功能显示所述静止图像或动态图像时的显示装置的动作即第二功能,The display data includes a still image or a moving image and control information defining a function for displaying the still image or moving image, that is, a first function, and when the still image or moving image is displayed using the first function. The action of the display device is the second function, 所述数据提供装置包括:The data providing means include: 根据从所述显示装置发送来的请求所述显示用数据的显示用数据请求消息获取所请求的请求静止图像或动态图像的识别信息的识别信息获取单元;an identification information acquisition unit that acquires identification information of the requested still image or dynamic image according to a display data request message transmitted from the display device requesting the display data; 生成控制信息的控制信息生成单元,所述控制信息定义显示由所述识别信息获取单元获取的识别信息确定的请求静止图像或动态图像的功能即第一功能,并且定义至少包括伴随动作显示该请求静止图像或动态图像的视觉效果输出功能的第二功能;以及A control information generation unit that generates control information that defines a first function that displays a request for a still image or a moving image specified by the identification information acquired by the identification information acquisition unit, and defines at least an accompanying action to display the request A second function of the visual effect output function of still images or moving images; and 生成显示用数据的显示用数据生成单元,所述显示用数据包括所述请求静止图像或动态图像和所述控制信息生成单元生成的所述控制信息,a display data generating unit that generates display data including the requested still image or moving image and the control information generated by the control information generating unit, 所述控制信息通过组合所述显示装置的基本功能,从而定义所述第一功能以及所述第二功能,其中,所述基本功能为,通过被组合从而实现所述第一功能和所述第二功能的一个单纯的功能,The control information defines the first function and the second function by combining the basic functions of the display device, wherein the basic functions are to realize the first function and the second function by being combined. A simple function of two functions, 所述基本功能是这样实现的,即,所述显示装置具备的基本功能程序存储部中所存储的基本功能程序根据所述控制信息而被调出,并由所述显示装置来执行。The basic function is realized by calling the basic function program stored in the basic function program storage unit of the display device according to the control information and executing it by the display device. 7.如权利要求6所述的数据提供装置,其特征在于,7. The data providing device according to claim 6, wherein: 可适用于要提供给所述显示装置的静止图像或动态图像的视觉效果与该静止图像或动态图像关联地存储在效果信息存储部中,visual effects applicable to still images or moving images to be provided to the display device are stored in the effect information storage section in association with the still images or moving images, 所述控制信息生成单元从所述效果信息存储部确定与所述请求静止图像或动态图像相关的视觉效果,生成定义了输出该视觉效果用的视觉效果输出功能的控制信息。The control information generating unit specifies a visual effect related to the requested still image or moving image from the effect information storage unit, and generates control information defining a visual effect output function for outputting the visual effect. 8.如权利要求6所述的数据提供装置,其特征在于,8. The data providing device according to claim 6, wherein: 所述显示用数据请求消息中包含表示所述显示装置的基本功能的规格信息,The display data request message includes specification information indicating basic functions of the display device, 所述控制信息生成单元根据所述规格信息,确定所述控制信息中是否包含所述视觉效果输出功能的定义。The control information generation unit determines whether the control information includes the definition of the visual effect output function according to the specification information. 9.如权利要求6所述的数据提供装置,其特征在于,9. The data providing device according to claim 6, wherein: 所述控制信息生成单元所定义的所述第二功能除了所述视觉效果输出功能以外,还包括目标物显示功能,所述目标物显示功能在利用所述第一功能显示的静止图像或动态图像上重叠显示目标物,In addition to the visual effect output function, the second function defined by the control information generation unit further includes an object display function, and the object display function is based on the still image or the dynamic image displayed by the first function. The target object is superimposed on the top, 并且所述控制信息生成单元生成控制信息,该控制信息分别定义所述视觉效果输出功能的定时、以及所述目标物显示功能的定时,使得所述显示装置在执行所述视觉效果输出功能的过程中不执行所述目标物显示功能。And the control information generation unit generates control information, the control information respectively defines the timing of the visual effect output function and the timing of the object display function, so that the display device can perform the visual effect output function The object display function described above is not executed. 10.如权利要求9所述的数据提供装置,其特征在于,10. The data providing device according to claim 9, wherein: 所述控制信息生成单元生成控制信息,所述控制信息将所述目标物显示功能的开始定义为所述视觉效果输出功能的结束条件。The control information generating unit generates control information defining start of the object display function as an end condition of the visual effect output function. 11.如权利要求9所述的数据提供装置,其特征在于,11. The data providing device according to claim 9, wherein: 所述控制信息生成单元生成控制信息,所述控制信息将所述视觉效果输出功能的结束定义为所述目标物显示功能的开始条件。The control information generating unit generates control information defining the end of the visual effect output function as a start condition of the object display function. 12.一种显示系统,其特征在于,包括:12. A display system, characterized in that it comprises: 权利要求1所述的显示装置;以及The display device of claim 1; and 权利要求6所述的数据提供装置,The data providing device according to claim 6, 所述显示装置的所述控制信息执行单元按照所述数据提供装置提供的显示用数据中包含的所述控制信息,执行与所述请求静止图像或动态图像有关的视觉效果输出功能。The control information executing unit of the display device executes a visual effect output function related to the requested still image or moving image according to the control information included in the display data provided by the data providing device. 13.一种显示系统的控制方法,是包括数据提供装置和对该数据提供装置生成的显示用数据进行处理从而显示静止图像或动态图像的显示装置的显示系统的控制方法,其特征在于,包括:13. A method for controlling a display system, comprising a data providing device and a display device for processing display data generated by the data providing device to display still images or moving images, characterized in that it includes : 所述显示装置向所述数据提供装置请求显示用数据的请求步骤,所述显示用数据包括静止图像或动态图像和控制信息,所述控制信息定义显示该静止图像或动态图像的功能即第一功能、以及利用该第一功能显示所述静止图像或动态图像时的本装置的动作即第二功能;The requesting step of the display device requesting display data from the data providing device, the display data including a still image or a moving image and control information defining a function for displaying the still image or moving image, that is, a first function, and the action of the device when displaying the still image or moving image using the first function, that is, the second function; 所述数据提供装置生成控制信息的生成步骤,该控制信息定义显示由所述显示装置所请求的请求静止图像或动态图像的功能即第一功能,并且定义第二功能,该第二功能至少包括使该请求静止图像或动态图像伴随动作显示的视觉效果输出功能;The step of generating control information by the data providing means that defines a first function that is a function of displaying a requested still image or moving image requested by the display means, and defines a second function that includes at least A visual effect output function that makes the requested still image or dynamic image displayed with the action; 将显示用数据发送到所述显示装置的发送步骤,所述显示用数据包括所述请求静止图像或动态图像和在所述生成步骤中生成的控制信息;a transmitting step of transmitting data for display to said display device, said data for display including said requested still image or moving image and control information generated in said generating step; 所述显示装置按照从所述数据提供装置接收的所述控制信息,执行存放在基本功能程序存放部的从所述控制信息调出的基本功能程序、并组合基本功能,从而执行所述第一功能、即显示所述请求静止图像或动态图像的第一功能执行步骤,其中,所述基本功能为,通过被组合从而实现所述第一功能和所述第二功能的一个单纯的功能;以及The display device executes the basic function program called from the control information stored in the basic function program storage unit according to the control information received from the data providing device, and combines the basic functions to execute the first a function, that is, a first function performing step of displaying the requested still image or moving image, wherein the basic function is a simple function that is combined to realize the first function and the second function; and 按照所述控制信息执行所述基本功能程序、并组合基本功能,从而执行与所述该静止图像或动态图像有关的、所述第二功能中的所述视觉效果输出功能的第二功能执行步骤。Executing the basic function program according to the control information, and combining the basic functions, so as to execute the second function execution step of the visual effect output function in the second function related to the still image or dynamic image .
CN2007800373823A 2006-08-11 2007-08-08 Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium Expired - Fee Related CN101523909B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006220571 2006-08-11
JP220571/2006 2006-08-11
JP2007168255A JP4926853B2 (en) 2006-08-11 2007-06-26 Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium
JP168255/2007 2007-06-26
PCT/JP2007/065546 WO2008018511A1 (en) 2006-08-11 2007-08-08 Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN101523909A CN101523909A (en) 2009-09-02
CN101523909B true CN101523909B (en) 2012-05-23

Family

ID=39033036

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN2007800373823A Expired - Fee Related CN101523909B (en) 2006-08-11 2007-08-08 Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium
CN2007800381425A Expired - Fee Related CN101523910B (en) 2006-08-11 2007-08-08 Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN2007800381425A Expired - Fee Related CN101523910B (en) 2006-08-11 2007-08-08 Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN101523909B (en)
WO (1) WO2008018506A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101365124B (en) * 2008-10-09 2011-11-30 中国电信股份有限公司 Method and system for network television video play control
JP5444166B2 (en) * 2010-08-25 2014-03-19 アズビル株式会社 Equipment management device, screen display method, and program
CN103984246B (en) * 2014-04-14 2016-09-14 美的集团股份有限公司 Home appliance and the control method thereof of script can be performed
CN104331277B (en) * 2014-10-14 2018-10-19 厦门美图之家科技有限公司 A kind of mass production method for the picture material that can directly upgrade
CN105430497A (en) * 2015-11-13 2016-03-23 深圳Tcl数字技术有限公司 Play control method and device
WO2017152355A1 (en) * 2016-03-08 2017-09-14 华为技术有限公司 Display method and terminal device
JP6801470B2 (en) * 2017-01-20 2020-12-16 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Printing processing system, server and printing equipment
US10388255B2 (en) 2018-06-29 2019-08-20 Intel Corporation Computers for supporting multiple virtual reality display devices and related methods
JP7448830B2 (en) * 2019-06-07 2024-03-13 ダイキン工業株式会社 Equipment control system, equipment control method

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1589464A (en) * 2001-11-19 2005-03-02 松下电器产业株式会社 Display controller, image display and method for transferring control data
EP1571842A1 (en) * 2002-12-12 2005-09-07 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Multi-medium data processing device capable of easily creating multi-medium content

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1998053443A1 (en) * 1997-05-19 1998-11-26 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Graphic display, synchronous reproduction method, and synchronous av reproducing device
JP3622913B2 (en) * 2002-03-25 2005-02-23 ソニー株式会社 Information image utilization system, information image management apparatus, information image management method, user information image, program, and recording medium
US20040091234A1 (en) * 2002-11-07 2004-05-13 Delorme Alexandre P.V. System and method of facilitating appliance behavior modification

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1589464A (en) * 2001-11-19 2005-03-02 松下电器产业株式会社 Display controller, image display and method for transferring control data
EP1571842A1 (en) * 2002-12-12 2005-09-07 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Multi-medium data processing device capable of easily creating multi-medium content

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101523910B (en) 2011-12-28
CN101523910A (en) 2009-09-02
WO2008018506A1 (en) 2008-02-14
CN101523909A (en) 2009-09-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN101523909B (en) Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium
US8390615B2 (en) Image display apparatus, image data providing apparatus, and image display system providing a control script for executing basic functions
JP2025028878A (en) Systems, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with augmented and virtual reality environments - Patents.com
CN101479783B (en) Image data providing device, image display device, image display system, image data providing device control method, image display device control method
US8584043B2 (en) Mobile terminal including touch screen and method of controlling operation thereof
CN112533021B (en) Display method and display equipment
JP4926852B2 (en) Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium
CN112035195B (en) Application interface display method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
WO2020248714A1 (en) Data transmission method and device
CN103856804A (en) Information processing apparatus, method and system, and output apparatus and method
KR101638963B1 (en) User terminal apparatus and control method thereof
JP4860561B2 (en) Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium
JP4926853B2 (en) Image display device, image data providing device, image display system, image display system control method, control program, and recording medium
WO2023231696A1 (en) Photographing method and related device
WO2023226699A1 (en) Video recording method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2021088308A1 (en) Display device and music recommendation method
CN114417035A (en) A picture browsing method and display device
CN111984167A (en) Rapid naming method and display device
CN116074593B (en) Display device and method for realizing media resource playback progress display
WO2023226695A1 (en) Video recording method and apparatus, and storage medium
CN113949911A (en) Method for displaying secondary screen homepage background of display device, display device and terminal
JP2017138983A (en) Computer program stored in storage medium so as to execute content providing method, the method and device therefor
US20240302937A1 (en) Display apparatus and method
CN116095460A (en) Video recording method, device and storage medium
WO2025091279A1 (en) Screen projection display system, screen projection display method and related apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
C14 Grant of patent or utility model
GR01 Patent grant
CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee

Granted publication date: 20120523

Termination date: 20160808

CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee